Winamp Logo
Pep Talks for Side Hustlers Cover
Pep Talks for Side Hustlers Profile

Pep Talks for Side Hustlers

English, Finance, 1 season, 377 episodes, 1 day, 20 hours, 48 minutes
About
If want to know how to market your business online, former side-hustler turned full-time entrepreneur Shannon Mattern shares all her best online marketing strategies. She also shares her side-hustle to self-employed experience to inspire you to build a successful side hustle that can replace your day job income. Growing a business while working full time is challenging, but it can also be extremely rewarding! Get Shannon's best insider tips, tactics and actionable strategies for starting a side hustle, including mindset, time management, work-life balance, relationships, marketing strategies, money, and how to grow a business while working full time. Learn more about Pep Talks for Side Hustlers and find freebies, resources and show notes at https://www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com
Episode Artwork

Ep. 376 - 2021 Year in Review and My Journey from $0 to $500K

Find out how much money my business made in December 2021 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way in my journey from $0 to $500K! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
2/4/20222 hours, 18 minutes, 8 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 375 - Creating Location and Financial Independence through Coding with Julia Taylor of GeekPack

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/375 Bio: Julia is the CEO & Founder of GeekPack®. Some people look at the sky and see stars; others see constellations. Some people look at lines of code and see a website; Julia saw a path to empower women in building their dreams. Julia has taught over 2,400 women to say "YES" to any WordPress request, but not only that, “YES” to themselves, and “YES” to creating life on their own terms. Mastering WordPress has not only been the single biggest driver for Julia's career progression, but it has also enabled her to follow her dreams of a TRULY location-independent lifestyle. Connect with Julia: Website Facebook Instagram YouTube LinkedIn
2/2/202258 minutes, 44 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 374 - When to Hire a Web Designer for Your Side Hustle with Laura Kamark

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/374 Bio: Laura Kåmark is a strategic web designer and tech integrator who creates stunning, money-making websites for female entrepreneurs. With her signature VIP Website Experience, she’ll take your DIY website and turn it into one that looks good AND sells. Leave the automations to her as she creates an intentional customer journey that converts your website visitors into paying clients. Connect with Laura: Laura's Website FREE Website Planning Workbook Instagram Facebook LinkedIn
1/26/202254 minutes, 56 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 373 - How Entrepreneurs Just Like You Have Built Successful Businesses with Paul Klein of Bizable TV

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/373 Bio: Paul Klein is a business consultant and entrepreneur. From his days as a 1980s hair band guitarist and lifelong entrepreneur to starting and scaling a successful SAAS company to consulting for some of the biggest brands including Target, Neiman Marcus, Starbucks, Holiday Inn, and other global brands, Paul helps Consultants, Freelancers, and Solopreneur’s price their services, stop undercharging in order to build 7 figure businesses. Paul is the host of the BizableTV podcast (formerly the Pricing Is Positioning Podcast) and Co-Founder Producer for BizableTV. BizableTV is a Netflix-style streaming service for entrepreneurs launching in January 2022 and will be accessible on over 1000 devices including iOS devices, Android devices, Macs, PCs, streaming media boxes such as Roku, Apple TV, Android TV, and FireTV. Connect with Paul: Paul's Website BizableTV Instagram YouTube Facebook Listeners of Pep Talks for Side Hustlers can get FREE Insiders Access to some of BizableTV's early films, insider-only updates, and special offers HERE Get Shannon's First Episode Free!
1/12/202245 minutes, 7 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 372 - SEO Secrets with Meg Casebolt of Love at First Search

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/372 Bio: Meg Casebolt is the founder of Love At First Search, an agency singularly devoted to helping online businesses get found in search results (like Google, YouTube & iTunes) & turn those new readers into leads, subscribers, and sales. Meg’s clients are entrepreneurs who are too busy changing the world to worry about things like website conversion rates and search traffic ... but still want their websites to get found on Google for their brilliance and turn readers. SEO is our vehicle for amplifying female entrepreneurial voices and empowering women to help their families, communities, and the wider world flourish. Connect with Meg: Website Instagram YouTube Free SEO Starter Kit
1/5/202257 minutes, 46 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 371 - November 2021 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in November 2021 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
12/31/20211 hour, 3 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 370 - How to Sell $30K VIP Days with Pia Silva of NO BS Agency Mastery

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/370 Bio: Pia Silva is a partner and brand strategist at Worstofall Design where they build entire brands in 1-3 day intensives. She’s also the founder of No BS Agency Mastery where she helps small branding agencies increase profits and freedom without hiring employees. She’s a TEDx speaker, a Forbes contributor, podcast host and author of Badass Your Brand. Connect with Pia: Website Instagram Facebook Get the NO BS Blueprint to a More Profitable Small Agency
12/22/202152 minutes, 56 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 369 - Build Your Personal Brand Through Storytelling with Michelle Knight of Brandmerry

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/369 Bio: Michelle Knight is the founder of Brandmerry.com where she supports entrepreneurs in branding themselves online, marketing their message, and creating more income and impact. Michelle focuses on teaching the power of storytelling to create an authentic brand that allows them to show up as they are and build a loyal community. Connect with Michelle: Website Instagram Facebook 10 Ways to Improve Your Marketing Before 2022
12/15/202152 minutes, 30 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 368 - From Virtual Assistant to 7-Figure CEO with Abbey Ashley of the Virtual Savvy

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/368 Bio: Abbey Ashley is the Founder of The Virtual Savvy. She helps aspiring virtual assistants launch and grow their own at-home businesses from scratch. Abbey started her own virtual assistant business in 2015 and was able to double the salary from her full-time corporate job, working only 20 hours a week... in just 30 days! She's since gone on to grow a multi-seven-figure business and retire her husband ALL from her at-home business. Connect with Abbey: Website Instagram Facebook LinkedIn FREE Step-by-Step Checklist on how Abbey started her VA business from scratch!
12/8/202151 minutes, 47 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 367 - Turn Your Service Into a Product with Christina Scalera

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/367 Bio: Christina Scalera is the attorney and founder behind The Contract Shop®, a contract template store for creative entrepreneurs, wedding professionals, and coaches. She also teaches others how they too can create an online shop phenomenon, create daily income, and get out of the client-getting hustle with her course, Products on Tap®. Connect with Christina: Website Instagram Facebook Pinterest YouTube
12/1/202152 minutes, 43 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 366 - October 2021 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in October 2021 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
11/24/202150 minutes, 26 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 365 - Creating your 3-Word Rebellion with Dr. Michelle Mazur

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/365 Bio: Dr. Michelle Mazur is a messaging expert who works with brilliant business owners who are shaking things up, but having trouble talking about it. She combines the tools of successful social movements with the research skills she earned in her Communications Ph.D. to help them craft their powerful, captivating message. Connect with Michelle: Website Instagram Facebook LinkedIn Twitter
11/17/202154 minutes, 48 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 364 - Becoming a Certified Life Coach with Lee Chaix McDonough

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/364 Bio: Lee Chaix McDonough is the CEO and Founder of Coach With Clarity, a training and education company for life and business coaches. She is also the host of the Coach with Clarity podcast and author of the #1 Amazon book, ACT On Your Business: Braving the storms of entrepreneurship and creating success through meaning, mindset, and mindfulness. Connect with Lee: Website Instagram Facebook FREE Coach with Clarity Business Blueprint
11/10/202156 minutes, 31 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 363 - Double Your Income (Without Doubling Your To-Do List) with Lani Jackson of the Brilliant Mompreneurs Podcast

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/363 Bio: Lani is a Clarity & Strategy Coach for mom entrepreneurs! Helping them to double their income without doubling their to-do list. Her mission is to help mompreneurs get out of survival mode, release the mom guilt, and create a clear plan of action that will help them reach their dreams of 5k months and more! Connect with Lani: Website Instagram Facebook FREE Take Back Time Class
11/3/202151 minutes, 41 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 362 - September 2021 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in September 2021 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
10/27/20211 hour, 10 minutes, 36 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 361 - Hosting a Virtual Summit to Grow Your Side Hustle

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!    
10/20/20211 hour, 36 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 360 - Pivoting for Purpose (and Profit) with Monica Froese of Redefining Mom

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/360 Bio: Monica is a digital product coach for women business owners. She has an MBA degree in finance and marketing and runs two brands Redefining Mom, a site for helping women thrive in both motherhood and business, and Empowered Business, where she empowers women to create financial independence through building 6-figure digital product businesses. She spent 11 years working for a Fortune 100 company running multi-million dollar marketing campaigns with large brands like Microsoft and HP. Now she provides online marketing education to small businesses that are looking to build a profitable revenue stream through digital products through her online courses and podcast. Connect with Monica: Website Passion to Profit Experiment The Empowered Business Podcast Instagram
10/13/202159 minutes, 41 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 359 - Creating Sold-Out Services for Coaches with Tavona Denise

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/359 Bio: TaVona Denise is on a mission to help you create a life you love and a business on your terms. She’s the voice behind the Breaking Protocol podcast, author of Unstoppable Success and she teaches Type A entrepreneurs how to achieve their goals, without the hustle overwhelm and burnout. Connect with TaVona: Website Breaking Protocal Podcast Instagram Linkedin
10/6/202158 minutes, 34 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 358 - How to Authentically Grow Your Service-Based Business with Loran Greeter

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/358 Bio: Loran Geeter is a Business & Operations Coach helping OBMs, Systems Strategist and VAs stop skipping steps so they can position their expert authority and [then] step into CEO. As a service provider herself, Loran understands the power of positioning yourself as an authority in the online space and creating a sustainable and profitable business that not only transforms your clients but your life as well. Connect with Loran: Website Instagram Positioned to Profit Roadmap
9/29/202149 minutes, 50 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 357 - Grow and Scale Your Side Hustle (without Burnout) with Angela Henderson

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/357 Bio: Angela is an international award winning business coach for women, keynote speaker, and podcaster who helps women in business get all the pieces in place to have consistent 5 figure months and then onto 6/7 figure years without burning out in the process. Angela’s podcast is The Business + Life Conversations Podcast - a must-listen, so be sure to check it out in the show notes. Angela is an international award winning business coach for women, keynote speaker, and podcaster who helps women in business get all the pieces in place to have consistent 5 figure months and then onto 6/7 figure years without burning out in the process. Angela’s podcast is The Business + Life Conversations Podcast - a must-listen, so be sure to check it out in the show notes. Connect with Angela: Website The Business and Life Conversations Podcast Instagram Linkedin
9/22/202156 minutes, 54 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 356 - August 2021 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in August 2021 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
9/15/20211 hour, 2 minutes, 48 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 355 - Side Hustle to Self-Employed Summit 12 Month Roadmap Replay

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/355 If you attended the Side Hustle to Self-Employed Summit, you know that my session included a 12-month roadmap to help you go from a side hustler to total self-employment! I wanted to share that session with my listeners today so, even if you didn't attend, you could keep this information at hand. So many amazing things happened at the summit, so if you love this session & want to hear more, click here to grab an all-access pass & listen in on all of the other sessions!
9/8/202156 minutes, 23 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 354 - Creating Financial Freedom with Katie Scott of More With Money

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/354 Bio: Katie is a former-accountant turned entrepreneur who gets over-excited about money management systems and business strategy. She teaches women entrepreneurs how to achieve personal and business financial wellness so they're truly free to pursue their passions, not their next paycheck. Connect with Katie:   Website Instagram Katie's CFO Starter Kit! Profit First by Mike Michalowicz You Need a Budget (YNAB)
9/1/202152 minutes, 43 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 353 - July 2021 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in July 2021 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
8/25/20211 hour, 14 minutes, 26 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 352 - How to Land Your Ideal Clients as an Online Business Manager with Sarah Noked

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/352 Bio: Sarah Noked is the founder of Sarah Noked OBM & her mission is to help business owners and online service professionals plan and implement the right systems to achieve their goals. Connect with Sarah: Listen to Sarah's first episode! Website Instagram Sarah's OBM Facebook Group Twitter
8/18/202151 minutes, 35 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 351 - Finding Success Your Own Way with Annelise Worn

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/351 Bio: Annelise Worn is a Business Strategist, Marketing Mentor, and Marketing Agency CEO. Her work with clients lies in developing and implementing efficient, effective, high converting marketing strategies that actually move the needle. Annelise supports entrepreneurs to transform their business and discover the profit and freedom they started it to achieve. Connect with Annelise: Website Instagram Facebook LinkedIn
8/11/202153 minutes, 7 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 350 - How to Thrive as a Creative Business Owner with Jay Clouse of Freelancing School

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/350 Bio: After deciding to build his own way, Jay has taken what he knows about building products, companies, and product companies and applied it to creative businesses. Jay is the founder of Unreal Collective, a community of creators. Whether they are technology founders, freelancers, agency owners, or podcast creators, Unreal helps them determine critical next steps and achieve them. Jay has worked with over 100 creatives and freelancers through Unreal. His clients have built launch sites for space flight, had multi-million dollar exits, six-figure crowdfunding campaigns, left their jobs to go full-time freelance, and bootstrapped technology companies! Connect with Jay: Website Instagram Twitter LinkedIn
8/4/202145 minutes, 39 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 349 - Dismantling Entrepreneurial Burnout with Jasmin Haley

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/349 Bio: Jasmin Haley is an award-winning national speaker, podcaster, pro-educator, author, and biz strategist. She is the founder of the Breakthrough to Excellence™ Network. She helps online service-based entrepreneurial women scale their business without chaos to build their business legacy.  Her philosophy focuses on building your confidence and the business structure to support your goals without sacrificing what you love most in life. You can utilize her business strategy resources at her website! Connect with Jasmin: Website Jasmin's First Published Book: Breakthrough to Excellence! Instagram Facebook
7/28/202153 minutes, 56 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 348 - June 2021 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in June 2021 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
7/21/20211 hour, 24 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 347 - Creating a Globally-Inclusive Online Business with Danbee Shin

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/347 Bio: Danbee is a web designer and copywriter. She helps online coaches get more clients with their websites so that they can change more lives all around the world. She also helps other web designers grow their businesses and earn a full-time income working for themselves. Connect with Danbee: Danbee's Website Danbee's Website Checklist! Instagram Facebook
7/14/20211 hour, 2 minutes, 46 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 345 - Pursuing Your Purpose with Arika Davenport of She Pursues Purpose

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/346 Bio: Arika Davenport, the founder of She Pursues Purpose, leads women of faith into discovering their personal path to purpose. Arika has been able to help women create a blueprint that turns their visions into realities. Women who have partnered with Arika have gained the confidence, clarity, and courage to walk in their calling. She Pursues Purpose offers a variety of resources for the woman in pursuit of purpose  As a Purpose Coach  Arika equips & empowers the busy woman with the practical and spiritual tools needed to walk in her purpose. Connect with Arika: Website Arika's Instagram Arika's Facebook
7/7/202151 minutes, 33 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 345 - How to Trust Yourself with Jessica Thiefels of Mindset Reset Radio

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/345 Bio: Jessica Thiefels is the author of, 10 Questions That Answer Life’s Biggest Questions, podcast host of Mindset Reset Radio, and CEO of Jessica Thiefels Consulting. She's been writing for more than 10 years and has been featured in top publications including Forbes and Entrepreneur. She also contributes to Fast Company, The Ladders, and more. Connect with Jessica: Website Jessica's Instagram Jessica's Twitter
6/30/202155 minutes, 7 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 344 - May 2021 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in May 2021 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
6/23/20211 hour, 41 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 343 - A Ten-Step Legal Audit for your Side Hustle with Girija Patel

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/343 Bio: Girija is a licensed attorney in Texas and her practice focuses on assisting creative and other entrepreneurs create a solid legal foundation and craft legal solutions for their businesses at any point in the business cycle.  She's a mom to two amazing children, a wife, and an entrepreneur. Connect with Girija: Website Your Contract Buddy Website
6/16/202153 minutes, 1 second
Episode Artwork

Ep. 342 - Behind the Scenes: Eavesdrop on Shannon's Weekly Marketing Strategy Call for Web Designers

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/342 A few weeks ago we had an epic live strategy call inside of our Web Designer Academy program. I mean, all of our calls leave me super inspired and energized, but this one gave me chills. It was so powerful. And I thought everyone needs to hear this, whether they're a web designer or not. These questions and answers and concepts apply to every kind of business. And so in this episode, you get to eavesdrop on one of our weekly marketing strategy calls, exclusively for students inside of our Web Designer Academy.
6/9/20211 hour, 5 minutes, 48 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 341 - Playing the Marketing Long Game with Katelyn Hamilton

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/341 Bio: Katelyn began her career in marketing and public relations in Nashville, Tennessee. After working in the agency world for six years, she decided to pursue the entrepreneurship route to create more freedom and flexibility in her life. Now, Katelyn works as an Online Business Manager where she helps entrepreneurs organize, strategize and prioritize the backend of their business to go from overwhelmed to out-in-front. A Georgia grad, she bleeds red and black and is a diehard Georgia football fan, dog mom and outdoor enthusiast. Connect with Katelyn: Website Katelyn's Instagram Katelyn's Facebook
6/2/202150 minutes, 38 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 340 - April 2021 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in April 2021 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
5/26/202157 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 339 - Bootstrapping Your Side Hustle to 7-Figures with Raymond Blakney

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/339 Bio: Ray Blakney is probably like every other award-winning Filipino-American entrepreneur who grew up in Turkey and lives in Mexico that you know. He started his first business, with his wife as a business partner, in 2008. Since then he has bootstrapped multiple 6 and 7-figure online businesses. Most of this was done from home in his superman pajamas.  He and his businesses have been featured in Forbes, Entrepreneur Magazine, The Boston Globe and other top publications. Ray has also been a speaker at multiple conferences around the world. Connect with Raymond:    
5/19/202152 minutes, 34 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 338 - Creating a Pleasure-Focused Business with Dr. Lee Cordell

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/338 Bio: Dr. Lee C. Cordell is an expert coach and business mentor for entrepreneurs who want to elevate and accelerate their success in their personal & professional lives. Using trauma-informed, pleasure-centered coaching, she focuses on time management, goal setting/planning, motivation & mindset, and holistic growth (personal and professional). Lee uses her 15+ years of experience in healthcare, psychology, and education to help her clients own what they want and get out of their own way to get it! Lee’s motto in life is short and sweet: Give more. Get more. Repeat. Connect with Lee: Website Lee's Instagram Lee's Facebook Group Lee's LinkedIn
5/12/202155 minutes, 21 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 337 - Creating Delightful Customer Journeys with Desola Davis

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/337 Bio: Desola Davis is a Business Growth Strategist and head of Virtuous You Company. She helps online entrepreneurs build businesses that align with their personal purpose! Desola takes her corporate experience designing workflows for million-dollar cost savings initiatives and adds training from the best minds in small business and leadership development. She uses all that training to help you grow your business by working with customers who know, trust, and LOVE you. Virtuous You helps build out your execution plan, launch plan, and implement sales strategies with intentionality, and they'll tweak them in direct response to what your customers are asking for. Her mission is to help entrepreneurs position their businesses for consistent growth so they can experience financial independence. And with this independence, entrepreneurs have more room to live and give generously. Connect with Desola: Website Desola's Instagram
5/5/202154 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 336 - March 2021 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in March 2021 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
4/28/20211 hour, 33 minutes, 5 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 335 - Turning your Skills into Currency with Craig Cannings of Freelance University

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/335 Bio: Craig Cannings is the co-founder of Freelance University with his wife, Kelly. Craig (and his team) have had the privilege of helping over 20,000 students in 75 countries realize their dreams of launching a portable, freelance business (and lifestyle). He has enjoyed the great freedom of working from home and traveling abroad while raising their 5 wonderful daughters.  Connect with Craig: FREEBIE - Discover Seven Proven Pathways to Freelance Success in 2021 Website Craig's Instagram
4/21/202144 minutes, 23 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 334 - Accelerate Your Progress with Kayse Morris of the CEO Teacher Podcast

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/334 Bio: Kayse Morris helps teachers learn to leverage their teaching skills, existing expertise, and huge hearts so they can build a profitable and purposeful online teacher business. Connect with Kayse: Website Kayse's Instagram Kayse's Facebook
4/14/202148 minutes, 34 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 333 - Take Control of Your Wealth with Nacondra Moran of Exceptional Tax Services

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/333 Bio: Nacondra is the owner behind Exceptional Tax Services where she offers Simplified Tax and Bookkeeping Services to Small Business Owners. She has saved her Clients thousands in Taxes and MILLIONS in headaches. Her Clientele includes Creatives and Online Entrepreneurs where she takes their Business from Reactive to Proactive while giving them the tools, advice and education to grow their Business. Her background began as an IRS employee for 4 years and she eventually branched out on her own as a Licensed Enrolled Agent after becoming a Mother. She yearned for freedom and entrepreneurship has given her just that. She is a Wife and Mom to 3 kids, 1 Eight Year Old Daughter and a set of 5 year old Twin Boys. Connect with Nacondra: Website: www.exceptionaltaxservices.com Instagram: www.instagram.com/NACONDRAMORAN Facebook: www.facebook.com/exceptionaltaxservicesllc
4/7/202153 minutes, 53 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 332 - February 2021 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in February 2021 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
3/31/20211 hour, 5 minutes, 52 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 331 - How to Reach Six Figures with Just One Offer with Sales Queen Nellie Corriveau

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/331 Bio: Nellie Corriveau is the self-proclaimed Sales Queen that is passionate about helping busy entrepreneurs with big dreams reach their sales goals. With her first taste of sales in the nonprofit world, Nellie started and successfully raised over 3 Million Dollars for Nellie's Champions for Kids (NC4K) that she founded at the young age of 16 years old. She has since transitioned out of her Executive Director role and shifted into business coaching where she translates her unique sales ability into coaching other entrepreneurs on how to actually make money doing what they love by mastering their sales skills with focused strategies and rock-solid accountability. She has directly helped over 100 business owners through one-on-one coaching, online group coaching, events and mastermind groups over the past couple of years. She is also the co-host of Queen Con, a two-day conference focused on being a resource for both online-businesses and brick & mortar companies. Connect with Nellie: Website: www.salesqueencoaching.com Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/the_sales_queen/ Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/SlayingYourSales
3/24/202152 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 330 - Get Visible (Even if You're an Introvert) with Visibility Queen Crissy Conner

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/330 Bio: Crissy Conner helps brands amplify their visibility with rockstar social media strategies that maximize their efforts for greater impact and growth. She has been helping brands and businesses grow for 5 years. She is the co-host of The Social Media, Sales, Sex & Why You Don't Suck podcast and Queen Con, an annual female entrepreneur event. Crissy is a wife, the mom of 3 (4 counting her furbaby Tennessee), and loves reading and binge-watching shows with her daughter, unless it's summer and then you can find her reading by the pool. Connect with Crissy: Website: www.crissyconnercreates.com Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/crissy.conner.creates Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/crissyconnercreates LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/crissy-conner Tiktok: https://www.tiktok.com/@crissyconner
3/17/202150 minutes, 38 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 329 - Find Your Solopreneur Support System with Chrissy + Danielle from One Woman Shop

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/329 Bio: One Woman Shop is your go-to solopreneur resource hub + support system. Work for yourself, not by yourself! Connect with One Woman Shop: Website: https://onewomanshop.com/ Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/onewomanshop/ Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/onewomanshop
3/10/202152 minutes, 46 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 328 - Get Out of Your Own Way to Accelerate Your Profits with Alecia St. Germain of The Conscious Edge

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/328 Bio: Alecia St. Germain is the founder and Ace of Transformation behind The Conscious Edge. After more than 15 years training entrepreneurs, she knows most people focus on “how to do it,” but miss the crucial “who to become” to get your next level results. Nothing gets Alecia more fired up than seeing you reach goals faster and achieve unlimited wealth and happiness. Alecia is a master at uncovering and maximizing her clients’ natural gifts, identifying areas of improvement, and creating a strategic plan to overcome unconscious blocks to success, happiness, and the flow of money. Connect with Alecia: Website: https://consciousedge.com Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/aleciastg Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/groups/870098263184722 LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/alecia-st-germain-680b555
3/3/202152 minutes, 25 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 327 - January 2021 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in January 2021 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
2/24/20211 hour, 54 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 326 - Starting and Scaling a T-Shirt Printing Side Hustle with Deonjala Williams of Heart and a Heat Press

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/326 Bio: Deonjala Williams is the founder of Heart and a Heat Press, an online business educational platform. With over 12 years of entrepreneurial and retail experience, Deonjala teaches her community how to launch their own profitable T-Shirt printing business in 60 days or less.  Deonjala, known more commonly as “Dee”, has had years of corporate employment in retail where she gained significant experience in business, processes and people management. But this didn’t really satisfy her sense of calling, her love of teaching and the drive to build something lasting. Unbeknownst to her boss at the time, she had been planning her exit from the 9-5 for some time when she handed in her resignation letter with great satisfaction. She went on to found Dee’s Sweet Tees and develop Heart and a Heat Press, changing her and thousands of other people’s lives in the process. Connect with Deonjala: Website: https://heartandaheatpress.com Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/heartandaheatpress Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/heartandaheatpress
2/17/202157 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 325 - Making the Move to a Membership Model with Lisa Princic of Scaling Deep

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/325 Resources Mentioned: https://profitablemembershipsummit.com https://scalingdeep.com/toolkit https://scalingdeep.com/freebie Bio: Lisa helps impact-driven business owners dive deep into their unique value and business models to build sustainable $1million brands. She helps them simplify their offers, focus their brand with bolder messaging, strengthen and deepen their marketing systems.   She is a trained business strategist and the host of the Scaling Deep Podcast.   Lisa is a results-oriented, deep thinker who has a knack for “seeing” the value of each business and turning that into a pipeline ideal clients. (this is so far away so it might change so I'll let you know). Connect with Lisa: https://www.linkedin.com/in/lisaprincic  https://www.instagram.com/lisaprincic https://www.facebook.com/entrepreneurcoaching
2/10/202157 minutes, 1 second
Episode Artwork

Ep. 324 - Creating Offers Your Audience Wants with Spiritual Business Coach Talia Lopez

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/324 Bio: She is a dementia caregiving coach gone spiritual business coach! She helps coaches scale by embodying the mindset of a CEO, creating irresistible offers, and attracting their dream clients . She believes that mindset, faith, strategy, and inspired action are the keys to creating a profitable business Connect with Talia: Website: alwaysadvocating.com Instagram: instagram.com/Always.advocating
2/3/202157 minutes, 59 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 323 - Making Your Business "Toyetic" with Toy Designer Azhelle Wade

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Get the full transcript at shannonmattern.com/323 Resources Mentioned: https://www.thetoycoach.com/podcast/1 Bio: A cancer survivor, 3x patented inventor, Women In Toys Wonder Woman award nominee, and 1 of 100 Most Influential in Design in 2020’s Mojo 100 publication. Azhelle has worked in the toy industry for over 10 years with companies like Toys R Us, Horizon Group USA, and now Creative Kids, as the VP of Brand and Product. Azhelle launched The Toy Coach when she noticed that too many inventors attend toy shows or pitch meetings with “half baked” ideas that they’d spent too much money on. Her podcast, Making It in The Toy Industry teaches inventors how to keep their toy and game ideas toyetic, cost-effective, and how to answer buyer needs. When she’s not helping inventors and entrepreneurs break into the toy industry, Azhelle enjoys salsa and bachata dancing, sewing costumes, and exploring New York City with her closest friends Connect with Azhelle: https://www.instagram.com/thetoycoach/  https://www.facebook.com/groups/MITTIPodcast/   https://www.facebook.com/thetoycoach/
1/27/202157 minutes, 3 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 322 - December 2020 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in December 2020 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
1/20/202158 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 321 - How to Host a Virtual Summit with Krista Miller of Summit in a Box

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Krista and I talk about: Krista’s path from freelance web developer for designers to teaching entrepreneurs how to run a virtual summit.  Krista’s accidental success when she experimented with an idea and people kept asking for more. Why you need an email list, even as a 1:1 service provider. Why you should be building relationships right now. Why you don’t need a big audience to host a virtual summit. Common obstacles that Krista sees people coming up on again and again that stops them in their tracks. The right way to do Facebook ads Her best advice if you are struggling to get traction in your business. The belief Krista had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Krista: “I knew if I had a bigger list, that means more people that know about me, even if they're not the people directly buy my stuff, they know who I am.” “It just depends on your mindset and the way you look at it, who cares if they say no, try the next person. It's cool. It's fun if you let it be fun.” “Don't limit yourself based on where you are right now, because that's just going to keep you in that spot” “You have something to value even if you are just getting started” Bio: At Summit In A Box, Krista teaches online business owners to skyrocket their revenue, grow their email lists, become leaders, and make mutually beneficial connections through online summits. These aren’t summits that leave speakers and attendees feeling gross and taken advantage of - her method is focused on strong connections, collaboration, and making a difference in the lives of everyone involved. The best part? She makes it easy! With every strategy, copy template, website template, script, tech tutorial, and resources you'd ever need, your summit prep just got a whole lot easier! Resources Mentioned: Tony Intentional Spark Allie Bjerk: Tiny Offers Connect with Krista: Instagram Summit in a Box Website
1/13/202156 minutes, 33 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 320 - Copywriting Secrets with Kelsey Formost of Copy Class

Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review! Kelsey and I talk about: Kelsey’s journey from actress and screenwriter to teaching entrepreneurs how to write words that sell. The best way to market yourself. The first thing you should write about. Why you need to be specific about who your ideal client is. Common mistakes that Kelsey sees people making on their copy. Tips for knowing what to put on each website page. How to find a mentor. Why instead of going at it alone you should let people in. Kelsey’s advice for someone who is struggling to get traction & visibility in their side hustle. The belief Kelsey had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Kelsey: “I feel so connected to these people by helping them tell their unique stories and everybody has a story.” “The most empowering thing was helping people understand how to express themselves.” “So much of being in business, especially as an entrepreneur or a solopreneur, is about learning to trust yourself and learning to trust that what you have to give is unique and then just learning how to express it in the way that helps you reach the most people. “ “Put yourself on the back burner for a minute, focus on who you're helping and how you help them” “the thing that scales that allows you to reach more people is actually getting more specific about talking to one person.” “Once you understand how you want to express yourself and how to use your words, to paint a picture for other people of how they're going to feel after they connect with you, everything else just sort of falls into place. Everything else becomes so much clearer, including your actual service.” Bio: Kelsey Formost is a copywriting expert and mental health advocate who teaches entrepreneurs how to write words that sell. Resources Mentioned: 3 Copywriting Tips to 3X Profits Copy Class! Connect with Kelsey: Kelsey's Website Kelsey's Instagram Kelsey's Facebook
1/6/202157 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 319 - November 2020 Income Report

Find out how much money my business made in November 2020 and exactly how we made it, what our expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Get access to our free trainings for web designers and DIYers at https://shannonmattern.com/free Leave a Rating + Review!
12/30/20201 hour, 14 minutes, 28 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 318 - How to Become a Bestselling Self-Published Author Steff Green of Rage Against The Manuscript

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! This interview with Steff Green was absolutely fascinating! Steff writes fiction novels & she’s an Amazon best-selling author. In this episode, she gets deep into the nitty-gritty of how to test your ideas on Amazon and everything else you need to know to be successful. She also has a website called Rage Against the Manuscript where she teaches people who want to become fiction writers and go past the gatekeeper of the traditional publisher. She teaches you how to write, publish and sell your books on Amazon. Steff's also legally blind - and her story is so fascinating! Even if you have no intention of ever writing a book, there’s a ton you can learn from this interview and I really can’t wait for you to meet Steff! Steff and I talk about: Her journey from archeologist to a paranormal romance author. Why Steff decided to self-publish. How to frame your marketing to attract your ideal client. The biggest thing Steff sees writers get stuck on that holds them back from finishing their book. Her best advice if you are struggling to get traction in your business. The belief she had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Steff: “You have to push through and you have to be okay with things not being perfect because perfectionism is procrastination.” “You'll spend as much time getting from 95% to 100% perfection, as you will get in from zero to 95%" “Don't quit before the miracle.” [fusebox_transcript] Bio: Steff Green is a USA Today bestselling author of supernatural romance books. She earns multi-six figures a year self-publishing stories about vampires and witches, and she speaks and teaches all over the world, helping authors tell their unique stories, find their audience and build a badass writing career through self-publishing. Oh, and she's legally blind. Resources Mentioned: Rage Against the Manuscript How to Rock Self Publishing Amazon KDP Self Publishing Connect with Steff: Steffanie Holmes Website FREE BOOK: UNLEASH THE BEAST - RELEASE YOUR INNER WRITING MONSTER JOIN US FOR HOW TO ROCK SELF PUBLISHING SCHOOL
12/23/20201 hour, 58 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 317 - Get Booked by the Day with Sarah Masci of Brackenhouse Branding

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! You know if you’re a web designer that if you don’t have a good system in place, then projects can drag out for a really long time. From the back-and-forth with the clients, getting all the content, etc., it can become a huge job if you don’t have a solid, systematic, and streamlined process to make it all happen. Sarah Masci is a web & graphic designer who I am so incredibly excited for you to meet today. I resonate so much with Sarah because our stories are so similar. I believe I met Sarah through my accelerator program with Mariah Coz -- no matter how, I’m so happy to know her. Sarah over the years has honed her web designing processes down to offering daily intensives. So instead of spending months with web design projects for clients, she spends one day each with VIP clients. Sarah currently teaches her process on how to market, sell, and execute these one-day intensives -- and they work for any sort of service provider. This process is absolutely fascinating and I knew upon meeting Sarah that I had to introduce her to my audience. Many of my web designer academy students have signed up for Sarah’s classes to learn how to execute one-day intensives for their clients and it’s been a huge collaboration that I see a ton of opportunities in. We have similar audiences, similar values, yet we still do totally different things, which I love. Sarah will also be speaking at the Side Hustle to Self-Employed Summit, which is Feb 4-7 2021 so mark your calendars! I’m going to give you a roadmap to go from side hustle to self-employed in 12 months or less, and Sarah will be there to talk about her method! But I’m so excited that you get to meet her beforehand because she’s absolutely amazing and she’s someone you’re going to want to know if you’re a service provider and if you want to provide high-impact services in way less time. Let’s get into it! Sarah and I talk about: Sarah’s journey from corporate to becoming an online branding and web designer. Some of the biggest mindset struggles Sarah faces. When Sarah hired a business coach, the first thing she did. Why you should evaluate your full process and make sure you are charging for all the things you are doing. How Sarah took her experience and created a coaching program. Her best advice if you are struggling to get traction in your audience building. The belief Sarah had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Sarah: “Let's take all of this stuff and really get it simplified and make it streamlined and easy for people to know what to do.” “Everybody was so excited about it and blown away that they could just book me for a day and get my undivided attention for seven or eight hours.” “There's enough websites that need to be built for everybody to have more than their fair share” Bio: With 15 years of branding and design experience, Sarah Masci is a leader in the online industry for clients looking for high-quality, aesthetic digital design. As the founder of Book Me For A Day™, her signature one-day intensive program, she thrives on compressing professional branding, web and digital design into one day, versus weeks or months.  Some would say she's a rare mix of right and left-brained; she gets her kicks from strategies, systems, and automations, but has a discerning eye for design and details. Sarah's down-to-earth personality and distinctive way of simplifying even the most complex problems have earned her the trust and respect of hundreds of clients and thousands of students over the years.  Done-for-you service providers who are ready to ditch the feast or famine cycle and create more income and freedom with a one-day intensive business model, love Sarah’s course and group coaching program where she teaches her exact blueprint to other designers. To inspire and support just-getting-started solopreneurs, she offers a variety of simple branding and design courses for those who want to DIY their own logo, brand, graphics and websites.  Sarah is an outdoorsy boy-mom through and through. When she’s not working, she’s enjoying time with her husband, their four sons and their sweet pup, Mabel. She loves summer, crisp mornings in the mountains, live bluegrass music, and sipping craft cider with friends. Resources Mentioned: Day Rate Magic Connect with Sarah: Brackenhouse Branding Brackenhouse Branding Facebook Brackenhouse Branding Instagram
12/16/20201 hour, 4 minutes, 32 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 316 - Systems + Strategies for Growth with Amy Lockrin of The Operations House

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! Eventually you’re going to need some help… trust me. You can’t do it all on your own forever. I tried to do it by myself for so many years, and you know if you’ve been listening to this podcast for a while that I have a tendency to overwork myself. I’m finally finding out in year 7 of doing this that getting support & dedicating time to building & empowering a team is something I need to take seriously. Amy is the third person in this series of powerhouse online business managers (starting with Sarah Noked in episode 311, Tasha Booth in episode 315, and now Amy Lockrin) that I talked to about the business of running a business and the behind-the-scenes of making it all happen. Even though Amy is an OBM, we talked about completely different things than my conversations with Sarah and Tasha. We talked about so many points that really resonated with me, like charging your worth and creating successful onboarding processes for growing your team. Amy is incredible and I’m so excited for everyone to hear the amazing things she has to share, like some of the common patterns she sees that prevent people from getting to the next level. Keep in mind that she doesn’t just work for her own business -- but she also works with incredible entrepreneurs and has seen these patterns over and over and over. Amy has also contrastively worked with million-dollar business owners and has seen what they do differently. Definitely listen to what she has to say & take it to heart because this isn’t just her opinions -- she’s actually lived these experiences. Everything we talked about was exactly what I needed to hear, and I hope everyone listening finds the thing they need to hear to get reinspired, remotivated, and ready to break through to the next level. Amy and I talk about: Amy’s journey from corporate to self-employment. Amy’s strategy of over-delivering to impress her clients and get more referrals. Her advice if you are starting out and having trouble with charging your worth. The difference between a virtual assistant and an online business manager.  Common patterns Amy sees that are preventing people from getting to the next level in their business. What makes a successful VA hire. Why you need to reflect on your feelings about the value you bring to your clients. Her best advice if you are struggling to get traction in your side hustle. The belief Amy had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Amy: “I need to create something that's going to work for me and what my vision and ideals were.” “I know the struggles that it takes to get to where people aren't considering themselves a success.” “This could actually be where I'm able to change my life and leave corporate and do the thing that I want to do” Bio: After 12+ years of climbing the corporate ladder, Amy threw caution to the wind and branched out on her own to help entrepreneurs take the next steps towards growing their own businesses. Amy is 100% strategy-focused so that her clients can stop worrying about the small details and start focusing on the big picture—and their profits. When she's not strategizing for her clients, you'll likely find her spending time with her husband and two kiddos. Resources Mentioned: Kolbe Assessment Connect with Amy: Amy's Website Amy's Instagram Amy's Facebook
12/9/20201 hour, 5 minutes, 15 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 315 - From Solo Side-Hustle to CEO with Tasha Booth of The Launch Guild

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! Tasha is not only an OBM who helps her clients launch their courses, podcasts and systems that business owners need to launch their businesses, but she also helps VA’s and OBM’s scale profitable businesses. She teaches entrepreneurs how to start as a VA, get to the next level as an OBM, and scale to an agency model. She not only followed this method herself in her own business, but she now teaches others how to do it as well. I can totally relate to this as a web designer and a teacher to others on how to run their own web design businesses. Talking to Tasha happened at the perfect time because we chatted around the same time I was feeling completely maxed out. I had yet to grow my team with Wendy and Natalie, and I wasn’t allowing Laura to fully thrive in her position and give her the things I knew I was able to take off my plate. Totally control-freak moment… So as this feeling of overwhelm started to take over, this series of chatting with OBM’s suddenly fell together, starting with Sarah Noked back in Episode 311, now Tasha Booth, and upcoming, chatting with Amy Lockrin in episode 316. In each episode, we talked about how if you want to get to the next level, it’s so important to grow a team. But we also talked about how if you’re going to grow a team, you need standard operating procedures in your business where every process needs to be documented and consistent so your team can support you in a strategic way...and you’re not spending all your time answering questions for your team because you haven’t documented anything. This happens to me all the time -- where I have a conversation on the podcast that nudges me in the right direction, and this conversation with Tasha was definitely one of those that really got me thinking that the universe was talking to me by sending me all of these OBM’s in a row… so I said, okay, I’m listening. I need to start documenting things and grow my team. Tasha is here to talk about all of these things. One of the things I want my listeners to take away is that even if you’re just starting out, Tasha can help you in two ways: if you’re a VA or thinking about becoming one, she can help you start the correct way. And secondly, plan for the future. Document how you do everything, so when you do decide to bring a team on, you’re ready & you don’t have to write it all out in that moment. If you can do it as you go, when it’s time to bring on that first person, you’re ready for them & you don’t feel overwhelmed. Before we start, I wanted to let you know that she’s going to be speaking at my Side Hustle to Self-Employed Summit! You can head to www.sidehustletoselfemployed.com to join the waitlist for a free ticket! Tasha and I talk about: How Tasha saw an opportunity to step in that led to a side-hustle that quickly replaced her day job income Tasha’s journey to building a “business in a box” agency Why you should be proactive in hiring and not reactive The first steps for creating standard operating procedures The thing you should do to make your business dreams a reality Some of the common roadblocks that keep you from getting started Her best advice if you are struggling to get traction in your side hustle The belief Tasha had to change about herself to get where she is today My favorite quotes from Tasha: “What I realized quickly were was that the things that were simple for me and that came easy to me did not come easy to everybody” “We need to open our minds to what's possible” “I want quality clients who are going to treat me well, who are going to value my services and everything. That means that I start with valuing myself and valuing what I can bring to the table for them.” “Even if you think you're talking about your business until you're blue in the face, you can probably do it a little bit more” Bio: Tasha Booth began her journey in the online business space five years ago as a virtual assistant when she decided she was tired of living an ‘ordinary’ life on someone else’s terms. As her business grew, so did her commitment to helping others figure out how to make the life they craved a reality. Now, whether she’s leading her team of 18 to support established coaches and course creators as the Founder and CEO of The Launch Guild agency, coaching virtual support professionals as they start and scale their own business, or hosting the ‘How She Did That’ podcast for VAs, OBMs, and project managers, Tasha is always helping other entrepreneurs live more fully in their zone of genius. When she’s not supporting her team of 18, she proudly spends her time as an Air Force wife to her husband Scott, stepmom to Grace and Meredith, and work from home dog mom to Stanley and Boomer Resources Mentioned: Belay Solutions Free SOP Template from Tasha! Connect with Tasha: Tasha's Website Tasha's Facebook Tasha's Instagram The Launch Guild The Launch Guild Facebook The Launch Guild Instagram
12/2/202056 minutes, 59 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 314 - October 2020 Income Report

Find out how much money I made in October 2020 and exactly how I made it, what my expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!
11/25/20201 hour, 4 minutes, 29 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 313 - Finding a Mentor with Kelsey Chapman

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! Asking for help is something that does NOT come naturally to me. I like to blaze my own trail, and I don’t like to be slowed down. I always hated group projects in high school because I wanted to do the work on my (super-fast) timeline and on my own terms. So it’s no surprise that when I started my business, it didn’t even occur to me to ask for help. My method was figuring it out for myself, trial and error, and banging my head against the wall trying to figure things out because I didn’t have anyone that had been in my shoes before able to show me the way. Now, mentorship means everything to me as a business owner. I finally figured out that I can only go so far by myself, and that going it alone actually slowed me down! Fascinating! If you want to reach success faster, build a community of people around you that have been where you’ve been before.  Not only can you find a mentor for anything you want to do nowadays, but you can also be a mentor for others as well. This is why my conversation with today’s guest is so special to me! Kelsey Chapman is an author, community builder, online educator, host of The Radiant Podcast. After a few years of fumbling her way through post-grad life, Kelsey realized that her entrepreneurial itch wasn’t going away. She came home, got to work, and turned a part-time blog and side-hustle into a multi-six-figure business in just 2 YEARS! Today, Kelsey leads an audience of 100k followers, hosts The Radiant Podcast, empowers and equips women through her online mentorship program, and is about to release her book, What They Taught Me, on February 9th! If you’re ready to learn about the beauty of mentorship, let’s get right into it! Kelsey and I talk about: Kelsey’s journey to becoming a writer. Why it’s worth taking the time to build an audience. How to find a mentor. Why instead of going at it alone you should let people in. Kelsey’s advice for someone who is struggling to get traction in visibility in their side hustle. The belief Kelsey had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Kelsey: “No matter what you're doing whether it's course creation, building any sort of service-based business, writing, you have to show that there's a proof of concept like that people will buy the concept.” “The character that's built-in slow growth is what sustains you. What helps you steward that dream of yours longterm.” “Just take what you need. Doesn't mean you have to apply every single thing.” “You don't have to be famous to be a mentor. You just need to be a few steps ahead of someone to be willing to share what you know.” Bio: Kelsey Chapman is an author, community builder, online educator, and host of The Radiant Podcast. She wholeheartedly believes dreams are worth pursuing and is passionate about teaching women how to walk with purpose in their gifts and live from a place of identity and rest — all so that they can carry their dreams and vision for the long haul. After a few years of fumbling her way through post-grad life and a brief stint overseas, Kelsey realized that her entrepreneurial itch wasn’t going away. She came home, got to work, and turned a part-time blog, and side-hustle into a multi-six-figure business in just two years. From there, she realized her business savvy traits and desire to empower others could be translated into something bigger through teaching everything she’s learned with others. In just four years she has mentored hundreds of clients and thousands of students through building their brand, growing their platform, and stewarding their influence. Today, Kelsey plays the role of a personal cheerleader to an engaged audience of 100,000k followers, hosts The Radiant Podcast, and empowers and equips women through her Radiant Podcast, Dream To Done online mentorship program, and most recently, her book What They Taught Me: Recognizing The Mentors Who Will Take You From Dream To Done. Resources Mentioned: Enneagram Test What They Taught Me Book - Out February 9th! What They Taught Me - Amazon Connect with Kelsey: Kelsey's Website Kelsey's Instagram Kelsey's Facebook Radiant Podcast
11/18/202056 minutes, 20 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 312 - Mastering Your Personal + Business Finances with Nick True of Mapped Out Money

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! Anyone that emails me saying, “Hey can I be on your podcast? I travel the country in my RV,” the answer is pretty much always YES! I couldn’t wait to talk to Nick because anyone that’s able to start a business and travel at the same time needs to be my friend. As a fellow RV owner, I know how hard it is to make time to travel, but I’ve always wanted to get in our RV and travel to Alaska! It’s one of those bucket-list things for me… I mean, I do need my husband to be able to work remotely too and agree to the drive… Hopefully in one of my future income reports - in like 2022 - you’ll hear all about how I ran my business from my RV on my way to Alaska. That’s why learning how Nick and his wife made this happen for themselves makes this episode extra special to me. Nick teaches people how to manage their finances & live their own adventure. I know everyone is going to absolutely love this episode. What I want to leave people with before the episode starts is that you don’t have to make as much money in your business as you might think to have financial freedom when you have control of your personal finances. Nick is going to show us exactly how we can live the same life he lives, so let’s get into it. Nick and I talk about: His journey to building a business teaching entrepreneurs how to budget and managing money. Nick strategy behind monetizing his website. How much of our spending is a habit and done subconsciously. The importance of clarity in your business direction. His best advice for you if you’re struggling to get traction making money in your side hustle. The one belief Nick had to change about himself to get where he is today. My favorite quotes from Nick: “Let's create a plan and use money as the tool to help you get there.” "It's not about spending less, it's about where's my money going. And let's put as much of my money as possible on the things that I truly care about.” "You're taking on the risk. Both of time and money to build a business and you need to get clear on why you're doing that and ensure that the path you're going down is actually going to help you achieve that.” Bio: Nick True is a married twenty-something from Tennessee and father to four fur-children. Through Mapped Out Money, Nick writes and speaks about personal finance, budgeting, and Slow-FI, all while traveling full-time with his wife and four pets in a 27ft Airstream. He is passionate about teaching people to enjoy their money now, while also saving and investing for the future. With some creative help from his wife, Hanna, Nick aims to produce approachable and engaging personal finance content to help you understand finance and manage your money, so you can get on with living your unique adventure. Resources Mentioned: Smart Passive Income Gary Vaynerchuk Mindset by Carol Dweck Connect with Nick: Nick's Website - Mapped Out Money Nick's Youtube MO$ Podcast Nicks Instagram Nick's Twitter
11/11/202057 minutes, 15 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 311 - How to Become (or Hire) an Online Business Manager with Sarah Noked

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! I hear it all the time -- Online Business Manager, OBM, How to become an OBM… and I never understood what it meant or how it was different from being a virtual assistant! That’s why I’m so excited to introduce you to Sarah Noked, who’s here today to explain the difference between an Online Business Manager and a Virtual Assistant, what kind of people are best for both roles, and what business owners would hire each role for. From the moment I met Sarah I knew I had to have her on the podcast ASAP! What resonated with me about Sarah was her story -- Going from overworked and underpaid, desperate to leave her 9-5, to a multi-6 figure OBM business-owning queen. I know many of you listening today can totally relate to that, and Sarah’s here today as proof that it IS POSSIBLE for you to go from side-hustle to self-employed and have that dream life! Sarah doesn’t sugarcoat what it takes to build a successful business, but she’s there to teach you exactly the steps you need to take to be successful. If you’re wanting to start your OBM business, or you’re curious to learn the difference between OBM’ing and Virtual Assisting like I was, then let’s get started! Sarah and I talk about: Sarah’s journey to become a certified online business manager. What an Online Business Manager (OBM) is and what they do. The knowledge and skills needed to become an OBM. Sarah’s path from a VA to certified OBM with a multiple 6-figure agency. How to get started as an OBM. Sarah’s advice for someone who is struggling to get traction in their side hustle. The belief Sarah had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Sarah: “I'm also really obsessed with helping people grow successful online businesses with stability and systems.” “Everybody has systems in their business.” “I'm so grateful for the things that I have and the ability to teach other women to be able to have a sustainable life and business from home.” “If you want to make this side hustle work, you actually have to really get clear on your value and charge for it.” Bio: Sarah is the founder and CEO of Sarah Noked OBM. She is one of the leading experts in implementing systems within digital businesses, having achieved maximum results for hundreds of women worldwide, and teaching them how to grow team-based online businesses.  Over the last decade, she has grown from VA solopreneur to a Certified OBM®, has trained her own team of five OBMs in her very own OBM Agency, and has generated a multi-six-figure income in the process.   Now as one of only a few Certified OBM® trainers in the world, Sarah’s focus lies in using her first-hand knowledge to help female entrepreneurs sustainably scale up profitable digital businesses. Resources Mentioned: Tina Forsyth OBM Masterclass OBM Starter Kit obmcertification.com Connect with Sarah: Sarah's Website Sarah's Instagram Sarah's Twitter Sarah's OBM Facebook Community
11/4/202052 minutes, 31 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep 310 - September 2020 Income Report

Find out how much money I made in September 2020 and exactly how I made it, what my expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!
10/28/20201 hour, 2 minutes, 50 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 309 - Becoming Unhackable with Kary Oberbrunner

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! If you’re anything like me when I first started my side hustle, you might have found yourself thinking… “I already have so much to do, how am I gonna find the time to build my business too?” But then I looked at how I was spending my time. Waking up at 7AM and lazily watching Bravo reality TV as I slowly got ready to drag myself into a day job that I hated. Leaving for work at the last minute and trying to come home as early as possible just like everyone else, which had me sitting in rush hour traffic. Binge-watching Netflix after dinner and on lazy weekend days. Scrolling Facebook in my spare moments to see what my old high school friends were up to. Never planning ahead, always reacting to circumstances around me. And I wished my life was different. I wished I made more money, doing something that I actually loved, that I worked from home and had more freedom. I might have felt busy at work… but outside of work I had plenty of opportunities to work on my dream. But I’d let myself get hacked.  And exactly what this week’s guest is here to talk about. How we let our lives get hacked, how we pay for all the “free” things we spend our time on with our attention, and how it’s stealing our dreams from us. Kary Oberbrunner is an author, coach, and speaker who helps individuals and organizations clarify who they are, why they're here, and where they're going so they can share their message with the world.  And he’s here today to show us how to become Unhackable so that we can succeed in business and life. Everything Kary talks about is so impactful and powerful.  If you love this episode, which I know you will, be sure to check out Kary’s brand new book, Unhackable, coming out this Saturday, October 24th! Kary and I talk about: Kary’s journey as a pastor, to side hustler, to author and publisher Kary’s powerful lessons on failure Why you should break down your projects into smaller steps Important questions you should start asking yourself The one belief Kary had to change about himself to get where he is today My favorite quotes from Kary: “I believe we were all meant for a great purpose” “When you get hacked, that means you get distracted, you get diverted” “The fuel to become unhackable is enthusiasm” Bio: Kary Oberbrunner is an author, coach, and speaker who helps individuals and organizations clarify who they are, why they're here, and where they're going so they can become souls on fire, experience unhackability, and share their message with the world. As a child and young adult, Kary overcame a paralyzing speech disorder and an addiction to self-injury. In the past twenty years, he’s ignited over one million people with his content. He lives in Ohio with his wife, Kelly, and three children. Resources Mentioned: Unhackable Book From Broke and Frustrated to $100,000/Month Blogging in Less Than 3 Years with Alex Nerney Connect with Kary: Kary's Website Kary's Instagram Kary's Facebook Kary's Twitter Kary's YouTube
10/21/202052 minutes, 40 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 308 - Create a Social Platform with a Purpose with Kristen Boss

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! Every day I hear from people who are struggling with social media. It’s overwhelming to them to think of having to be everywhere, they’re intimidated by it, or they can’t stand the thought of adding to the noise. This is something I can totally relate to, which is why I’m so excited to have my guest Kristen Boss on the podcast today. Kristen is a mindset and business coach who specializes in helping women build their influence and grow successful businesses that deeply align with their purpose. Kristen is going to break down how to use social media in a strategic way. Her method eliminates the hustle and incorporates your most authentic self, which I love. I think you’re all going to love this episode, so let’s get started! Kristen and I talk about: The biggest missed opportunities that Kristen sees entrepreneurs make The 5 essential things you need to have on a social media platform Common mindset blocks that hold people back How to be authentic in your business Kristen’s advice for someone struggling to get traction in their side hustle The belief Kristen had to change about herself to get where she is today My favorite quotes from Kristen: “People come online to shop, not to be sold to.” “You have relational equity with key people and you need to be really targeting your people.” “If you are an entrepreneur, you're a problem solver in the marketplace.” “You don't have to get it right. Get it going.” “You're going to get real clear, real fast when you start actually taking action.” “You have to be able to evoke emotion from your reader in a way that says, Oh man, she gets me and she can solve my problems.” “Where your focus goes, energy flows” “Are you going to show up with the belief that I'm essential and what I offer is essential and I'm going to make it known and serve people really well.” “Paying an expert is worth removing this pain that I'm experiencing to shortcut my success.” “What if you can have massive success without hustling your butt off for it?” Bio: Kristen is a mindset and business coach who specializes in helping women build their influence and grow successful businesses that deeply align with their purpose. With nearly 15 years of experience working in service and marketing, she's pivoted from celebrity hairstylist to boutique owner, to business coach. With her experience of creating businesses from scratch, she is now helping other women tap into their highest self and true potential. When she's not coaching, you can find Kristen wrangling her kids with her husband in Colorado. Resources Mentioned: The Purposeful Platform: The 5 Key Essentials to a Profitable and Joy-filled Business Finding Your Calling with Katie Sullivan Connect with Kristen: Kristen's Website Kristen's Instagram Becoming Boss Facebook Group
10/14/20201 hour
Episode Artwork

Ep. 307 - Doing What You Really Want to Do with Pete McPherson from Do You Even Blog?

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! Pete McPherson & I immediately connected on our journey away from “The American Dream” and that’s why I’m so excited for you to listen in today. Pete is the founder of Do You Even Blog? An award-winning blog, podcast, and YouTube channel dedicated to helping creators build impactful and profitable online businesses. Upon meeting Pete, I immediately resonated with his journey out of corporate and his struggle to make his side-hustle succeed. We both gave up the idea that we were supposed to get day-jobs, work our way up, and make a lot of money -- with the price being all of our freedom. Today, we’re going to talk about Pete’s struggles, failures, and everything he overcame in order to finally find success in this industry and how others can do the same. Let’s get into it! Pete and I talk about: Pete’s journey from being a CPA/Accountant to a full-time podcaster and blogger How Pete’s road to success came from trying again and again...and again Pete’s effective advice on growing your email list The important question you should ask yourself about your dream business Pete’s advice for those struggling to get traction in their side hustle The belief Pete had to change about himself to get where he is today My favorite quotes from Pete: “It's not the fancy website. It's not the fancy microphones that we paid $400 for. It's not the super complicated outreach pitch emails that we scripted word for word it's us being humans, building real relationships and having experience. You have to have that part experience to understand your audience and your offer” “something that I think really only comes from experience and launching products and failing, trying to sell services and failing, trying to grow a blog, traffic downloads, email lists and failing is enough experience to get clarity.” “Keep an open mind and always keep an eye out for what is working in addition to the like, okay, that didn't work. Why not? Or that didn't work time for the next thing.” “There is no one path for everyone. There's just not, there might be some that are fairly similar, but it's not exactly the same. And so it takes time to figure out your path.” [fusebox_transcript] Bio: Pete McPherson is the founder of Do You Even Blog, an award-winning blog, podcast, and YouTube channel dedicated to helping creators build impactful (and profitable) businesses on the internet. He has interviewed some of the top entrepreneurs and creators in the world, including Matt Mullenweg, Neil Patel, John Lee Dumas, Brittney Muller, Glen Allsopp, and many more. He’s also the CEO of Online Impact, a private membership community of high-impact bloggers & podcasters. Resources Mentioned: SEO freebie Podcast Launch Checklist Connect with Pete: Do You Even Blog? Pete's YouTube Pete's Twitter Pete's Instagram
10/7/20201 hour, 3 minutes, 37 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep 306 - August 2020 Income Report

Find out how much money I made in August 2020 and exactly how I made it, what my expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!
9/30/202047 minutes, 55 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 305 - Finding Your Calling with Katie Sullivan of Rise Through Strife

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! I tell you guys all the time that one of the most rewarding things I do in my business is make this podcast, and it’s because I get to meet amazing people who introduce me to amazing people like today’s guest, Katie Sullivan of Rise Through Strife. I was introduced to her by Sasha Korobov from Episode 273 - who I’ve kept in touch with and I really should record every convo I have with her and share it with you guys because she’s amazing - but Sasha introduced me to Katie and basically said, “You two need to meet and be on each other’s podcasts” and just made that happen. I had the pleasure of being on Katie’s show, Rise Through Strife, to talk about the inseparable nature of personal and business growth, and now she’s on Pep Talks today to share how she completely pivoted from professional opera singer to online business coach and all the lessons learned along the way. Katie and I talk about: Her journey to burnout and the complete 180 she and her husband made to get where they are today. The path to creating a successful creative business. How to get other people to value your work. How to figure out what your audience needs from you. How to make passive income. Advice for someone who is struggling to get traction in their side hustle. The belief Katie had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Katie: “Our lives were built around our careers and it wasn't working.” “You have got to get clear on what you want for your life.” “What it is that you have to offer is truly valuable?" “It doesn't have to be saving somebody's life to make the impact that you want. Your little tiny piece of to add to the puzzle is enough.” “If you can put out the roadmap for them, without them having to go on a scavenger hunt for all the pieces and put it together themselves, that’s what changes people's lives.” “Social media is not the solution. Social media is the tool. It's the conversation that is important.” “Word of mouth is, and always has been the most effective form of marketing.” “Know that you are enough and you are exactly in the spot that you're supposed to be right now.” Bio: Katie Sullivan is an opera singer turned entrepreneur who helps other creatives make a living online doing what they love.  After burning out pursuing a career in music, Katie has developed a passion for online business and is ready to share what she has learned about turning a passion into a paycheck. Resources Mentioned: Pat Flynn Rise Through Strife Podcast Connect with Katie: Website Instagram Facebook Rise Through Strife Podcast
9/23/20201 hour, 1 minute, 44 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 304 - Search Engine Optimization Secrets with Erica Glessing

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! Today’s guest is Erica Glessing, a marketing and search engine optimization expert whose superpower is getting her clients ranked on the first page of Google.  I met Erica in a forum for podcasters and she invited me on her show, and our conversation was so interesting that I wanted to have her come on to Pep Talks for Side Hustlers to share with you guys how she leverages the power of niching, podcast and search to get herself and her clients found online. Erica and I talk about: Erica’s journey to self-employment. Why you don't have to be the expert in everything to run a successful business. How to do SEO research. The strategic reason why Erica started her podcast. The biggest mistakes entrepreneurs make in their marketing and pricing. Her best advice if you are struggling to get visibility in your side hustle. The belief Erica had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Erica: “I made a radical demand that my business would make at least 10,000 a month. And I just said, then what do I have to do to get there?” “I reach out to people and say, would you like to be on my summit? Or would you like to be on my podcast? And both of those have grown my businesses.” “Try to get outside of yourself to what keeps your client up at night and how you can solve it. And if you do that, then you always have work." “If you're expert enough to be doing it, you're expert enough to be interviewed about it.” Bio: Erica Glessing believes that when you tell your story, you change the world. An SEO (search engine optimization) expert, Erica helps small businesses and entrepreneurs generate an online presence with white hat SEO strategies and tactics. She has assisted authors, businesses and nonprofits with online visibility for over a decade. In the past Erica has built podcasts for lightbringers globally, and hosts a few podcasts including "Energy Clearing for Life Force Podcast" and "The Erica Glessing Show." Altogether, the shows she has built have been downloaded 500,000+ times. Erica is an international bestselling author 33+ times over, a lifelong learner, a real estate investor, and a philanthropist who volunteers for nonprofits dedicated to literacy and freedom for children in need. Erica's book "Happiness Quotations: Gentle Reminders of Your Preciousness" launched in 2011 to #17 of all books sold on amazon with the assistance of amazing light bringers Jack Canfield, Marci Shimoff, and over 44 other joint venture partners. Erica became a professional writer in 1984 and has had more than 5,000 articles published as a professional journalist. Her first nonfiction self help book was published in 2007 "Prospect When You are Happy," (2007, Wyatt-Mackenzie) that released to #1 bestseller in November 2019 as a Kindle version. She built the small independent publishing company Happy Publishing in 2012 and has since released more than 45 #1 bestselling books and helped over 200 authors reach #1 bestseller status. Her company SEOforLeadGen serves entrepreneurs globally with SEO services.  Resources Mentioned: Ubersuggest Ahrefs Keyword Surfer Later Pinterest Scheduling Connect with Erica: SEOforleadgen.com Instagram Facebook LinkedIn
9/16/202059 minutes, 5 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 303 - The Truth Behind Building a Million-Dollar Business with Inés Ruiz

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! Okay, you guys, this episode is absolutely fascinating, I can’t wait for you to hear it. It’s a tale of two businesses  - one that made a million dollars in revenue and left its owner burnt out and completely broke and in debt - and the other that made half as much but left its owner thriving and with a six-figure profit. That business owner is Inés Ruiz from Diary of an Entrepreneur, and both of the businesses in this story are hers.  And she’s here to share the starkly different story of those two businesses and all the lessons she learned along the way.  That’s all I’m gonna say about it, let’s just dive right in and I’m gonna let Inés tell you the whole story! Inés and I talk about: The story behind Diary of an Entrepreneur. The sales and marketing strategies Inés used to grow her business to a million dollars. The most important skill you can hone as you grow. Some of the biggest money mindset hurdles Inés had to overcome. The belief Inés had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Inés: “I can always learn. And I can always kind of prove myself wrong.” “As entrepreneurs, if we are not innovating, trying and testing, we are stuck.” “Test everything, but don’t interrupt your business.” “It doesn't matter if you've made $1,000 or $1 million, you know how to make money, you know what you're doing and you're going to figure it out.” “I don't want a seven figure business. I want a six figure profit.” “I have the power. I have the decisions I can work with my team and we can figure things out.” Bio: Ines Ruiz is an award-winning entrepreneur, motivational speaker, and founder of several successful businesses, including Conversa Spanish Institute. She has two masters degrees in E-learning and Education and is currently earning her third masters in Neuromarketing.  As a former Cambridge University lecturer, she’s used her expertise in academia and entrepreneurship to build successful online businesses. She has been featured on sites like Business Insider, CNBC, and Money Inc. You can read more about Ines as she shares her journey on her site, DiaryofanEntrepreneur.com Connect with Inés: Diaryofanentrepreneur.com Instagram Facebook
9/9/202050 minutes, 57 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 302 - Building a Multi-Million Dollar Blogging Empire with Lauren McManus of Create and Go

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! I’m so excited to have Lauren McManus on the show this week to share her side of the story of how she and her business partner Alex Nerney built their multi-million dollar blogging empire, which they talk about on their website Create and Go. If you haven’t listened to my interview with Alex back in Episode 227, after you listen to this one with Lauren go check Alex’s episode out because it’s one of the most downloaded episodes of this show (and I’m sure this one will be just as downloaded!) Lauren basically travels the world because she and Alex can run the business from anywhere, so I think she was in the Czech Republic when we talked right before COVID really kicked up - so our connection was a little spotty at times, but I’m sure you won’t care because she’s got such good information for you today! Between what Lauren’s gonna share with you today and what Alex shared nearly 80 episodes ago, you’ll never consider quitting on yourself again! And be sure to listen til the end to find out how you can get your hands on their Blogging Bootcamp for Beginners. Lauren and I talk about: Why Lauren and her partner Alex quit their corporate jobs and started a blog. The different ways Lauren and Alex tried to monetize, and what finally led to their big income payout and continued success. How trying to be perfect is holding you back. How Lauren overcomes her fear of putting herself out there. What led up to Lauren’s first hire on her team. Advice if you are struggling to get traction in your side hustle. The belief Lauren had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Lauren: “I think the biggest hurdle is honestly just getting started, whether it's starting your first business, whether it's creating your first product, whether you're creating your first YouTube video or podcast” “It's important to keep moving and just to keep trying stuff out, if something doesn't work, then scrap it and try again.” “Keep taking action. If you keep moving forward, at some point, you're going to get there and you're going to get there quicker.” Bio: Lauren is a former CPA turned blogger, and she and her business partner, Alex Nerney, started their first blog in the health and wellness space. After earning six figures with that blog in their first year, they started Create and Go, where they teach others how to start and monetize their own blogs. She now runs this blog full-time while traveling the world as a digital nomad. Resources Mentioned: Blogging Bootcamp for Beginners Connect with Lauren: Create and Go Website YouTube  Facebook Pinterest Instagram
9/2/202058 minutes, 8 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 301 - July 2020 Income Report

Find out how much money I made in July 2020 and exactly how I made it, what my expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!
8/26/20201 hour, 8 minutes
Episode Artwork

Ep. 300 - Using LinkedIn to Grow Your Side Hustle with Sharon Hartwick

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! Welcome to episode 300 of Pep Talks for Side Hustlers! 🎉 Wow, what a journey it’s been to 300 episodes. This podcast started back in April of 2018 as a solo show, which was really an outlet for me to talk about my own journey from side hustle to self-employed and all mistakes, successes and lessons learned along the way as I built my DIY web design + marketing training business online. And over the past two and a half years it’s evolved into this incredible opportunity for me to get to talk other entrepreneurs about their journeys, successes, mistakes and lessons learned along the way. And I don’t know about you, but these conversations help me feel less alone, more connected, and just more... normal! Like, everyone is just figuring it out as they go - and the only difference between people that succeed and people that don’t is that the ones that succeed never quit. If something’s not working, they try again or pivot. They just don’t quit. If there’s anything that you take away from this podcast, that’s it. And if you’ve been a listener for awhile and you haven’t left a rating and review, there’s no better time to do it than the 300th episode, right?? If you’re listening in Apple Podcasts, head on over to https://shannonmattern.com/review - or just swipe up on the episode in your podcast player and tap the link and it’ll take you to the spot to leave a review - and if you’re listening on Spotify or iHeartRadio or Google Podcasts, you can find the place to leave a review right there in your podcast app. So today’s guest is Sharon Hartwick, a LinkedIn marketing expert who’s gonna break down exactly how to find and connect with your ideal clients on LinkedIn. Sharon and I talk about: Why she started her business. LinkedIn’s superpower that makes it different from other social media platforms. Why LinkedIn should be the first thing you set up (before your website). Whether or not your ideal client is on LinkedIn. The best way to find + connect with new people on LinkedIn. Three questions to ask yourself about a whether a connection is worth pursuing. Strategies for maintaining relationships after making connections. Some of the biggests money mindset hurdles Sharon had to overcome. The belief Sharon had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Sharon: “You've got to be authentically you.” “There are so many different ways that you can use LinkedIn to grow your business, but it all comes down to building relationships." “LinkedIn is the perfect place for you to start connecting with people and building relationships, because you may meet somebody who exactly what you have to offer is exactly what they've been looking for.” “Anytime you're looking for growth, you should be going to LinkedIn to find people to connect with to help you do that.” Make sure you get your hands on Sharon’s free eBook: "Step-by-Step Guide to Prospecting on LinkedIn"  Bio: Sharon Hartwick is a sales and customer service dynamo that wanted to be present and active in her kids’ lives, and have a profitable career. But over-and-over again she found herself in a double bind. She was either penalized at “the office” for the times she chose her family or missing out on things with her family if she chose to obey her employer’s every demand. From 2002 to 2017 she sought a different path. A path that allowed her to be both mom and boss. Now, she’s working from home in a business that she loves, spending all the time she wants with the people she loves, and happily strutting the line between family and career. Sharon established her Virtual Assistant business in September of 2018 and was able to quickly establish herself as an expert in LinkedIn marketing and from there her business took off. The reason she has been able to outshine her competition is her brand values. She isn’t just about adding names to a list. She believes that focusing on creating meaningful relationships with the right person for your services and products is the key to success. This ensures that you’re only getting on the phone with quality warm leads that want to learn more about you and what you have to offer. Resources Mentioned: Kathy Goughenour: Expert VA Training Make More Money in Your Virtual Assistant Side Hustle with Kathy Goughenour Sharon’s LinkedIn Marketing + Sales Blog Posts Free eBook "Step-by-Step Guide to Prospecting on LinkedIn"  Connect with Sharon: The Hartwick Group Website LinkedIn Facebook
8/19/20201 hour, 4 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 299 - Creating a Powerful Brand Strategy for Your Side Hustle with Kyshira Moffett of The Power Collective

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! Kyshira Moffett is an award-winning serial entrepreneur, brand strategist, author and host of the Brand Your Power Podcast who specializes in helping ambitious women entrepreneurs package their expertise, brand their influence, and monetize their online presence. I can’t wait for you to hear this interview, because there were a couple of things that Kyshira said about marketing and money mindset that were SO GOOD they just gave me chills twice - once when she said them, and then again while I was producing this episode! I totally resonated with Kyshira’s story because like me, she grew her side hustle to six figures before quitting her day job - and she’s all about focusing on organic marketing strategies - which are marketing strategies that cost you time instead of money - and as you’ll hear from Kyshira, the return on your time investment is well worth it. This episode is basically a mini-course on how marketing works from someone who’s not  an expert in organic marketing, but an expert in how to sell high-ticket offers, and the branding and positioning behind it. So grab a pen and paper, you’re gonna wanna take notes on this one! Kyshira and I talk about: Her journey to becoming a business coach specializing in organic marketing strategies. Exactly how she grew her side hustle to six figure business before she quit her full time job. Why organic marketing strategies are the best place to focus when you’re first starting out. Some of the biggest mindset issues that hold her clients back. The beginning steps to take when you’re getting started with organic marketing. Behind the scenes of Kyshira’s business + what a typical day looks like for her. Why investing in yourself and your mindset is one of the most important investments you can make in your business. Her best advice for you if you’re struggling to get traction in your side hustle. The one belief Kyshira had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Kyshira: “I care a lot about curating the right experiences with the right people, working with the right clients. I'm really big on energy and alignment and things like that. I found organic marketing brings the right people to me.” “You're given these talents, you have your own unique touch that just no one else has.” “The people with the most likes don’t always end up with the most money.” “You have to direct people. You have to say, “Click this link, go do this, go sign up, go book.” People underestimate the power that those two or three little words have, but you have to instruct your audience!” “My business is not going to run me. I am not going to be abused by my business. I am going to take the time that I need.” “When you start to recognize that you're worth spending the money, you recognize that you're worth receiving the money.” Resources mentioned in this episode: www.thepowercollective.co/resources https://www.thepowercollective.co/ https://www.kyshira.com/book Bio: Kyshira S. Moffett, MBA is an award-winning serial entrepreneur, brand strategist, and author who specializes in helping ambitious women entrepreneurs package their expertise, brand their influence, and monetize their online presence. Passionate about educating and equipping women with strategies to launch and scale their own businesses, Kyshira created #HERmovement in 2013. What began as an online community with more than 30K global followers and 2.6K members on Facebook, has since expanded to a digital educational hub full of online courses and products, a YouTube channel, and a podcast known as “Brand Your Power”. Kyshira launched The Power Collective in 2018 to where the mission is to accelerate the growth of small and mid sized woman-owned businesses to create more economic equality within the US. The Power Collective is a management consulting firm with specialities in business development, marketing and branding. The firm provides private consulting services, online courses, and corporate training programs where they are able to facilitate intimate and large scale workshops on site for internal teams. Cultivating her passion for beauty, she launched Life of a Bombshell Cosmetics; a premium, yet affordably-priced cosmetics line designed for women who are movers and shakers. Keeping up the momentum, Kyshira has published three books: Bombshell of All Trades, Beauty That Banks, and most recently, All in Favor of Branding. She’s also published three planners: From the Desk of a Bombshell, Project ManageHER, and Launch Your Beauty Brand Toolkit. When Kyshira is not busy growing her Bombshell empire, she’s an active member of the Greater Pittsburgh community. As former president of the National Black MBA Association, Pittsburgh Chapter and UYLP, she continues to exercise her expertise in training, facilitation, and public speaking by hosting workshops for professional organizations in the areas of branding, entrepreneurship, and the power of social media.  In 2018, Kyshira was inducted into the Forbes Coaches Council. Her continuous efforts and involvement have been recognized by Forbes, Brit and Co, EBONY Magazine, Fast Company, XO Necole, CNN Money, Blavity, Pittsburgh Business Times, and more! She is the recipient of the 2017 Entrepreneur of the Year Award, Millennial Visionary of the Year Award, and the Fab 40 under 40 Award. She is a proud graduate of Hampton University and member of Zeta Phi Beta Sorority, Inc. Connect with Kyshira: The Power Collective Co Website Kyshira.com Website Instagram Facebook Twitter
8/12/202059 minutes, 8 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 298 - Getting Paid to Be You with Natalie Sisson

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! My driving motivation for starting my business was being able to do what I wanted when I wanted without having to ask for permission - and my guest today is one of those entrepreneurs that I started following early on in my journey that showed me that it really is possible. With a laptop and a smartphone, Natalie Sisson built a six-figure education business called The Suitcase Entrepreneur, that she ran from anywhere in the world - and now she’s pivoted to helping entrepreneurs like you tap into your unique potential, get paid to be you and create a purpose-driven life and business with her book The Freedom Plan, and courses like the Launch Your Damn Course Accelerator and Write Your Damn Book*. Nat’s an entrepreneur, coach, teacher, No #1 Bestselling author, speaker, triathlete and lifelong learner, who’s on a mission to show you how to combine your knowledge, skills, experience and passions into profitable revenue streams that are aligned with your values. Nat and I talk about: Nat’s marketing strategy to grow her audience when she was first starting out. The lessons you can learn from a “flop” launch. How to reinvent yourself and fall back in love with your business. Her evolution to her $250,000 course launch The things you need to be doing to grow your business. The one belief Natalie had to change about herself to get where she is today. And make sure you head on over to https://nataliesisson.com/peptalk to get your free guide to learn how to use your Unfair Advantage to get paid to be YOU! My favorite quotes from Nat: “People buy into people who believe truly and passionately in what they're doing.” “Niching down and understanding exactly who you're serving gives you leverage and freedom.” “Go to five of your closest peers or friends and say to them, what do you think is my super power? What do you think I'm really good at? If you would describe me in one sentence to people, what would it be?” “When you help girls and women in a community, they help the entire community blossom.” “Stay the course when you start creating something, don't create it once and put it out there and stop. People like consistency and want to know that you're there and they can continue to do this thing with you.” Resources mentioned in this episode: The Suitcase Entrepreneur https://nataliesisson.com/peptalk https://nataliesisson.com/accelerator/ Bio: Natalie Sisson believes that everyone has their own unique potential and she’s here to show you how to tap into it, get paid to be you and create a purpose-driven life and business. She’s an entrepreneur, coach, teacher, No #1 Bestselling author, speaker, triathlete and lifelong learner, who’s on a mission to show you how to combine your knowledge, skills, experience and passions into profitable revenue streams you can combine to build a portfolio career or business that is wholly aligned with your values. With a laptop and a smartphone, she built a six-figure education business The Suitcase Entrepreneur, that she ran from anywhere in the world. Now she’s focussed on how we can capitalize on the future of work to build our human-centred skills and expertise to do the work that matters and design our lives with intention. Connect with Natalie: Website Instagram Twitter Facebook YouTube LinkedIn
8/5/20201 hour, 3 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 297 - Live Your Purpose (And Get Paid) with Katie DePaola of Inner Glow Circle

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Katie DePaola - an entrepreneur, author and the founder of Inner Glow Circle, an accredited training and certification company for women coaches, leaders and entrepreneurs where she’s taught thousands of women how to find their purpose, live it and get paid. And I’m so excited to have Katie on the show this week because I really resonate with her company’s core values. Work for yourself, not by yourself. Create the thing you wish existed. Say the thing no one else is willing to say. Change lives that change other lives. Find your GLOW (your greatest level of want). And this isn’t just marketing-talk. Inner Glow Circle truly lives up to its values. Katie and I did this interview back in February of 2020, before COVID-19, before everyone in the online space was talking about anti-racism and allyship - and as I was putting together the show notes for this episode I was thinking “I wish this conversation would have happened later because I bet she has a powerful perspective on what’s happening right now...” and I was right. You can check out Inner Glow Circle’s commitment to diversity, equity and inclusion in the coaching space here and a workshop led by one of their graduates, VP Wright on Activism, Allyship and Antiracism in Coaching at http://innerglowcircle.com/activism/ One thing I admire about Katie is that she’s turned her greatest challenges into her greatest opportunities - and says her business is what saved her life. Katie and I talk about: Her journey to living her purpose and the creation of Inner Glow Circle The truth about what it takes to be an entrepreneur Why Katie wanted to scale her business so quickly The sneaky ways perfectionism holds us back Why you really can live your passion (and make money doing it) Her three keys to happiness Her best advice for you if you’re struggling to grow your business. The one belief Katie had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Katie: “Create the thing that you wish existed in the world.” “Serve a person who is ultimately like you - and that's who you create for.” “There are people who want to help people, but also want to live really good lives. You don't have to pick, you get to have both.” “We are so hard on ourselves, but at the same time, we underestimate what we can do when we get the right support and resources.” Resources mentioned in this episode: http://innerglowcircle.com/activism/ http://innerglowcircle.com/purpose/ At Least You Look Good Book Bio: Katie DePaola is an entrepreneur, author and the founder of Inner Glow Circle, an accredited training and certification company for women coaches, leaders and entrepreneurs. Right after starting IGC, Katie lost her brother to an accidental overdose. Also Lyme Disease survivor, she built her business from her bathtub, growing the company from self-funded startup to million-dollar business. Through certification programs, memberships and online courses, Katie has taught thousands of women how to find their purpose, live it and get paid. She has a B.S. in Human and Organizational Development from Vanderbilt University and is an ICF Credentialed PCC Coach. She has been featured in TIME Magazine, The Huffington Post, Elite Daily and more. In her first book, At Least You Look Good (2020), Katie shares her vulnerable (and often funny) reflections on how to deal with the hardest parts of life — and her best advice for how to “glow through what you go through.” Connect with Katie: Inner Glow Circle Website Instagram: @innerglowcircle | @itskatiedepaola Facebook: facebook.com/katiedepaola  |  facebook.com/innerglowcircle
7/29/20201 hour, 2 minutes, 11 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep 296 - June 2020 Income Report

Find out how much money I made in June 2020 and exactly how I made it, what my expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!
7/22/20201 hour, 6 minutes, 55 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 295 - Create and Prosper as a Writer with Gee Nonterah

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Gertrude Nonterah, also known as Gee - a former medical scientist turned health content writer, podcaster and YouTuber who loves to help bloggers and writers create stellar content and build profitable businesses. So just to give you some perspective, I had this conversation with Gee on February 26, 2020. I’m writing up the show notes on June 15th, recording this intro on June 16, and you’re listening to this on July 15. And I don’t think that I need to tell you that between February 26 and July 15th, the world changed in many, many ways and is continuing to transform. And the advice Gee shares in this episode is not only powerful, but timeless. Like, if you ever needed a pep talk to keep going when you things feel hard, you gotta listen all the way to the end of this episode. Gee and I talk about: Her journey from a medical scientist with a side-hustle to full-time freelancer. How to create an “unemployment insurance policy” for yourself. Ways Gee found her first clients that you might not have considered. The one thing your LinkedIn profile must have. Why you don’t have to have a portfolio to get clients (and what to do instead). How to predict your results (even if you’ve never done the thing before). How to start making money now while you work on scaling. Gee’s strategy for building an audience. Her best advice for you if you’re struggling to grow your side hustle. The one belief Gee had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Gee: “Even if you think you're never going to get laid off, even if you think your industry is waterproof that nothing can ever touch it. There's nothing wrong with experimenting with things that you're interested in and turning that into something that pays. You just never know.” “Don’t discount your local businesses who want to pay you money for the services that you offer as a freelancer.” “The most powerful thing is you need to tell people what to do.” “I leveraged my blog and my social presence as proof of what I could do for my clients.” “Taking action really brings clarity.” “I'm going to be the person that I am just a few steps ahead of the people that want to do what I'm doing and I'm going to tell them how I got there.” “You have to rise up and tell yourself that you are worth it and you can do this and you're smart. And there's nothing that if you put your mind to do that, you cannot do.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Smart Passive Income Entrepreneur on Fire Side Hustle Nation Create and Prosper Show 10 top profitable freelance writing niches Bio: Gee Nonterah is a former medical scientist turned health content writer, podcaster and YouTuber. She loves to help bloggers and writers create stellar content and build profitable businesses. When she is not creating, Gee loves to watch spy movies. Connect with Gee: Gee Nonterah Website Instagram  YouTube    
7/15/202058 minutes, 10 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 294 - From Solopreneur to Agency with Facebook Ads Pro Zach Spuckler

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! My guest on the show today is Zach Spuckler, founder of Heart Soul & Hustle and the Heart Soul + Hustle podcast, and I’m excited to bring you his story today because I’ve found all the different ways he’s pivoted in his business fascinating! I started following Zach back in 2015 when I was just starting out because I really resonated with his authentic marketing strategies. After making over 1.5 million dollars in online courses and coaching sales, Zach pivoted to serving that same audience with marketing services and consulting.  He's now the chief marketing extraordinaire at his Facebook Ads & Consulting Agency where he works with his clients to achieve multi-six-figure launches, automated funnels and consults on marketing strategies for course creators looking to scale their business.  Zach and I talk about: Zach’s online business journey and the unexpected lessons he’s learned along the way. Why Zach pivoted from one-to-many to one-to-one. What goes into a 6-figure launch. How to validate your ideas. The biggest Facebook Ads mistakes Zach sees people make. Zach’s best advice for anyone wanting to grow their side hustle.  The one belief Zach had to change about himself to get where he is today. My favorite quotes from Zach: “Always keep one foot in what you're doing and put one foot forward and continue to test things out before you make a big leap.” “There is no “wrong move”. There's only determining what you want to do, putting in the effort to make it happen and then pivoting if things aren't working.” “When you're running ads and you have a proven offer, you're taking a calculated risk. And when you don't have a proven offer, you're taking a gamble.” “There are phases at every level of your business where you've just got to hustle.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Client Case Study: Creating $120K in Revenue Directly from Ads in an Online Course Launch  Bio: Zach Spuckler is the founder of Heart Soul & Hustle and creator of a podcast by the same name. After making over 1.5 million dollars in online courses and coaching sales he pivoted to serving that same audience with marketing services and consulting. He's now the chief marketing extraordinaire at his Facebook Ads & Consulting Agency where he works with his clients to achieve multi-six-figure launches, automated funnels and consults on marketing strategies for course creators looking to scale their business. You can learn more about him at HeartSoulHustle.com. Connect with Zach: Heart Soul Hustle Website  Instagram
7/8/20201 hour, 6 seconds
Episode Artwork

Bonus - Creating a Fresh Start with Gina Horkey of Horkey Handbook

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review! So in early May, I get this email with the subject line “Helping Your Audience During These Challenging Times” and I open it up, and it’s an email following up with me on one sent to me in early April about today’s guest coming on the show and talking about working from home and pivoting during the pandemic and the opportunity for creating a fresh start. And I was SO GLAD she followed up with me because I don’t remember seeing that first email, and as you guys know from Episode 148, I’m an email inbox ninja and it’s rare that something gets by me. Sidenote: Always follow up. I tell my students this inside my Website Marketing Lab all the time. It’s not a no until you get an actual no. And even though I’m booked out with guests through the end of 2020, I decided to bring Gina Horkey of Horkey Handbook back on the show for this bonus episode because I loved our conversation back in Episode 237 all about how to start a virtual assistant business and the topic is still timely, even in July of 2020! So if you’re looking for a fresh start, maybe you got furloughed or laid off, maybe you’re like some of my family members who are high-risk and don’t feel safe going back into an office environment, maybe you just really loved working from home and want to figure out how you can make that happen long-term, maybe you’re like some of my friends who have decided that with everything that’s been going on in the world they want more control over their time and income and future and want to totally shift in how they live their life going forward, maybe you know someone who fits into any of those categories - Gina’s gonna share with you how you can get a fresh start. Today we’re talking about: Why now is the perfect time for a fresh start. The importance of diversifying your income streams. The easiest way to figure out what your business is going to be. Why you should not be working for free. What a virtual assistant is and what is needed to start your own business. My favorite quotes from Gina: “This is an opportunity for a fresh start.” “How do I help people to enjoy their lives now and not just plan for the future and save everything for the future because our future is not promised or guaranteed.” “If you never take any action, you're not actually doing anything to bring the results that you wanted.” “You need to validate that your business is going to work by getting somebody to purchase from you.” “Maybe what's in store for you in these little actions and being open to doors and next steps is way more beautiful than you could have ever imagined on your own. “ Resources mentioned in this episode: Horkeyhandbook.com Maybe You Should Talk to Someone by Lori Gottlieb Inside Out: A Memoir by Demi Moore Freebie: 150+ Services You Can Offer as a VA Find a VA Bio: Gina Horkey is the founder of Horkey Handbook. She’s is a married, millennial mama to two precocious kiddos from Minnesota. Additionally, she’s the founder of Horkey HandBook, a website geared towards helping others find or become a kickass virtual assistant. Gina’s background includes making a living as a professional writer, an online business marketing consultant and a decade of experience in the financial services industry Connect with Gina: FB: https://www.facebook.com/HorkeyHandBook Twitter: https://twitter.com/horkeyhandbook Pinterest: http://www.pinterest.com/ghorke LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/gina-horkey/ Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/horkeyhandbook/ YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/channel/UC49yIdhQohqDYtjSXfoh_Uw  
7/1/20201 hour, 3 minutes, 7 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 293 - How to Be a Chillpreneur with Denise Duffeld-Thomas

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!   Back in my April income report in Episode 288 I shared with you how I read this book by Denise Duffield Thomas called Chillpreneur: The New Rules for Creating Success, Freedom and Abundance on Your Terms, and how that book started me on a quest to transform my money mindset. I started reading it to distract myself from the overworking habit that crept back in at the start of the pandemic when my mind started to go squirrely with my same old money fears. And what Chillpreneur revealed to me is that I’ve been overworking and under-offering, and that if I wanted to change that I needed to go deeper than fluffy money mantras about abundance and attraction (which I personally think are a bunch of BS anyway) and really get to the root of my beliefs about money and my worth so I could challenge them, and then change them. So near the end of the book, the author, Denise Duffield Thomas mentioned that she loves being a guest on podcasts so I thought, “OMG I’m gonna reach out and see if she wants to come on the show to talk about the book!” and she said yes! Denise is a money mindset mentor for entrepreneurs, and one of the things that she stands for that I really resonate with is her belief that empowered women will change the world, and that when women know how to create wealth they use it in ways that benefit humankind. And she also knows that many women have a complicated relationship with money and their own worth which prevents us from having the kind of impact we can have. Denise and I talk about: How she became a money mindset coach for women. Common money blocks you see from someone who's brand new to business vs. someone who’s farther along in their journey. Why Denise wrote Chillpreneur. How to make more money (without giving more of your time). One simple (but costly) mistake you might be making in your business and how to fix it. Denise’s best advice for you if you’re struggling to grow your side hustle. The one belief she had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Denise: “Money itself doesn't cure money blocks, but the awareness can help you dance with them.” “Why don't I write the book that I wish someone would write for me?” “You've got to look at all the things you could create and decide which one could really make the biggest impact.” “Tell people how they can give you money and make it really easy for them.” “There's so many purchases that people are making at the moment that they are deeming essential to them. But how are you supposed to know the difference if you never tell anyone about what you've got to offer?” Resources mentioned in this episode: Tools of Titans by Tim Ferriss Chillpreneur: The New Rules for Creating Success, Freedom and Abundance on Your Terms Bio: Denise Duffield-Thomas is the Money Mindset Mentor or the new wave of entrepreneurs. Her books Lucky Bitch, Get Rich, Lucky Bitch and the newly published, Chillpreneur (Hay House) give a fresh and funny road-map to create an outrageously successful life and business. Denise helps women create wealth through her mindset courses and practical wisdom on releasing money blocks. Find out more at DeniseDT.com. Connect with Denise: Website: https://www.denisedt.com/ Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/denisedt/ Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/denisedt
7/1/202049 minutes, 43 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 292 - May 2020 Income Report

Find out how much money I made in May 2020 and exactly how I made it, what my expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!
6/24/20201 hour, 14 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 291 - How to Sell a Business with Sara Frandina + Cristina Roman

Okay I’m so excited about this interview today because had I not crossed paths with these two women back when I started my business I probably would have quit. It was 2015, I had just transitioned from charging barely nothing for web design services to making the Free 5 Day Website Challenge. I was still working full-time, and I still had a really negative mindset about my day job, like I was a victim to it and I didn’t understand that I could choose my thoughts and choose ones that didn’t drain my energy and choose ones that supported my goals. I was “unenlightened” so to speak. The Free 5 Day Website Challenge had started to take off, and people were joining the Facebook Group I’d made for them to get their questions answered. And my notifications were BLOWING UP. And my email inbox was BLOWING UP. And I still had this “employee, people pleaser” mindset, like, “They emailed me, I have to respond. They asked a question in the Facebook Group, I have to respond. I can’t make people wait, if they have to wait they’ll get mad and tell other people my training sucks.” I was going it entirely alone, I had no support system, I only knew how to be an employee that jumped when someone said jump and not an entrepreneur that actually gets to decide how things run - and needless to say, I was totally burnt out. And then, I came across One Woman Shop, a blog and resource started by Sara Frandina and Cristina Roman (and now owned by Crissy + Danielle), and it put me on this path to learning how to collaborate and set boundaries and manage my time and not try to do it all on my own. So over the next few years Sara + Cristina ran One Woman Shop and I did my thing and our paths would cross from time to time in ways that they probably didn’t realize were life-changing for me because they were just doing what was natural to them - creating community and connection and a place for solopreneurs to get support. So I get an email one day late last year that One Woman Shop was for sale, and I just had SO MANY questions about how they came to the decision to sell vs. just closing the doors, the logistics of pricing and selling a business, all the things. So I invited Sara + Cristina on the show to break it all down for you and what’s next for them. And I’m also working on having the new owners, Crissy + Danielle, on the show sometime to talk about the story of buying and taking over One Woman Shop. Today we’re talking about: How + why Sara and Cristina started One Woman Shop. Why collaboration is the best marketing strategy you can have. Tips for getting over the fear of rejection and humiliation. Why you need to take action to get a result, even if the result isn’t what you expected. Advice if you are thinking about creating a membership site. When Sara and Cristina decided it was time to step away form the business. The logistics behind pricing + selling the business. The process for finding a buyer for the business. What Sara and Cristina are doing now. Their best advice for you if you’re struggling to grow your side hustle. The beliefs they had to change about themselves to get where they are today. My favorite quotes: “People that we surround ourselves with really make a huge difference in our journey” “You just have to choose what works for you and really double-down on it.” “A lot of what we were selling is the potential for what could be built based off the foundation that we created.” Resources mentioned in this episode: One Woman Shop Kolbe Index Ep. 256: How to Sell Your Blog for Six Figures with Carrie Smith Nicholson piquecoaching.co sarafrandina.com Bio: Sara Frandina is a conversion copywriter with a serious addiction to learning, coffee, and popcorn. She’s interviewed and surveyed customers of more than 100 brands and businesses in a quest to crush conversion rates using empathy. Cristina Roman is a Washington, DC-based Certified Life Coach, though you may find her wandering the streets of Guatemala or Italy. She works with people who are ready to give up overwhelm, stress, and procrastination in order to bring more focus into their professional and personal lives. (Is that you? Download this guide for getting into a deep work state in 15 minutes.) She half-jokes that she’s the Cross Legged Coach; her goal is always to keep things casual but wildly impactful in her work. Connect with Sara + Cristina: Websites: piquecoaching.co  + sarafrandina.com Instagram: @sarafrandina + @cmroman Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!
6/17/20201 hour, 8 minutes, 43 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 290 - Creating Community to Grow Your Side Hustle with Kelly McCausey

If you’ve listened to Pep Talks for Side Hustlers for any length of time, you know that once a month I give you a look behind the scenes of my business into not only the financials and the strategies, but also the journey of me running up against my limiting beliefs and having to work through my fear and self-doubt on my quest reach the goals I’ve set for myself. And just like any good quest, I meet people along the way who reveal the path forward for me, and my conversation with today’s guest was another one of those transformational moments. Kelly McCausey is the founder of Love People + Make Money, a membership program for female entrepreneurs, especially single moms, to help them build up their communities and businesses. One of the reasons I was so excited to have Kelly on the show is that just like me, she’s all about building a business through relationships and community. Kelly and I did this interview at the end of January and at the time, I was just closing out my biggest revenue month ever, and like I told you back in my January 2020 Income Report that one of my podcast guests mentioned the book “The Big Leap” to me in an interview. That was Kelly.  And she probably doesn’t know this, but her recommendation sent me on that four-month long journey that I talked about in my April 2020 Income Report (288) to rewire my mindset around money, my self-worth, how I value my body of work and what makes me happy.  That’s the kind of person Kelly is, and that’s the kind of impact she can have on someone in a single conversation, so I’m super excited to introduce you to her today so you can connect with her and change your life too. Today we’re talking about: Kelly’s journey from starting a work-at-home-mom radio station to building a community around her podcast. How she creates connections and community. How she started monetizing without trading hours for dollars. How she sets herself apart + finds success in a saturated market. Why building real, genuine relationships will build your business. What a typical day looks like for Kelly. Her best advice if you’re struggling to grow your business. The one belief Kelly had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Kelly: “When you're brand new, the most important thing you can do is take a stand and have something to say.”  “If you want people to know that you're legit and that you care about them, then then show it” “Create content that gives value, create experiences that deliver value. Create the opportunities for people to see you the way you want to be seen." “A great brand comes out of knowing yourself and knowing your community so well.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Jessica Larue Mastermind Hub Code: Kelly The Big Leap Book Bio: I got my start in 2002. A single mom with one young son, I made graphics and websites for other home based business owners. I worked hard and charged too little for my time.  Thankfully, I learned quickly there are smarter ways to build an income online.  For many years now, I no longer trade hours for dollars. I blog, podcast, design, partner, create information products, run membership programs, hold live retreats and coach others to get where they want to be in an online business. Connect with Kelly: Love People Make Money Website Facebook Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!
6/10/20201 hour, 6 minutes, 20 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 289 - How to Pitch Yourself for Podcast Interviews with Kelly Glover of The Talent Squad

So, when I first started to bring guests onto Pep Talks for Side Hustlers, I had to be the one to hustle and invite people onto the show. It all started with me inviting a few people that had spoken at a conference that I’d also spoken at, and then I got a little more strategic and started to invite people who had the audience that I wanted to get in front of, and then I must have reached some magical tipping point in the podcasting world, because people started pitching me to be a guest on the show.  And I was like “Wait, what? You want to talk to me on my little old show? Okay, let’s do it!” So I started saying yes to conversations with all these strangers, which was a little scary at first, I’m not gonna lie. But it’s been the most transformational thing for me because I get to pick the brains of people who ARE where I want to be. And it’s a great opportunity for my guests to get in front of a whole new set of people for the price of a fun, one-hour conversation with me. And then you get the benefit of learning from our conversation! It’s a total win-win-win. So I still invite people that I want to build relationships with onto the show, but I also get a TON of pitches… and some are amazing that make me really excited to say yes… and others are not so amazing that make me definitely say no. So if getting in front of an audience of hundreds or even thousands of your ideal client for the price of a conversation sounds appealing to you, and you want to know what makes a podcast host like me say yes to your pitch in a heartbeat (or tell you no, I don’t think you’re a good fit for my show), then today’s episode is for you. My guest today is Kelly Glover of The Talent Squad, and she specializes in booking podcast tours for entrepreneurs. Kelly is here today to teach you how you can use podcast guesting as a vehicle to strengthen your personal brand and gain credibility, authority, and influence - and how you can get podcast hosts to say YES to your pitch. Today we’re talking about: Kelly’s journey to build a podcast booking agency.  The benefits of being a podcast guest Two secrets of pitching podcasts What to do after the podcast airs. Why downloads aren’t a true indicator of success for a podcast How to know when it’s time to move from pitching yourself to hiring an agency to pitch you. Kelly’s best advice for you if you’re struggling to grow their side hustle. The one belief Kelly had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Kelly: “Always bring your best and be your real self.” “There's no copy-and-paste pitches that will ever work.” “Another benefit of podcasting is the more you do them, the more you understand your own messaging.” “Everyone is their own personal brand. No one is you, so don't let that stop you. Don't put up any roadblocks, don't let it stop you. Just get started.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Side Hustle School Podcast The Talent Squad Bio: Kelly Glover specializes in booking  podcast tours for entrepreneurs and authors. She started podcasting in 2007 and has an 18-year track record working in media and talent management. She hosted her own syndicated radio show, worked as a talent agent, celebrity interviewer, and has produced award-winning podcasts. Kelly is the founder of The Talent Squad and is here to teach the benefits of the podcast guesting strategy, and how you can not only get ready to pitch and get booked but also how to actually ace your interview. Connect with Kelly: Website Instagram  Facebook LinkedIn Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!
6/3/202052 minutes, 41 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 288 - April 2020 Income Report

Find out how much money I made in April 2020 and exactly how I made it, what my expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!
5/27/202045 minutes, 8 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 287 - Using Podcasts to Grow Your Side Hustle with Angie Trueblood

Is being a podcast guest part of your marketing strategy yet? If not, what’s holding you back? I’m gonna take a wild guess that: A) You like listening to podcasts; B) You have a business; and C) You need to get your business in front of potential customers. If any of that is true, then you are not going to want to miss the next couple of episodes I have for you, because they are all about adding podcast-guesting to your marketing strategy. My guest today is Angie Trueblood. She’s a podcast visibility expert, and I met Angie because she’s pitched me on behalf of some of the guests you’ve heard on this show, like Brandi Mowles in Episode 241 about fast-tracking your side hustle growth, Dr. Cortney Baker in Episode 251 about going from side-hustler to CEO and Danielle Hayden in Episode 280 about taking home a bigger paycheck from your side hustle. And now today Angie is on the show to talk about how you can use podcast guesting as a strategy to grow your audience and get customers. Angie and I talk about: Her journey from side-hustle to self-employed. The opportunity podcasts can create for your business. How Angie found clients. Why Angie hired a business coach and how she grew her business. How to stand out from all the other people who are pitching podcast hosts. The six parts of a great pitch. Her best advice for you if you’re struggling to get traction in your side hustle. The one belief Angie had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Angie: “You don't have to be at some giant stage of business to be featured as a podcast guest and to provide value.” “I think when you do good work and you take good care of your people, it eventually starts to snowball.” “Business is not just marketing, it's managing all of these other behind the scenes things.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Go Pitch Yourself Pitching Roadmap Go Pitch Yourself Podcast Angie’s Bio: As a podcast visibility expert and host of the Go Pitch Yourself podcast, Angie Trueblood knows that the only 'perfect pitch' is the one that leads with value and focuses on building a genuine connection.  Whether she is teaching entrepreneurs how to pitch themselves or working behind the scenes to secure opportunities for others, Angie leverages her super-connector powers to grow businesses and build long-lasting relationships.  When she's not working with her clients or being active in her local community, she loves exploring Richmond, Virginia's parks and playgrounds with her two kiddos, checking out new restaurants with her hubs, and laughing about motherhood with friends. Connect with Angie: Angie Trueblood Website Instagram Facebook Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!
5/20/20201 hour, 1 minute, 37 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 286 - From Passion Project to Entrepreneurial Empire with Brooke Eliason of Female Foodie

Ever dreamed about starting a food blog, but not sure how you could make money from it? My guest today is Brooke Eliason, also known as the blogger behind Female Foodie, a blog that brings readers the best restaurant recommendations across the country (because Brooke believes that life's too short to eat bad food). I was introduced to Brooke by donut blogger Rory Balkin I interviewed back in Episode 264 - and just like Rory, Brooke is monetizing her love of food in some really unique ways - so even if you’re not a food blogger, or a blogger at all this episode is going to blow your mind wide open on all the possibilities out there for you to put different, creative streams of revenue in place in your side hustle. Brooke started her blog back in 2010, and it’s fascinating to get to hear step by step how she started it as a simple passion project and turned it into an entrepreneurial empire with over 60 contributors in 9 cities and counting. Today we’re talking about: How Brooke created a profitable food blog by solving a common problem. How Brooke’s passion project turned into her full time business. The process Brooke used to create and sell a product to her audience. Why bloggers need multiple streams of revenue. Brooke's process for bringing on blog contributors and building her team. Brooke’s side-hustle to self-employed story. How Brooke makes money decisions in her business. The one belief Brooke had to change about herself to get where she is today. So, what’s a blogger who writes restaurant reviews and creates city guides to do during a global pandemic when the majority of the country’s restaurants are shut down? You’ll find out from our episode that Brooke has multiple streams of revenue, and while she probably didn’t anticipate something quite like COVID-19 happening, I think it’s the perfect example of why it’s so important for not just bloggers but any kind of business to have more than one way of making money. I asked Brooke how she pivoted and here’s what she said: “The main pivot has been the restaurant inspired recipes! This was my mom's idea. The response has been incredibly positive and interestingly enough my social media following and engagement have skyrocketed. The entire situation seemed all doom and gloom once I realized that restaurants would be closed for weeks, and even though I'm still missing eating out so much, this challenging time has brought new opportunities and helped me stretch and grow to new capacities! I listened to a Chalene Johnson podcast from Build Your Tribe right when everything started to crumble and she mentioned that we grow the most when times are challenging, not when things are going perfectly, and I agree!” Right now on her Instagram she and her contributors are highlighting the best take-out and make-at-home copycat recipes. Go check out Female Foodie’s Instagram to see how a professional blogger is pivoting with her content during the pandemic - it’s super creative. Because life’s too short to eat bad food, even when you’re staying home. My favorite quotes from Brooke: “It's always important to surround yourself with people who believe in you.” “It's been a lot of trial and error, which I think is the fun and hard part of entrepreneurship.” “You can’t get a no unless you ask.” “When you own something that's yours, you just have complete control.” “I can actually reach those big goals, but not if I think small. I have to believe in it and trust the process and everyday slowly chip away at those goals.” “I've had to learn that I'm still working on this, to not compare, and to stay in my lane.” “Don't let other people take away from what you're building. You are unique and only you can provide the value that you're providing to your community." Resources mentioned in this episode: Female Foodie MediaVine AdThrive Matt Molen - Email on Autopilot The War of Art – Steven Pressfield Bio: Brooke Eliason ("e-listen") is Salt Lake City native and started her blog Female Foodie in 2010, solely as a passion project with one goal in mind: to document all the restaurants she ate at that summer. Female Foodie is now a multi-city website and brand covering the best restaurants in places like Austin, Portland, Chicago, and Los Angeles. She has worked with over 60 contributors in the past four years with a mission to bring her readers the best restaurant recommendations across the country, because life's too short to eat bad food. Brooke has been traveling full-time with her husband and baby since October 2018 in search of the best tacos, pizza, donuts, and fried chicken across the country. Connect with Brooke: Female Foodie Website Instagram Facebook YouTube Pinterest Twitter Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Learn how to market yourself online without ads, algorithms or spending all your time on social media at www.howtomarketyourselfonline.com Learn how to get your first web design client at www.startafreelancewebdesignbiz.com Leave a Review!
5/13/20201 hour, 4 minutes, 59 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 285 - Growing a Niche Travel Blog from Scratch with Jessica Serna of My Curly Adventures

When I say “niche” what’s your first thought? What I hear from my students in my Website Marketing Lab + Web Designer Academy courses are things like: “Thank goodness because I don’t want to be everything to everyone.” “I have too many interests, I don’t want to pick just one thing or one kind of person.” “What if I pick the wrong thing?!” For some people, it’s a relief.  Others feel really constricted when they hear that narrowing down your interests and focusing on one thing is the key to growing a successful business. Others never get started because they’re afraid to pick the wrong thing, or making the choice seems overwhelming. But what if instead of blindly doing all the things, or never starting because you were worried you made the wrong choice, you just tried a bunch of different things and were just really open to noticing what’s getting traction and following that path? That’s what today’s guest, Jessica Serna of the niche travel blog MyCurlyAdventures did. MyCurlyAdventures is a travel brand that inspires Texans to "travel the world" in their own state and find magic in their own backyard. Jessica and I talk about: Her journey from starting a general lifestyle blog to monetizing a niche travel blog. How her family reacted when she quit her day job to blog full time. How she lands sponsorship opportunities. Ways Jessica grew her following organically (and what didn’t work). The most important component of a successful blog. A day in the life of a travel blogger (pre-global pandemic). Jessica’s best advice for you if you’re struggling to monetize your blog. The one belief Jessica had to change about herself to get where she is today. Travel Blogging During a Global Pandemic Jessica and I recorded this interview in December 2019, and at the time of production in April of 2020, much of the country is shut down due to the COVID-19 pandemic. I was really curious to know how Jessica, as a travel blogger who can’t travel, has adapted during the pandemic, so I reached out to her to find out. Here’s what she said: “As someone who focuses on travel, the transition has been something new and challenging to face. The best thing I can do is look at it as a challenge to overcome. I'm currently recycling old photos on Instagram as well as incorporating new content around fun at home activities, travel from home activities, and challenges like the #yogawinechallenge that connects people through something fun while supporting local businesses. Since I have extra free time from not traveling/shooting/editing new content, I am focusing on extra educational opportunities like the free courses and conferences that have gone online, creating content on other platforms like TikTok to increase brand awareness, and creating more blog content as I know people are going to be excited to look up activities and travel once this is over.” And if you wanna learn more about using TikTok as a blogger, don’t ask me because I have no clue, but Jessica wrote a great blog post all about “3 Ways You’re Already Sabotaging Yourself on TikTok.” My favorite quotes from Jessica: “When you niche down, you suddenly have a focus.” “It's hard to distinguish yourself from everyone else who also serves everybody.” “Even if things didn't go my way at this point...I'm still happy for everything I've done and I still provide value and I've learned so many incredible skills.” “Providing a solution that's not readily available is going to cause people to talk about you for you.” Resources Mentioned in This Episode Jessica’s blogging tips 3 Ways Your Sabotaging Yourself on TikTok Jessica’s Bio: Jessica is the Blogger of MyCurlyAdventures, a travel brand that inspires Texans to "travel the world" in their own state. Through her approach she has been able to inspire local wanderlust and help people travel more by looking nearby. From visiting the wine country in Fredericksburg, going sand surfing in Monahans, riding in an Italian gondola in Irving, and so much more, Jessica shares how Texans can find magic in their own backyard. Connect with Jessica: My Curly Adventures Website Instagram Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review!
5/6/202056 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 284 - March 2020 Income Report

Find out how much money I made in March 2020 and exactly how I made it, what my expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review!
4/29/20201 hour, 2 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 283 - Validating Your Ideas with Elle Drouin of Styled Stock Society

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! One of the things that I’m so, so passionate about when it comes to building your business is making sure that you’re spending your time and money on things that will bring you a return on your investment when you’re just starting out. And I’m so adamant about it for you, because I’ve made so many decisions that delayed my success that I don’t want you to make the same mistakes that I did. It does not need to take you three years to be able to quit your day job, not because you’re not making enough money to replace your paycheck, but because you’re spending too much of it on things your business just isn’t ready for. That’s why I teach you how to DIY your own website for free inside my Free 5 Day Website Challenge - so that you can get your business off the ground quickly without spending a ton of time and money having someone do it for you when it’s inevitably going to change 6 months to a year in. And that’s why I love introducing you to people like today’s guest, Elle Drouin, founder of Styled Stock Society – a stylish stock photography membership for women entrepreneurs.  I’m a total fangirl of Styled Stock Society not just because their images are gorgeous, but because they make you look like a total boss even if you’re on a budget. And it’s not just stock photos - they have Canva templates for all the assets you need to create to run an online business.  There is absolutely a time and a place to invest in hiring a professional to design your website or design a brand for you or create custom assets like freebies, and that time is AFTER you’ve done the work to validate your ideas, and that’s exactly what Elle and I get into in today’s episode. Elle and I talk about: Elle’s transition from financial planner to photography membership site for female entrepreneurs. How Elle’s dog’s Instagram led to her first paying client. Why Elle’s first course flopped, and what she learned from it that changed everything. Elle’s marketing strategy and how she grows her audience. How she’s grown her team and what her first hire looked like. Elle's philosophy on money. Her thoughts on pivoting in your business. The one belief Elle had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Elle: “If you have a solution to a problem that people actually have, and you're willing to put that solution in front of them, you've just got to take the chance.” “You kind of have to be conscious of how much you're actually spending and making sure that you're not spending it all.” “I've been very intentional with anything that I've created or launched to make sure that there are people that actually want it and are willing to pay for it and it's actually going to enable them to grow their business.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Free Stock Photos Bio: Elle is a product stylist, photographer, crazy dog mom, and Founder of Styled Stock Society – a stylish stock photography membership for women entrepreneurs. When she’s not styling and shooting photos, she’s also the human behind the Instagram-famous pup @mochiandthecity (who is far more popular than she’ll ever be). Connect with Elle: Elle Drouin Website Styled Stock Society Instagram  Facebook Pinterest
4/22/202052 minutes, 31 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 282 - Print on Demand Self Publishing with Kelli Roberts of Kelli Publish

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! You know how people get sucked into scrolling Facebook or Instagram, and how you can just mindlessly pick up your phone and then you look up and two hours have gone by and you’re like, “What just happened?”  I have that bad habit, but for me, it’s not social media that I get sucked into. I’m never on Facebook except once a day to check in on all my students in my Facebook Groups, and I’m horrible about Instagram, to the point where I’ve put up an automated reply in my DMs that if you want to get in touch with me, email me because I’m never in my DMs.  I know, I’m old school. So old school that I get sucked into news. My crack-apps of choice are Apple News, and Flipboard, mostly stories from either Buzzfeed, or Entrepreneur, Inc + Forbes. So much so that at the time of this recording, I’ve removed both apps from my phone and I’m trying to figure out how to block myself from being able to look at our local news websites whenever my brain wants to procrastinate or zone out and I automatically reach for my phone. But before I grounded myself from mindlessly flipping through news stories until my brain was so wired that I couldn’t sleep, I came across a headline that read “Amazon Sellers Are Self-Publishing 'Blank' Books — and Turning a Big Profit” so of course I click on it and it’s a Money Magazine article profiling today’s guest, Kelli Roberts, who also happens to live in Columbus, Ohio like me, who creates designs for print-on-demand products on Amazon. So I reached out to invite her on the show to learn all about the fascinating world of self-publishing and print-on-demand. Kelli and I talk about: What low-content and no-content books are and how Kelli makes a living creating and selling them on Amazon. The secret to success with self-publishing on Amazon. Networking at conferences as an introvert. How Kelli got featured in Money Magazine. What a typical day looks like for Kelli. The one thing you need to drive you to keep going when it gets hard. Kelli’s best advice for you if you’re struggling to generate revenue. The one belief Kelli had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Kelli: “Do something you enjoy. If you don't enjoy the process, it's going to be a huge struggle.” “Don't compare yourself to anyone else. It's your journey and don't do it just for the money.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Amazon Sellers Are Self-Publishing 'Blank' Books — and Turning a Big Profit Summit of Greatness Amazon KDP Merch by Amazon Alex Becker Bio: In 1998, Kelli started selling on eBay as a hobby because she was intrigued about selling things online. But Kelli never saw it as a business opportunity, so she earned a BA in political science in 2005. For the next 8 years, she spent time working at a tennis club and in the investment industry. In 2013, Kelli decided to quit her job to focus 100% on eBay. Since then, she’s done Amazon FBA, Kindle, CreateSpace, ACX and various print-on-demand platforms. She absolutely LOVES expressive her creativity through print on demand products.  In April of 2018, Kelli started a YouTube channel to help others in the industry. And most recently in September of 2019, she was featured in Money Magazine. Outside of business, she enjoys fitness, tennis, coffee, vegan food and spending time with friends and family. Connect with Kelli: Website Instagram  Twitter Youtube  
4/15/202055 minutes, 1 second
Episode Artwork

Ep. 281 - You Can Do More Than You Think with Chris Guillebeau

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! So a few weeks ago, a package arrived at my house that looked like a book and I’m like “What is this? What did I buy that I forgot about?” and open it up, and it’s a paperback book that says “Advance Uncorrected Proof NOT FOR SALE” on the cover with a letter from New York Times Bestselling Author of The $100 Startup and Side Hustle Chris Guillebeau inviting me to read his latest book, The Money Tree all about a new pathway to self reliance and financial freedom. So my first thought was “I cannot wait to read this book because Chris’s books are life-changing.” My second thought was, “I’m gonna do whatever I can to help him promote this book because of everything he’s done for me.” Here’s the backstory: A few years ago I’d signed up for a service called HARO (Help a Reporter Out) and every day I’d get an email with queries from websites, blogs, news outlets, publications, etc. wanting to hear from experts on certain topics.  I’d scan the queries every day, and many times I’d find myself spending way too much time writing in-depth responses to these queries which would result in either nothing or a one-sentence mention and a link back to my website, which is fine for SEO, but what I was after was email list subscribers.  So just as I start to think that these HARO opportunities aren’t worth all the effort I’m putting into them, I see one asking about side hustles: successes, challenges, financials, all the things.  And I’m like, “Well shoot, my story fits perfectly with what they are asking for, I’ll go ahead and do this. Nothing is probably going to come of it anyway, but I’ll give it my best shot.” Come to find out, it’s for a new podcast by author Chris Guillebeau all about side hustles, and my story was going to be featured in Episode 30 all about how an “Ohio IT director earned more than $31,000 empowering others by providing them with the tools and resources they needed to set up their own websites.” That episode came out, and then I saw a surge in people signing up for my free DIY web design training and telling me on their intake form that they found me through Chris’s Side Hustle School Podcast - which if you’ve never listened to it, definitely go check it out the stories are FASCINATING. It’s https://sidehustleschool.com/ and I’ve linked it up in the shownotes. So I’m just like, blown away and so grateful for that opportunity, and it was an early clue that relationships with other people who serve a similar audience can be massively valuable in growing your own. And then, someone on Chris’s team reached out to me and said “Hey, we liked your story so much, we’d like to tell it in Chris’s upcoming book “Side Hustle” can we ask you some more questions about your story?” So of course I said yes, and then several months later, a copy arrived in my mailbox and I saw my name in print on page 72 of Side Hustle all about how I figured out who was the ideal customer for my free DIY Wordpress training.  I was blown away. And then I started hearing from people that they found me through Chris Guillebeau’s “Side Hustle” book. It was a pivotal moment for me. Not only because of all the new people who found me because of Chris - that’s amazing, and those people like Sal and Crystal and so many more have become some of my best customers, ambassadors and most active community members - but also because that’s when I discovered that there’s value beyond just what I teach. There’s value in my story of how I got here and what I had to overcome along the way. That experience was the catalyst for me starting this podcast, and sharing my story with you guys and sharing my income reports and taking you behind the scenes to inspire and motivate you to keep going, and that alone has opened up so many opportunities for me that I never could have imagined. And so when Chris’s latest book, The Money Tree, arrived in my inbox, it was the perfect excuse to reach out to him and invite him on the show and do whatever I can to get his latest book in the hands of as many people as possible. So, I don’t usually get nervous before interviewing guests on this show, but before this interview my hands were sweating, I was like, “This is Chris Guillebeau. He’s a big freaking deal. Marie Forleo gave acknowledgements for this book. I have to nail this interview.” And so right before we’re about to chat, I’m flipping through The Money Tree again to, I don’t know, pull out some quote that makes me sound like Oprah, and I see a quote that I highlighted the first time I read it that said “YOU CAN DO MORE THAN YOU THINK.” And in that moment I gave myself a little pep talk and I was like, “You got this Shannon. You don’t have to be anyone but yourself in this interview, and you can do more than you think.” So with that, I am, so, so excited to bring you today’s guest, Chris Guillebeau, New York Times bestselling author, host of the daily podcast that’s downloaded over two million times a month, Side Hustle School and now author of the must-read story about finding fortune in your own back yard, The Money Tree. Chris and I talk about: Chris’s journey from an entrepreneur to author. The #1 key to financial freedom. Chris’s advice for someone just out of college who wants to become an entrepreneur. The “third way” of entrepreneurship that’s low risk and high reward. This inspiration behind Chris’s new book, The Money Tree. Why making mistakes is critical to the entrepreneurial journey. Chris’s best advice for you if you’re struggling to grow your side hustle. The one belief Chris had to change about himself to get where he is today. My favorite quotes from Chris: “I began to understand how powerful entrepreneurship can be as a force for good and for creating positive change.” “I think there's so many possibilities these days... why would you do something that you're not excited about?” "’There is another way.’ That's my favorite phrase in the world.” Resources mentioned in this episode: moneytreebook.com https://chrisguillebeau.com/ Bio: Chris Guillebeau is the New York Times bestselling author of The $100 Startup, Side Hustle, The Happiness of Pursuit, and other books. During a lifetime of self-employment that included a four-year commitment as a volunteer executive in West Africa, he visited every country in the world (193 in total) before his 35th birthday. His daily podcast, Side Hustle School, is downloaded more than two million times a month. He is also the founder of the World Domination Summit, an event for cultural creatives that attracts thousands of attendees to Portland, Oregon every summer. Connect with Chris: Website: chrisguillebeau.com Instagram: @193countries Facebook:@chrisguillebeau Twitter: @chrisguillebeau
4/3/202055 minutes, 23 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 280 - Taking Home a Bigger Paycheck from your Side Hustle with Danielle Hayden

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Today’s interview with Danielle Hayden from Profit Planner is all about helping you take home a bigger paycheck from your side hustle is so timely for me, it’s kinda eerie! Danielle and I actually did our interview back in November of 2019 and it’s just now coming out because of my production schedule, and as I was pulling together the show notes for today, I’m like… “This is crazy that this interview with Danielle is even coming up right now about focusing on being profitable and keeping more of your money over growing.” And here’s why: Because my husband and I are on our second attempt at building a new house. And you might be thinking… “Um, thanks for sharing? But what does this have to do with me?” When you are self-employed, and you go to a bank to ask them for a loan, they want to see proof that your business actually makes money. Two years worth of proof to be exact. So about a year ago, my husband Floyd and I met with our lender to get preapproved for a construction loan. They asked for our 2018 tax return and my business profit and loss statements from 2017 and 2018. “Do you need my W2 from 2017 also?” I asked. “I had a day job and the business back then,” I offered. “No, since you don’t work there anymore it doesn’t matter,” said Bob. “Crap,” I thought. When I quit my day job in 2017 I was making $100,000 a year. And it wasn’t going to count. In 2017 my business had made $73,500 dollars in revenue, but… ...wait for it… $12,000 in profit. And no, this isn’t some creative accounting where I show minimal profit to avoid taxes. This was legit me spending $61,000 on business expenses: Pinterest experts. Facebook Ads. Online courses that promised to reveal the secret explode my business or teach me how to do Instagram. Virtual assistants and subcontractors to work on marketing strategies and projects that I didn’t need to be doing in the first place. Conferences and travel. Expensive software that I justified as being cheaper than hiring another VA but whose features I barely used. Branding. Rebranding. I could go on. It pains me to even tell you that. I’d honestly been avoiding looking at it until I started looking at the numbers to write a totally different blog post. But I have to tell you this part of the story, because while my business has always technically been profitable (it makes more money than it spends and has zero debt) and while I’ve been sharing with full transparency on this podcast my income AND expenses in 2018 and 2019, I’ve never told you what the money looked like for me in the earlier years. So let me rectify that right now: Bottom line: there’s absolutely no reason that I should have ever spent that much money on expenses in my business. It DOES NOT cost thousands upon thousands of dollars to market yourself and run your business online!!! Know how I know? If I went through every single expense in my business from 2015 - 2019, knowing what I believe NOW about what it takes market myself online and make money, I would have spent at least $100,000 LESS in business expenses. And I’m not just pulling that number out of thin air. No, I didn’t go through all my expenses line by line so that I could get in a time machine and see every dumb money decision I’ve ever made in my business… But I did calculate my average profit margin in my business from 2015 to 2018 to be 34% (meaning, on average I kept 34% of what I made BEFORE taxes). By contrast, my profit margin in 2019 was 71% (meaning I kept 71% of what I made BEFORE taxes). Had I kept 71% of what I made from 2015 to 2018, I would have kept close to an additional $100,000. Sigh. The proof is right there in black and white: I know how to make money. So why did I always think there was something more I needed to be doing or using or learning?  And why did I spend thousands and thousands of dollars trying to uncover it? The answer to that question took me WAY longer to figure out. Anyway, last year, long story short, we tried to get this construction loan but because of my profit in 2017 being only $12,000, they wanted us to put down a ginormous down payment to make it happen, and we weren’t willing to do it. So my husband tells our mortgage guy: “Looks like we’ll have to wait til next year when Shannon has two full-time years in the business behind her.” I felt so ashamed of myself at that moment that I didn’t bother to correct my husband. I couldn’t bring myself to say, “Oh yeah Floyd… about that… it wasn’t my full-time job that prevented me from keeping more than $12,000 of the $73,000 I made… it’s all the BS I believed about myself and what it takes to run a business online that caused me to spend a crap-ton of money on things I thought I needed but really didn’t need...” No, instead of telling the truth, I stuffed down my shame and put my nose to the grindstone, determined to work even harder this year and determined to keep more of the money I make. I slashed expenses, made more offers, and made and kept more money in 2019 than ever before. So right now, we’re in the midst of our second attempt to build this house. And as if his ears were burning as I was writing the intro for this podcast, Bob literally just called me to ask for a couple more documents, break down the numbers and let me know that we’re on track to close in three weeks if all the appraisals come back as he expects. “You had a great year in 2019, didn’t you?” he said. And I go, “Yeah, it’s pretty amazing what you can do when it’s your full-time I gig.” I literally just went with the lie, because I’m STILL ashamed to admit the truth - well, to everyone but you guys… To you guys, I’m like, “Oh, they need to hear this so they don’t do what I did. So that they’re vulnerable and lured by shiny objects like I was, and so that they value and trust themselves like I didn’t.” But to people close to me, I’m like “Oh, I don’t want them to know how bad I had no clue what I was doing…” Yes, I know it sounds crazy. Anyway. That’s why you need to hear from today’s guest, so that you can get a handle on the numbers in your business, make sure you’re PROFITABLE so that you can keep more of your money and give yourself a bigger paycheck. Danielle Hayden is a reformed corporate CFO (chief financial officer) who is on a mission to help rule-breaking female entrepreneurs understand their numbers so they can gain the confidence needed to create sustainable profits. After spending 10+ years in the board room as a corporate finance officer, Danielle is now in her sweet spot as the co-owner of Kickstart Accounting, Inc. where she helps business owners with bookkeeping, financial analysis, and education and as the author of the Profit Planner book series. Today we’re talking about: How Danielle can help you take home a bigger paycheck. Why she’s on a mission to help entrepreneurs overcome the fear of looking at their financials How to let go of the shame around numbers in our businesses. Exactly how Danielle and her partner got their very first clients. The three most important numbers to know in your business and how to use them to grow. Danielle’s best advice for you if you’re struggling to grow your side hustle. The one belief Danielle had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Danielle: “I want every entrepreneur to know that they deserve a CFO. They deserve to have bookkeeping. They need to know their numbers in order to grow their business.” “What built our business is talking to people and building relationships.” “Growing is not always the best. It is figuring out what is making you the most money and honing in on that. So at the end of the day you want to be profitable.” “Figure out what's working, what isn't working, learn from it and then try something else because that's what entrepreneurship is.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Profit Planner: Use code peptalks for 15% off Kickstart Accounting profitplannerbookkeeping.com/peptalks Bio: Danielle Hayden is a reformed corporate CFO (chief financial officer) who is on a mission to help rule-breaking female entrepreneurs understand their numbers so they can gain the confidence needed to create sustainable profits. After spending 10+ years in the board room as a corporate finance officer, Danielle is now in her sweet spot as the co-owner of Kickstart Accounting, Inc. where she helps business owners with bookkeeping, financial analysis, and education and as the author of the Profit Planner book series. When Danielle isn’t crunching numbers on her clients’ behalf or crafting the next iteration of the Profit Planner, you can find her hanging with her two kids as she inspires them to lead their fullest lives or doing any, and almost every fitness-related activity ranging from Spartan races to pilates. Connect with Danielle: Profit Planner Website Instagram @kickstartaccounting Instagram @daniellehayden_oh Facebook  
4/1/20201 hour, 8 minutes, 45 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 279 - February 2020 Income Report

Find out how much money I made in February 2020 and exactly how I made it, what my expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review!
3/25/202045 minutes, 55 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 278 - Redefining Motherhood and Business with Pinterest Marketing Expert Monica Froese

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! I met today’s guest very early on in my business journey when we were both members of One Woman Shop, and not only was I blown away by what she’s created over the past 5 years and the advice she is giving you guys in today’s episode… but I also left our conversation feeling more emboldened to stand up for things that I believe in that I’ve tended to shy away from in the past - and I hope you can take away a piece of that from our conversation today too. Monica Froese is a professional blogger and Pinterest marketing expert. She has an MBA in finance and marketing and blogs at Redefining Mom, a site for helping women thrive in motherhood and business.  She provides online marketing education to small businesses that are looking to build a profitable revenue stream through effective sales funnels and Pinterest ads. Today we’re talking about: Monica’s journey from starting a working-mom blog to getting invited to the White House. The turning point in her life that led Monica to put in her full effort and create a business that could replace her corporate salary. The importance of commitment, focus and action. Why blogging is not creating content - and what it really is. Monica’s perspective on mom-guilt and being a working mother. The financial possibilities that come with getting out from under the corporate pay ceiling. Monica’s revenue streams and how she manages her two businesses. Why you don’t need to be doing 1:1 client work first to be successful in teaching. Monica’s advice for someone who is struggling to get traction in their business. The one belief Monica had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Monica: “The President just asked me what I'm doing to make a difference. And really not a whole lot besides just venting on my blog. So how do I make a difference? And that was the turning point for this business.” “I am going to make this into something. I'm not going to squander this opportunity.” “I don't expect anyone to come in and give me some sort of ironclad roadmap to make this work because it doesn't exist.” “That load of laundry is literally costing us hundreds of dollars if I do it. I know what my time's worth and it's worth a heck of a lot more than doing a load of laundry.” “I refuse to have mom guilt. Mom guilt is not in my vocabulary so I actually have no qualms telling my seven-year-old, ‘Hey this is Mommy's work time and you will get my undivided attention when work time is over.’" “The basics for a (Pinterest) ad strategy are also the basics for an organic strategy. At the end of the day, Pinterest is keywords and clickable images and if you get those two things down, you're going to be rolling on both sides of the house." “It's not supposed to feel easy or even great in the beginning. You just have to keep showing up every day. Consistency is key." Bio: Monica is a professional blogger and Pinterest marketing expert. She has an MBA degree in finance and marketing and blogs at Redefining Mom, a site for helping women thrive in motherhood and business.  She spent 11 years working for a Fortune 100 company running multi-million dollar marketing campaigns with large brands like Microsoft, HP, and Cisco. Now, she provides online marketing education to small businesses that are looking to build a profitable revenue stream through effective sales funnels and Pinterest ads. Connect with Monica: Redefining Mom Website Pinterest Instagram Facebook Youtube
3/18/20201 hour, 2 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 277 - Growing a Product-Based Side Hustle with Katie Hunt of Proof to Product

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! I’m completely fascinated by what today’s guest is sharing because it’s a topic I’ve always been curious about - but have zero experience or knowledge in - and that’s how to create a product-based business. I mean, back in my web designer days I built my share of e-commerce websites for product-based businesses using WooCommerce and Shopify, but the business side of things, like going from product concept all the way to having your product on the shelf at Target or for sale on your website? Yeah, no clue. So that’s why today I’m so excited to bring you Katie Hunt, founder of Proof to Product. Katie is a business strategist, and mentor to product-based entrepreneurs.  She’s worked with thousands of entrepreneurs through her in-person conferences and online courses she offers. Katie is also the host of the popular podcast, Proof to Product, where she takes listeners behind the scenes of growing a product-based business.  Guests share their successes, struggles and how they’ve made difficult but important transitions in their business to continue growing. Katie has taught classes for CreativeLive, The National Stationery Show, and The Savvy Experience, and she’s been featured on two of my favorite leisure-reading websites - BuzzFeed, Brit & Co, and also interviewed on a variety of popular podcasts. Whether you have a product-based business or not, you’re not gonna want to miss today’s episode. And if you know someone who is a maker, maybe they have an Etsy shop and dream of seeing their notecards on the shelf at Anthropologie, send them a link to this episode (shannonmattern.com/277). They’ll thank you for it later. Today we’re talking about: Katie’s journey from starting a side-hustle stationary company to helping makers get their products on the shelves of retail shops. How a guest blog post about doing tradeshows transformed Katie’s business. The most common mistakes product business owners make when they are first starting out. How Katie built a business around what she wished she would have known early on in her journey. Parallels Katie sees between product-based businesses and service-based businesses. How to figure out your “enough” and why knowing it is so important. Why it’s so important to know the WHY behind starting your business. Why it’s actually a good thing that not everything is going to be a home run. How Katie built her team and how she runs it. How burnout happens (and what to do about it). The online training tool everyone should be using (even if you don’t have a team yet). Why your audience is critical to the success of your business. The one belief Katie had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Katie: “I just want to support female entrepreneurs that are trying to do their thing.” “There's no easy button in business, but at the same time there are people that have been through it before that can lend their advice and expertise and struggles and successes as well to help you.” “Test the market before you dive head in.” “Money is important, but it’s not everything I’m seeking. Our definitions of success shift as we gain more experience in business.” “Systems and processes are truly what make a business run.” Resources mentioned in this episode: www.loom.com https://www.prooftoproduct.com/ https://www.prooftoproduct.com/podcast Bio: Katie Hunt is the founder of Proof to Product (formerly known as Tradeshow Bootcamp), a business strategist, and mentor to product-based entrepreneurs. She’s worked with thousands of entrepreneurs through her in-person conferences and online courses she offers.   Katie is also the host of the popular podcast, Proof to Product, where she takes listeners behind the scenes of growing a product-based business. Guests share their successes, struggles and how they’ve made difficult but important transitions in their business to continue growing.   Katie has taught classes for CreativeLive, The National Stationery Show, The Savvy Experience, Be Sage, Seanwes Conference and Unique Camp. She’s been featured on BuzzFeed, Brit & Co, and VoyageLA and also interviewed on a variety of popular podcasts.   Katie has a passion for creating, a mind for business and a strong desire to help others succeed. When she’s not cheering on her clients or dreaming up new workshops, you can find her spending time with her husband and four young children, hosting friends for dinner, or surfing Instagram. Connect with Katie: Proof to Product Website  Instagram Facebook
3/11/202054 minutes, 40 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 276 - Using Facebook Live to Grow Your Side Hustle with Caylie Price

My guest today is Caylie Price, owner of Better Business Better Life where she teaches how to bring tons of clients into your business and actually be profitable without burning yourself out. Caylie teaches high-impact, no-cost Facebook strategies that help you build your confidence, clients and cash. Every time I talk to Caylie, I’m like, “I know, I know. I need to add livestreaming to my arsenal.” And then I don’t do it. Because I put too much pressure on myself to be good at it. But what I love about Caylie’s perspective is that being “good at it” is not required. In fact, it can have the opposite effect of what you’re going for. And I’m so excited to have Caylie on the show today because as much as I’m fascinated by my guests who have massively scaled their businesses into the multiple six and seven figures with paid ads, most of us aren’t there yet. We’re still organically building our audiences, figuring out how to find them online and what resonates and what doesn’t, aligning how we describe our solutions with how they describe their problems. Most of us don’t either have the money or the capacity for financial risk to use paid advertising to speed that process along, and that’s what Caylie’s here to share with you today - how you can use Facebook in a way to get more organic reach, build your audience, build a rapport, build trust and get clients. Cayle and I are talking about: How Caylie got started as a business coach in the online space. Why Caylie chooses to keep her business as a profitable side hustle. How Caylie structures her day and manages her time. Why planning is so much more than just being organized, and why it’s critical to your success. Why you should be live-streaming on social media in 2020 (even if no one is watching you live). How to figure out what to talk about on your live-streams. The real purpose of live-streaming (it’s not what you might think)! How to prepare to go live. How to use live-streaming as market-research. Caylie’s advice for someone who is struggling to get traction in growing their own business. The belief Caylie had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Caylie: “If you're going to put in the effort to create a piece of content, why not use the method (live-streaming) that Facebook says ‘hey, we're going to reward you for doing this,’ and get the results: get more people on your email list, build that relationship faster and get more sales.” “Being able to talk to and connect with my audience is so powerful.” “People connect with me because I'm approachable. Because I haven't got that formal air and a barrier up to connecting with me.” “You are awesome as you are. There's no reason to try and be someone other than who you are." “Take action and keeping going because you will get there.” “It's not failure, it's learning, it's feedback and it will get you closer to success every time.” Resources mentioned in this episode: How to get more clients from social media without increasing your workload Bio: Caylie Price is the owner of Better Business Better Life. She teaches you how to bring tonnes of clients into your business and actually be profitable, without throwing yourself under the exhaustion bus. Recognised as a leader in her field, Caylie teaches high-impact, no-cost Facebook strategies that explode entrepreneur and business owner confidence, clients and cash. Her clients consistently use Facebook Live to sell everything from $4 affiliate products through to $997+ digital programs and services. In just a few short years, Caylie has grown her business to achieve $20k months and lifestyle freedom. She regularly travels to international conferences to ensure her knowledge remains cutting edge as well as travelling interstate between her home in Newcastle and family in Victoria. All this while ensuring her clients successfully grow their income and profitability. Connect with Caylie: Website: betterbusinessbetterlife.com.au Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/betterbusinessbetterlife  
3/4/202054 minutes, 58 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 275 - January 2020 Income Report

Find out how much money I made in January 2020 and exactly how I made it, what my expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way! Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review!
2/26/202055 minutes, 19 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 274 - Trusting Your Intuition in Your Side Hustle with Jenna Irvin

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Jenna Irvin, a young entrepreneur who leads with intuition, uses fear as fuel to grow, and believes that failure is our greatest teacher.  Jenna opened her first business at the age of 21, in a town she had only been to once, and doubled her investment in just ten months funding the purchase of her current business in Hilton Head Island.   My conversation with Jenna was so enlightening for me because at age 23 she taps into her intuition and trusts her gut in a way that I’m still trying to figure out at 40.  Her sense of self, her love for herself and her money mindset are super-inspiring! Jenna and I talk about: Her journey to owning her own Pure Barre studio at 23. How Jenna was able to build up the business to the point where it was worth double her investment. Why she also became a coach and writer. The importance of cultivating deep connections. Why what you think about yourself matters in business. Her best advice for someone who wants to launch a business and is brand new to the business world. Why waiting for the perfect moment is hurting you. Jenna’s experience with hiring her first employees and what she learned. Jenna’s tips for how to listen to your gut and get in tune with your intuition. Jenna’s advice if you are wanting to start a business but are afraid of the first steps. The one belief Jenna had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Jenna: “I realized that so much of the struggle that we feel is universal. Like the insecurity, all of that is felt by so many.” “I don't need to be any different to be worthy of the kind of love that I want to be worthy of, the kind of life that I want“ “We get so wrapped up in what the world is saying that it takes us out of tune with our hearts and when we're out of tune with that, we're not able to live a life that's in alignment” “Trust yourself more than you think that you should because you have more in your heart than you know” “My dad always told us to never look back and say, I wish I would have” “We don't always know what, what the end's going to look like. In fact, I don't think we ever do, but it's gonna lead you somewhere. It's gonna teach you something, it's not going to be for nothing. And I think that that's what you can rest into because there's never going to be certainty in anything else. So you kind of have to find your comfort in that” “I approach failure in a different way because it's just my greatest teacher. It's my opportunity to grow. And it's like, okay, well this didn't work, so here's the space to do it again and do it differently” Bio: Jenna is a young entrepreneur who dreams as naturally as she breathes. She opened her first business at the age of 21, in a town she had only been to once, and doubled her investment in just ten months funding the purchase of her current business in Hilton Head Island. As both a Pure Barre owner and coach, Jenna leads with intuition, uses fear as fuel to grow, and believes that failure is our greatest teacher. She feels the most alive and connected to her why when she is holding space for others to step into all that they are. Connect with Jenna: Instagram: @jennairvin Website: https://www.jstandingtall.com/
2/19/20201 hour, 2 minutes, 18 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 273 - Using Your 9-5 to Set Yourself Up for Side Hustle Success with Sasha Korobov

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Sasha Korobov, a career and success strategist who helps women all over the world get careers they love and smash their goals. She’s also the host of the EntrepreNotYet podcast all about surviving your 9-5 while building an online business. Sasha’s all about debunking bad career and business advice “for ladies” that make our heads spin with contradiction. You know, stuff like: “Know your worth!... but you should probably cozy up to a dude who can open doors for you.” “Don’t be afraid to speak up in your career or business!... but please pipe down if it makes others uncomfortable.” And my favorite, “You better ask for permission before you do that…” Sasha and I talk about: Sasha’s journey to becoming a career strategist for women. Why you don’t need to be an expert (and what to do instead). What failing can really do for you. The most common beliefs Sasha’s clients have that hold them back. How to create opportunities to do things you're passionate about that also help your side hustle The importance of work/life boundaries The real benefits of focusing on one thing at a time. Strategies to manage shiny object syndrome Sasha’s best advice for you if you’re struggling to grow your side hustle. The one belief Sasha had to change about herself to get where she is today. Click here to get your hands on Sasha’s “5 hacks to make your day job better, even if you can’t quit yet.” My favorite quotes from Sasha: “You test, you tweak, you do. Action.” “Practice the art of stopping asking for permission for every little thing.” “It's okay if you tried something and it didn't work for you, it's okay to get tired. It's okay to admit that this is hard stuff, but that doesn't mean that you quit.” “Prioritize the stuff that's actually going to have you grow in your business.” “Everybody should be chasing something that they love.” “Minimize things that are going to take your eye off the ball.” Resources mentioned in this episode: 5 hacks to make your day job better, even if you can’t quit yet. Bio: Sasha Korobov is a certified coach and success strategist who helps women all over the world get careers they love and smash their goals.  When she’s not working with her amazing clients, Sasha is awkwardly learning the ropes of being an American expat in England, hanging out with her cats and her husband, or rocking a nearby Zumba class. Connect with Sasha: Website: sashakorobov.com Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/groups/675652509608251/?source_id=116654609713651 Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/sashakorobovbiz/  
2/12/202052 minutes, 37 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 272 - How To Go From Employee to Entrepreneur with Luisa Zhou

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! “Are you going to let your fears be bigger than your dreams, or are you going to go for what you want?” My guest today is Luisa Zhou, founder of LuisaZhou.com, and creator of the Employee to Entrepreneur system, which teaches people how to leave their day job and start their own six-figure plus business working for themselves.  She’s helped thousands of students, including health and business coaches, designers, copywriters, and consultants, to launch their own businesses that generate anywhere from 30K to 100K in less than a year. Her advice has been featured in numerous online and print publications including Forbes, Inc, Entrepreneur, Success magazine, and more. Two words come to mind when I think about Luisa after getting the opportunity to talk to her for a whole hour: GENUINE and GENEROUS. Because today she’s gonna share with you every detail about how she grew her business from nothing to multiple millions of dollars. And when I say every last detail, I mean EVERY. LAST. DETAIL.  This isn’t one of those stories that you’re going to hear and think, “That’s very inspiring, but I can’t relate. I don’t see myself in that story.”  It’s going to be one of those stories that you hear and think, “That’s me, right now. She’s been where I am right now, and look what she’s accomplished. If she can do it, so can I.” Because Luisa has made every stop on the entrepreneurial journey. Every single one. And no matter where you are on your journey, you’ll see yourself in her story. Luisa and I talk about: What Luisa’s business looked like when she first started vs. what it looks like today, and exactly how she got here. Why she gave away her advice for free in the early stages of her business. How she got her first clients. Why Luisa believes in overdelivering. What to have in place in your business before you even consider paid traffic. Exactly how Luisa scaled her business from six figures to seven figures. How Luisa landed huge opportunities for exposure like Business Insider, Forbes + speaking at the Gary Vee Experience (even while identifying as an introvert). What happened when Luisa put in her notice at her day job. How Luisa guides people from employee to entrepreneur. The one question to ask to find out if your business idea is profitable. How Luisa changed her beliefs about money and value to reach the level she’s at today. Other beliefs Luisa had to change about herself to get where she is today. Before we dive into today’s episode, I want to tell you about a free, on-demand masterclass that I know you’re definitely going to want to sign up for after you listen to this interview.  It’s called the “Step-by-step Employee to Entrepreneur system to build your coaching business and replace your salary BEFORE you leave your 9-5.” *Grab your seat here >> My favorite quotes from Luisa: “If something is working, do more of it.” “What more can I do that is going to be directly growing my business?” “I found this thing, it works, I’m just going to keep doing it.” “Why not now, what are you waiting for?” “How can I do it more and better?” “The power of focus, the power of optimizing something that works and scaling it?” “Are you going to let your fears be bigger than your dreams or are you going to go for what you want?” “You’re only going to grow if you do things that make you uncomfortable.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Luisa’s free, on-demand masterclass*: “Step-by-step Employee to Entrepreneur system to build your coaching business and replace your salary BEFORE you leave your 9-5” Luisa’s* “15-Second Script that Gets You Your First 3 Coaching Clients (even if you're just starting out)” Luisa’s “9-5 Escape Velocity” Plan Bio: Luisa Zhou is the creator of the Employee to Entrepreneur system, which teaches people how to leave their day job and start their own six-figure plus business working for themselves. She’s helped thousands of students, including health and business coaches, designers, copywriters, and consultants, to launch their own businesses that generate anywhere from 30K to 100K in less than a year. Her advice has been featured in numerous online and print publications including Forbes, Inc, Entrepreneur, Success magazine, and more. Connect with Luisa: Website: luisazhou.com Instagram: instagram.com/luisa.zhou Facebook: facebook.com/luisazhoulive
2/5/20201 hour, 4 minutes, 18 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 271 - December Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Find out how much money I made in December 2019 and exactly how I made it, what my expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way!
1/29/20201 hour, 7 minutes, 12 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 270 - Make More Money in Your Virtual Assistant Side Hustle with Kathy Goughenour

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! I learn something amazing from every single guest I have on this podcast… but every now and again I have a guest on the show that blows my mind, and today’s episode is another one of those transformative, mind-shifting, belief-changing ones that make me love doing this podcast and fundamentally shift how I’m doing things in my business. My guest today is super passionate about training women to be the superheros of their own success. After finding the courage to say "bye-bye" to her corporate marketing career, Kathy Goughenour built a 6-figure virtual assistant business from her tiny house in the middle of a forest. Today, she teaches professional women how to create their own work-at-home VA businesses so they can enjoy the freedom, flexibility and financial security they desire and deserve. Kathy also offers VA Matchmaking sessions to business owners interested in working with Expert VAs® and Virtual Experts®. Kathy and her Expert VA® and Virtual Expert® Training program have been featured in Forbes, The Huffington Post, Good Housekeeping, All You, and The Wealthy Freelancer. Today we’re talking about: Kathy’s journey to become a coach for virtual experts. The realization Kathy came to when she felt her career was at a standstill. How Kathy’s unsolicited marketing advice turned into her first client as a virtual assistant. The importance of taking imperfect action. Why Kathy decided to hire a coach and the best advice she got. Why you should be raising your prices. The #1 key to being successful in your business. Her best advice for you if you want to sell a course. Why you should specialize. How your money mindset can hold back your profit. What Kathy started doing differently to achieve her profit goals. Why your website does not have to be perfect for you to be massively successful. Her best advice for you if you’re struggling to get traction in your business. The one belief Kathy had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Kathy: “Once you learn how to build this (VA business) you can learn how to build any business you want” “I’m passionate about training women to be the superheros of their own success.” “I am somebody worthwhile and we all are.” “The universe provides more than we can ever handle if we can open our minds and our hearts to that.” “Take bigger risks.” “Stop playing small. The universe needs you.” “Hang out and learn from coaches who have been where you want to go.” “Believe in myself enough to invest that money even though I did not have that money.” “Get way out of your comfort zone.” “What one woman can do, another woman can do.” “Know that you are worthy.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Ryan Levesque Jennifer Kim Forbes Article: Start A Business. Save Your Life -- Like This Million-Dollar Entrepreneur Top 5 Biggest Mistakes New Virtual Assistants Make Bio: After finding the courage to say "bye-bye" to her corporate marketing career, Kathy Goughenour built a 6-figure virtual assistant business from her tiny house in the middle of a forest. Today, she teaches professional women how to create their own work-at-home VA businesses so they can enjoy the freedom, flexibility and financial security they desire and deserve. Kathy also offers VA Matchmaking sessions to business owners interested in working with Expert VAs® and Virtual Experts®. Kathy and her Expert VA® and Virtual Expert® Training program have been featured in Forbes, The Huffington Post, Good Housekeeping, All You, and The Wealthy Freelancer. Connect with Kathy: Website: virtualexperttraining.com, https://expertvatraining.com/ Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/groups/expertvacommunity/
1/22/20201 hour, 7 minutes, 27 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 269 - Outsourcing to Scale Your Side Hustle with Nathan Hirsch of Freeeup.com

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Before I introduce you to today’s guest and why what he does is something you’ll want to pay attention to if you want to replace your day job income before you quit, I want to share why I think what he does is so important. So if you’ve listened to this podcast for any amount of time, you know that my story in a nutshell is that at 35 years old, I found myself sitting in my beige, windowless office at my day job basically having a panic attack about having to do that same day over and over and over again for the rest of my life, feeling super guilty for not being appreciative of living out the American dream of good grades in high school, graduating from college and working my way up the corporate ladder to a job with great salary and benefits. So I decided to start my own freelance web design business as a side hustle, quickly burnt myself out because I wasn’t charging enough and there was no way I’d have enough free time outside my day job to replace my income (and there way no way I was gonna leave my salary behind). So I pivoted to teaching entrepreneurs how to DIY and earning revenue from affiliate marketing, and then people starting asked me to build their websites for them… And with some help from my business coach I decided to say yes, and then over the next three of years I side hustled, earning my money from a mix of affiliates, courses and 1:1 web design services, started making enough money every month to replace my salary and cover business expenses and taxes, and I was able to quit my day job without taking a pay cut. What I don’t talk about too often is that I didn’t do it all on my own. About one year in, I finally hired a virtual assistant. About 6 months in, I’d tried to hire one… I’d been listening to all these online business podcasts that talked about outsourcing, and how fantastic and amazing it is to hire VA’s from the Phillipines because the cost of living is so low there compared to the US that at the time you could pay $250 a week for a 40/hour a week virtual assistant. So I tried that, and it just wasn’t a good fit for me - for several reasons, all of which are my fault, by the way. One, I had to be way more organized than I was to be able to outsource to people and at the time, I was totally winging it and putting out fires every single day. Two, there’s a significant time difference between the Phillipines + where I live and so it took longer to get things turned around once I delegated it when I was worked to when they saw it when they were working, asked me questions that I’d answer when I was working and they’d see the answer when they were working and now two days have gone by and they haven’t even started… so I’d end up just doing it myself. And there were a few communication issues, again, on my end because I’m super wordy talk too fast. And I didn’t have 40 hours of work to give them, but they were looking for something full time for one person. So that whole thing did not work out for me… And then I was introduced to a company that unfortunately is now closed, but it was basically a boutique VA agency for female entrepreneurs, based in the US. I was assigned an account manager, I would give her the tasks + instructions and she made sure the person on their team with that expertise knew what to do and got the work done. I paid $600 for 15 hours a MONTH (as compared to $600 for 40 hours a week) but it was well worth it to me. My business could afford the expense because I wasn’t even paying myself a paycheck at all - at the time I was investing everything I made back into the business.  They were able to manage my inbox and my facebook groups while I was at work, post and format my blog posts, set my weekly newsletter and they even were around at the beginning of Pep Talks for Side Hustlers and published the podcast for me. So when I quit my day job and I actually started paying myself a paycheck, I went looking for ways to reduce my expenses, and they raised their prices, and I could no longer justify to pay that much for 15 hours a month and I took back all the work into my business myself, and then the person who I was contracting with as a project manager on my web design projects wanted more hours so I gave the work to her, and that’s what we still do today and all is right with the world. What I want you to know is that I didn’t do it alone then, and I’m not doing it alone now. So if you’re listening to this and you’re thinking, yeah, the whole outsourcing to another country thing doesn’t sound right for me, and the whole paying $600 for 15 hours a month thing also doesn’t sound right to me, and I’m not sure I need a dedicated team member right now - but I know that if I’m really gonna grow I need to get these things off my plate, but how do I find the right person - then I’m super excited to introduce you to today’s guest, Nathan Hirsch of Freeeup.com* - where you can hire affordable, pre-vetted freelancers with no signup fees, no minimums so that you can get more done faster. Nathan is a 30-year-old serial entrepreneur who built his first company to over twenty million in sales using virtual assistants and freelancers. He created FreeeUp.com* to address the frustrations he had with finding the right freelancers to help him grow his business. Today we’re talking about: How Nathan competed with the college bookstore as a side hustle. How he used virtual assistants and freelancers to grow his Amazon store to over 20 million in sales. What his hiring experience was like when he was first hiring employees as a new entrepreneur. Nathan’s “Top 1%” philosophy The number one thing you must commit to for a great hiring experience. How to get ready for your first hire. The three types of hires and how to choose the right one for you. Why Nathan chooses to grow his business organically, without relying on paid ads, and how he does it. Nathan’s advice for someone who is struggling to grow their business The one belief Nathan had to change about himself to get where he is today. My favorite quotes from Nathan: “Instead of trying to turn every weakness into a strength, I hire an expert who already has success with it, already has systems for it, to come in and execute it. ” “Figure out what type of people you are working with and work with them the right way.” “Focus on low risk, high reward situations.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Freeeup.com* Bio: Nathan Hirsch is a 30-year-old serial entrepreneur and expert in remote hiring and eCommerce. He started his first eCommerce business out of his college dorm room and has sold over $30 million online. He is now the co-founder and CEO of FreeeUp.com, a marketplace that connects businesses with pre-vetted virtual assistants, freelancers and agencies in eCommerce, digital marketing, and much more. He regularly appears on leading podcasts, such as Entrepreneur on Fire, and speaks at live events about online hiring tactics. Nathan built his first company (Amazon business) to over twenty million in sales using virtual assistants and freelancers.  “I always wanted a faster way to find talent, I hated browsing through 50 applicants every-time I posted a job on the other marketplaces. I built FreeeUp to address the frustrations I had. FreeeUp receives thousands of freelancer applicants each week to join the marketplace. We interview and vet them, take the top 1% (based on skill, attitude and communication), and make them available to our clients quickly whenever they need them.” Connect with Nathan: Website: freeeup.com Facebook: Outsourcing Masters Facebook Group Podcast: Outsourcing and Scaling with Nathan Hirsch Nathan on The Entrepreneur On Fire Podcast: https://www.eofire.com/podcast/nathanhirsch/ Nathan on The Mixergy Podcast: https://mixergy.com/interviews/freeeup-with-nathan-hirsch/ Nathan on The Eventual Millionaire Podcast: https://eventualmillionaire.com/nathanhirsch/
1/15/202040 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 268 - Creating a Successful Side Hustle as an Introvert with Billie Gardner

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today teaches creative introverts how to become virtual assistants and earn an income from home. Billie Gardner is the founder of Desire to Done and the Introvert VA Club, a membership site for introverted virtual assistants. Billie’s been a member of my community for awhile, and then one day I got this email from her where she writes: “Hey Shannon, So I'm doing a live challenge in my membership the Introvert VA Club called "Do One Thing That Scares You Every Day". It's for 30 days and we're on day #11. One of the things I'm scared about is visibility. Since I'm an introvert I tend to shy away from attention but I'm trying to work on it! I know that putting myself out there more is going to help more people achieve their dreams. Which brings me to your podcast. I've been a big fan of yours since we met and was wondering if you're looking for interviewees. Off the top of my head I can talk about the challenge, how I help creative introverts, mindset stuff (love it), and how I "burned da bitch down". (I got rid of my ebooks and a big client to focus on my membership site. Totally scary at first, completely freeing afterward.) Let me know if you're interested and if there's a way I can help support you!” And of course it’s a yes, and not just because she’s a member of my community but because her pitch was all about how she can provide value to my listeners and not all about how awesome she is. I mean, you’ll find out for yourself how awesome she is when you listen, but the key takeaway for you if you want to land guest opportunities of any kind, or even if you want to get people to buy from you for that matter, is that it’s never about you. It’s always about them. Today we’re talking about: How Billie got her first virtual assistant client. Tips for getting VA clients when you are just starting out. Advice for how to let go of clients when you no longer are taking 1:1 work. How to make discovery calls with potential clients less scary. How Billie structures her day. A strategy for getting yourself to do something that scares you. Billie’s advice for an introvert who is thinking about starting their own business. The belief Billie had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Billie: “Follow your heart and follow your gut, wherever it takes you.” “If you’re going to grow you have to get uncomfortable and with practice it becomes easier. Give it a shot and keep trying.” “Just take it one step at a time, everyone is scared.” “Keep going keep showing up consistently.” “Building a business takes time and takes energy. Just keep doing it” Resources mentioned in this episode: Billie’s Freebie: https://desiretodone.com/va-services Membership: https://introvertvaclub.com/ Bio: Billie teaches creative introverts how to become virtual assistants and earn an income from home. She's the founder of Desire to Done and the Introvert VA Club, a membership site for introverted virtual assistants. Connect with Billie: Website: https://desiretodone.com/ Freebie: https://desiretodone.com/va-services Membership: https://introvertvaclub.com/ Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/desiretodone/ Facebook:https://www.facebook.com/desiretodone/ Pinterest:https://www.pinterest.com/desiretodone/boards/
1/8/202053 minutes, 25 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 267 - 2019 Year In Review + 2020 Goals

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review!
1/1/20201 hour, 1 minute, 22 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 266 - Top 10 Podcasts of 2019 - The Beliefs These 10 Successful Entrepreneurs Had to Change About Themselves to Get Where They Are Today

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! The top 10 Podcast episodes of 2019 and a review of the beliefs these successful entrepreneurs had to change about themselves to get where they are today.
12/26/201939 minutes, 49 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 265 - November Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Find out how much money I made in November 2019 and exactly how I made it, what my expenses looked like and lessons learned along the way!
12/23/201942 minutes, 57 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 264 - Building + Monetizing a Niche Food Blog with Rory Balkin of Donut Digest

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! If you’ve ever wondered how to start a blog from zero, you’re not gonna want to miss today’s episode.  I’m so excited to have Rory Balkin on the podcast because she’s sharing some fantastic advice about how to a niche that you’re super passionate about, start from zero, and turn it into a profitable side hustle. Rory Balkin is a self-proclaimed donut enthusiast and founder of Donut Digest.  I’m not entirely sure how Rory and I connected - but considering that she’s from Texas I can only think that it has to be through the Thrive conference that I’ve spoken at a couple of times.  Which, by the way, if you’re a blogger or you’re thinking about blogging, you need to put this conference on your radar - it’s happening in Houston in April of 2020, and you can go to https://thrivetogether.blog/ and get on the email list to make sure you’re first to know when tickets go on sale because it’s an amazing conference. Anyway, I started to connect with Rory on a deeper level when she joined my free 5 Day Freebie Challenge so that she could create a shareworthy freebie to help her grow her email list - which you’ll find out during our interview why having an email list for her niche donut blog is so, so important. So let’s dive into my interview with Rory Balkin all about how to build and monetize a niche food blog. Today we’re talking about: Why Rory started a blog about donuts and how she built an audience from scratch. Rory’s tactics for getting traction on Instagram. Why Rory created the Dallas Donutfest, and the exact steps she and her partner took to bring it from idea to life. How to build buzz + excitement for anything that you’re about to launch. Why connecting with your audience consistently is so important! How Rory monetized her love of donuts beyond blogging and the food festival. Her best strategy for being more productive. How Rory manages a newborn, a day job a blog and the donut festival. Rory’s advice for someone who is thinking about starting a blog. The belief Rory had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Rory: “I want to make something of this business, and you really have to connect with people in real life, have that human connection, to make something of it!” On starting her blog: “I don’t know what I’m doing, I just love donuts!” “Relationships are super important.” “I always want to help people.” “It’s all about pulling out the unique and interesting stories from each place.” “You learn as you go.” “You just have to start, learn from those that are a little bit ahead of you, and then start to build those connections to forge those partnerships, create those events, whatever it is that can grow your following.” “You’re not alone if you get stuck somewhere.” “There are risks in business every single day. You have to put yourself out of your comfort zone.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Trello Butler County Donut Trail Free email course on "5 Ways to Attract More Customers to Your Shop” Donut Digest Website: https://www.donutdigest.com/ Dallas Donut Fest: www.dallasdonutfest.com Bio: Rory is a self-proclaimed donut enthusiast and founder of Donut Digest. Since 2016, she's offered donut guides, interviews, downloads and more to the Dallas-Fort Worth community.  In 2018, Rory expanded her services as a marketing consultant for several donut shops and hosted community events throughout the metroplex.  In 2019, Rory joined forces with fellow blogger @brandondoesdallas to create the first-annual Dallas Donut Fest. In her free time she enjoys walking her rescue pup, Winston, and cheering on the Philadelphia Eagles. Connect with Rory: Website: donutdigest.com Instagram: @donutdigest
12/18/20191 hour, 3 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 263 - How to Start a Side Hustle on Etsy with Lauren Keplinger

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Lauren Keplinger of CreativeMomBoss.com where she helps Etsy sellers get the consistent sales they dream of. Lauren started her Etsy shop, Funky Monkey Children, in 2012, and built it to a six figure business with over $170,000 in annual revenue.  She blog and podcasts about selling on Etsy over at Creative Mom Boss and her digital program, Etsy Roadmap to Success teaches Etsy shop owners to take their shop from that inconsistent side hustle to a consistent income they can depend on. Today we’re talking about: How Lauren started her side hustle selling on Etsy. What Lauren did to scale her business when she maxed out her time and income. How to find success in a saturated market. Common misconceptions of the “work from home” dream. How Lauren got her husband on board with her business. The one thing that will determine your results above all others. How Etsy sellers can better market their shop and get better traffic to their shops. Why it’s not too late for you to start your Etsy shop. What a typical day looks like for Lauren. Her best advice for you if you’re struggling to get traction in your side hustle. The one belief Lauren had to change about herself to get where she is today. Lauren shares so much good advice whether, so whether you’re an Etsy seller or you sell digital products or group programs or one-on-one services, her advice applies to all of it! My favorite quotes from Lauren: “What I’m providing is valuable beyond the finished product.” “Ask yourself, ‘What is moving the needle forward, what is getting you results?’ and do more of that.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Pat Flynn Creative Mom Boss Starter Kit Bio: Lauren Keplinger is an Etsy seller and coach for like minded Etsy entrepreneurs. She started her shop, Funky Monkey Children, in 2012, and built it to a six figure business with over $170,000 in annual revenue. She blog and podcasts about selling on Etsy over at Creative Mom Boss and her digital program, Etsy Roadmap to Success teaches Etsy shop owners to take their shop from that inconsistent side hustle to a consistent income they can depend on. Connect with Lauren: Website: https://www.creativemomboss.com/ Podcast: Crickets to Cha-Chings Etsy: https://www.etsy.com/shop/funkymonkeychildren Instagram: https://instagram.com/creativemomboss
12/11/201958 minutes, 54 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 262 - Passive Income for Health Professionals with Sylvie McCracken

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Today’s guest helps health and wellness entrepreneurs who have gone off-course get refueled and back on track by teaching them to run their business like a well-oiled machine. Sylvie McCracken started her first online business in the nutrition and health space and was able to replace her six-figure salary in just 18 months - and now she’s grown her business to seven figures. Now, she teaches healthcare professionals how to get back in the driver’s seat and make more income, have a greater impact, and finally enjoy the lifestyle they worked so hard to create. And whether you’re a health care professional or not, you’re going to get a lot out of today’s interview - and if you know any health care professionals who’d love to break free from the grind of their day (or night) job but don’t believe that they can monetize their expertise outside of the traditional health care setting - send them a link to this episode! Today Sylvie and I are talking about: Why Sylvie started a side hustle in the very competitive health and wellness space online. How her business evolved into helping health care professionals create passive income. Sylvie’s personal journey from employee to entrepreneur. The steps Sylvie walks her client through to create digital products around their area of expertise. The biggest mistake most entrepreneurs make when it comes to their expertise. How Sylvie manages her time and what a typical day looks like. Challenges Sylvie sees her most successful clients overcome. Sylvie’s best tip for when to outsource. Her advice if you’re struggling to get traction growing your side hustle. Why you’re totally normal if you feel like an imposter. The belief Sylvie had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Sylvie: “If you can’t sell, you can’t help.” “There’s nothing passive about setting up a passive income stream.” “Do what actually gets the result and do what helps.” “Do it imperfectly, but have it be profitable.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Masterclass: The 5 Shifts Health Professionals Make to Create 6 Figures in Passive Income The Big Leap: Conquer Your Hidden Fear and Take Life to the Next Level Bio: Sylvie McCracken helps health and wellness entrepreneurs who have gone off-course get refueled and back on track by teaching them to run their business like a well-oiled machine. After more than a decade working with celebrities in the entertainment industry, Sylvie started her first business in the competitive nutrition and health industry and was able to replace her six-figure salary in 18 months through her relentless focus on strategy and efficiency to create passive income. Now, she teaches healthcare professionals how to get back in the driver’s seat and make more income, have a greater impact, and finally enjoy the lifestyle they worked so hard to create. Connect with Sylvie: Website: sylviemccracken.com Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/sylvie.mccracken/ Facebook:https://www.facebook.com/sylviemccracken Twitter: https://twitter.com/SylvieMcCracken
12/4/201949 minutes, 1 second
Episode Artwork

Ep. 261 - October Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to my October 2019 Income Report! Every month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! Important things that happened in October: I intentionally starting reducing my work hours. I did a photo shoot since my last real one was in 2016. I traveled to Colorado for a long weekend to visit my best friend and celebrate her 40th birthday. I hosted another partner webinar with ConvertKit. I recorded 9 podcast guest episodes. I hosted the third 5 Day Freebie Challenge to promote the Website Marketing Lab – and I’ll break down all the stats for you that in this income report too. Notes I found to myself in my planner: “I’m ahead!” “OMG I finally love everything I’m doing in my biz right now, I have butterflies in my chest!” “How can I show like up a boss this week and over-deliver for the 5 Day Freebie Challenge? How can I make this the best experience they’ve ever had from a live challenge?” Review of my goals My target revenue goal is $15,000 a month by March of 2020. My minimum baseline $10,000 a month – $2500 to cover my normal monthly expenses, I set aside $2500 a month for taxes, and pay myself $5,000 a month – two paychecks of $2500 each. Total Revenue: $12,018.50 Affiliate Income: $2027.86 Courses: $7490.64 Done For You & Consulting: $2500 Total Expenses: $2192.83 Out of the ordinary expenses: Facebook Ads to promote “5 Day Freebie Challenge” – $436.78 Annual fee for EasyWebinar – $500 Which means I ran the bare bones of my business for just $1256.05 in October. Good to know in case life hits the fan, and that will also help me meet some of the goals I set at my mastermind retreat, which I’ll talk about a bit later. Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here. Net Profit: $9825.67 I paid myself $6K of my profit – which I may not have mentioned this in prior income reports, but I’ve actually been paying myself $3000 a paycheck since I think June to repay myself for the Growth University investment. I now have a cushion in the bank where I’m one paycheck and one month’s expenses ahead, and the rest of my profit goes into my tax account – and after I pay taxes every year, what’s left is mine to put back in the business, do something fun, invest, whatever. Biggest Lessons Learned In September, my online courses earned more money than ever before in the history of my business. And then in October, I beat that number by $931. In September, my passive income and courses combined accounted for 76% of my revenue. In October again, passive income and courses combined accounted for exactly 76% percent of my revenue, whereas in previous months it’s never accounted for more than 50%. And I’m so pumped about that…because one of my goals when I joined Growth University was to make enough money from passive income to cover the $2500 monthly consulting gig that I have, planning ahead for when that revenue goes away because it was 25% of my month. And I’m just a few dollars shy of making that happen on the revenue side, but I’m currently totally fine on the expense side because I’ve pared my expenses down so much. Not only have I decreased my expenses, I’ve decreased the amount of time I’m working every week. I mentioned that I made a commitment to my mastermind gals to reduce my work hours, stop working on weekends, vacations and holidays and I truly did put that into practice in October. Here’s how much I worked each week: Week 1: 38 hours, 5.5 of that on the weekend (including my photoshoot). Week 2: 25 hours, Monday – through Thursday morning, then left for Colorado, didn’t work at all there. Week 3: 30.5 hours, started work late mornings, about 6 hours a day, no weekend. Week 4: 41.5 hours, 5 Day Freebie Challenge week, started later in the day, worked every evening and a couple hours on the weekend – all on the Challenge. Total Hours Worked: 135 I went to Colorado for a long weekend and while I brought my laptop with me, I didn’t even open it. For four days it sat untouched in my work bag. This is probably a first in the history of me starting this business that I didn’t open my laptop for that many consecutive days. It wasn’t easy, because I’m a workaholic in recovery, but I was able to do it because I planned ahead. I made a list of all the things I needed – not wanted – needed to get done or scheduled before my trip, scheduled time to get them done, planned time to get my inbox down to zero, put a vacation message on my email and let my students know I’d be offline for a few days. And then I practiced relaxing and unplugging, and I just told myself that what I wanted for the weekend was to be PRESENT. I’m usually distracted. I’m usually working in the mornings while everyone is sleeping… and then they get up and I’m like… “I just gotta finish this one thing…” and I wrap it up… but the damage is already done. My brain is in work mode for the rest of the day. I’m distracted. I’m checking my phone. I’m not fully there. I’m talking about work with my friends who don’t really want to talk about work, and I never feel recharged or relaxed. So this time, I planned ahead to do NOTHING. And it was AMAZING. And I came home relaxed and ready. And I know this might sound lame to those of you who aren’t planners or chronic overworkers, but that mini-trip was a test. Because I’m going on vacation for a week for my 40th birthday in less than 2 weeks at the time of this recording, and I don’t intend to open my laptop for 8 days. I don’t intend to be in any of my Facebook groups for 8 days, or responding to email for 8 days. I feel like I’m finally ready and prepared to take advantage of the life I’ve created…to go on vacation and choose to not work, to practice doing nothing, and to reap the benefits of giving my brain some downtime, and to just be PRESENT with my husband and our friends. Also in October, I ran the 5 Day Freebie Challenge for the third time, which is one of my FAVORITE things to do. I talked about this a little bit last month, I go live in a Facebook group nightly for 5 days, and I teach some core concepts about online marketing and give people action steps to take to get started, and then I give them feedback on their homework and stuff – basically giving them a taste of what it’s like to work with me inside my program. And at the end, I share more about the Website Marketing Lab and how people can continue to work with me after the free live Challenge is over, and then I’d give them a week to enroll, and then I’d close the doors and start walking the new group through the lessons. For the first time, I ran Facebook Ads to promote the Challenge – and I did that as a test. I wanted to see how much they would cost me, how many new signups I got, and how many of those signups actually became customers. So here are all the stats for the 5 Day Freebie Challenge: Total # of Signups: 641 Signups from Facebook Ads: 208 Signups from Email Invitation: 233 Signups from Courses Site: 298 (overlap on signups from email + courses site) Signups from Main Website: 40 Signups from Pep Talks for Side Hustlers Site: 8 Total # of Email Recipients: 600 (bounces, unsubscribes) # of people who joined the Facebook Group: 277 from 10 countries 3.1K likes, comments and reactions. 258 posts 249 Active members # of people who joined the Website Marketing Lab: 19 Conversion Percentage for all signups: 3.2% Conversion Percentage for active participants: 6.9% Total revenue in October from NEW Website Marketing Lab Signups: $4843 (doesn’t include future revenue expected over the next 9-12 months for everyone that opted for a payment plan). So this year, I spent $436 on Facebook ads, and again, I used Claire Pelletreau’s Facebook Ad Spend calculator to figure out my budget and my expected return on investment. I talked to Claire back in episode 231 all about when is the right time to use Facebook Ads in your business so you can go back and listen to that one here. The calculator NAILED IT when it came to my ad spend, the cost of my course, the cost per lead and expected ROI… But here’s the interesting thing about this launch – none of the people that signed up for the 5 Day Freebie Challenge via a Facebook Ad actually joined the program this time around. I mean, I know why… It’s because they don’t know me yet. I haven’t built the know, like and trust factor yet. Our relationship isn’t solidified. I’ll be interested to see if the people that signed up for those ads make a purchase in the future. If I didn’t dig in to my numbers deep enough, I might think that my Facebook Ads were successful. Because I could sit here and tell you that I 10x’d my return on investment for my ad spend… But I didn’t. I spent $436 on Facebook ads and not one of those signups became a customer. My Facebook Ads were successful in terms of growing my list and filling my challenge… So the next Facebook Ads test I’m going to do is run ads to my free content in between launches and see if that brings me my ideal client, and see if those people stick around on my list and eventually become a customer. But they had nothing to do with the results of my launch. I think what made my launch so successful is the relationship I’ve cultivated with my subscribers over time, and the live engagement in my challenge. Just like last month with the Web Designer Academy, I showed up in a Facebook group every night for 5 nights, interacted with everyone in there, shared everything I could share in 60 minutes a day, and answered all their questions and gave feedback on their homework.. I didn’t do a big sales presentation, and I also gave people a chance in every step of the way to opt out of learning more about the Website Marketing Lab. And just like I said with the Web Designer Academy – It’s so much easier to get customers when you’re not trying to sell. And that’s what I teach people to do inside my programs too. And I’m not knocking Facebook Ads at all, but it’s not like they’re magic. I still have to gain the trust of those people. And I’m still going to test out different strategies to see what if anything gets me results… So these Facebook Ad tests that I’ve done the past couple of months, they are just telling me that I’m on the right track. Because you wanna know the strategy that IS bringing me subscribers that turn into customers? Relationships. One of the core strategies I teach me Website Marketing Lab students how to leverage. Yep, building relationships with people that serve the audience I serve, creating opportunities to get in front of their audience and deliver value to them, and in the process getting new subscribers – but these subscribers aren’t coming to me not knowing if they can trust me… because someone they already trust is introducing them to me, I’ve shaved off a big chunk of the time it takes to build that trust vs. people that come in through Facebook Ads. It’s fascinating. And building relationships is free and priceless all at the same time. So that will continue to be my focus throughout the rest of 2019 and 2020 – instead of creating new courses or programs or products, I’ll be creating new relationships. Thanks so much for listening – and I’ll see you right here next week where I’m talking to Sylvie McCracken all about how to create a profitable side hustle as a health care professional. And if you need a website but have no idea how to get started, go to http://www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com and sign up for the 5 Day Website Challenge and learn how to create a website for your side hustle. And if already have a website and you want to learn how to get traffic to it, go to www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com and sign up for my free 6-part mini-course that’ll walk you through how to get started getting targeted traffic to your website.
11/27/201950 minutes
Episode Artwork

Ep. 260 - How Writing a Book Can Help You Grow Your Side Hustle with Joshua Lisec

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is celebrity ghostwriter Joshua Lisec. Joshua has ghostwritten over forty books for entrepreneurs, and he’s here today to share how side hustlers can turn their books into opportunity-attractors and money-makers for their business… all while slaying writer's block for life.  Today we’re talking about: Joshua’s journey to becoming a celebrity ghostwriter, from charging just $1.67 an hour to being on track for a half-million dollars in revenue. His secret to ending writer’s block. Why you don’t need clarity on every aspect of your side hustle (and what to do instead). How a book can help you grow your business. Key things authors need on their websites. How you can get people to buy your book. Josua’s advice for how to get started as a ghostwriter. Challenges Joshua experience in his business and how he’s overcome them. Exactly how he made sure he stood out from all the other freelance writers out there. Joshua’s advice for getting traction in your side hustle. The belief Joshua had to change about himself to get where he is today.   My favorite quotes from Joshua: “We all have to start somewhere, what matters is that you start.” “I think of ghostwriting as acting in print. It’s my job to portray the authentic you on the page.” Ask yourself “What problems do you like to solve?” “Think of yourself as a long term trusted partner to each of your clients.”   Resources mentioned in this episode: Publisher Rocket Ghostwrite and Prosper: Debunk 7 Ghostwriting Myths Clickup Ted Talk: How to Create Your Dream Job from Scratch   Bio: Every day Joshua help authors manifest the mission behind their voice. He’s the world's only award-winning, celebrity-recommended, #1 international bestselling Certified Professional Ghostwriter.  Joshua is the founder of The Entrepreneur’s Wordsmith LLC, Ohio’s first Certified Professional Ghostwriter, a multiple-time #1 International Bestselling Ghostwriter, a Forbes Contributor ghostwriter, a TEDx speaker, and a two-time published novelist. Connect with Joshua: For Authors: www.entrepreneurswordsmith.com For Aspiring Ghostwriters: www.ghostwriteandprosper.com YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/user/joshualisec LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/joshualisec/    
11/20/201953 minutes, 30 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 259 - Flip Flop Your Life with Angie Cherubini

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Before I introduce today’s guest, I want to share a little bit of background of why this interview is so important to me. Last September, I was invited to go away for a weekend with 5 total strangers for a business mastermind retreat, which I talk about in depth in Episode 177.  Before that retreat, I was on the fast-track to burnout. I was crazy overworking and pretty isolated, and this group of girls that invited me to be part of their mastermind all lived in Texas at the time. So I traveled to Austin to this mastermind retreat, and of course we all bonded immediately like girls do, and after they realized how on the edge I was, I remember one of them saying to me, “Don’t take this the wrong way, but do you have any friends at home?”  And I was like, “Yes, of course I have friends!!! But… they really don’t understand what I do… They’re polite when I talk about it and they’re happy for me, but they really don’t get it…” And my mastermind group challenged me to make some local business friends.  So I put that on my to-do list as a good Enneagram 3 does, and then I came back to Columbus and got back to work. Fast forward 6 months, and I’m at my friend’s house, and her two sons who just graduated high school are there with two of their friends (who are also brothers) that are always hanging out there, and one of them goes, “Hey! I just found out you’re a web designer? And you have a podcast?” And I’m like “Yeah! I teach entrepreneurs how to DIY their websites and how to market themselves online, and I have this podcast all about how to grow your side hustle.” And he’s like, “You have to meet my mom. Our family owns a web design company, we do digital marketing for small businesses, and they started this podcast called “Flip Flop Your Life” and it’s all about helping people build a life they don’t need a vacation from - and they want to start doing online courses like you do!” So they connected me with their mom, and we set up a lunch date and totally hit it off, and I had to bring her on the podcast to share her business journey! My guest today is Angie Cherubini. Angie and her husband Pat own a web design and digital marketing firm in my hometown, Columbus, Ohio called Cherubini Designs along with their two sons, Chase and Blake, and Chase’s girlfriend Hannah.  Today we’re talking about: How Angie started her web design business in her early twenties, before having a website was a necessity for business owners. Exactly how Angie got her first clients. Why working with bad clients is crucial to your business success. How Angie grew her business before online marketing was even a thing. How Angie’s solo freelance web design business became the family business. How to identify your own strengths so that you can monetize your expertise. Why you don’t have to constantly find new clients to be successful, and how to best serve your existing clients over the long-term. The one thing Angie would change about her business if she could go back in time. Why Angie and her husband Pat decided to start a podcast. Angie’s best advice for you if you are wanting to live the flip-flop lifestyle. The one belief Angie had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Angie: On staying relevant to your clients: “You have to always be looking at the next step.” “We try to treat everyone of our clients like family.” “We don’t complain about our job like everyone else does, we actually love it!” “You can’t be afraid to be the expert.” “Find out how to monetize something you love.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Flip Flop Your Life Podcast Cherubini Company Bio: Angie was your rock collecting, play in the dirt little girl, high school & Ohio Glory cheerleader (AKA Glory Girl), and Ohio State grad. She’s always been an independent woman. Stay at home mom turned business owner and entrepreneur. Oh, and CrossFit nut!  She is the designer of the family. Websites, logos, landing pages and everything that needs an artistic touch. She’s been the creative genius behind 100’s of local business’s websites and marketing pieces. She still gets her hands dirty in the creatives but now is focusing on leading the creative team into the future. Connect with Angie: Website: https://flipflopyourlife.com/ Instagram: @flipflopyourlife Facebook: Flip Flop Tribe Facebook Group, Flip Flop Your Life Facebook Page, Cherubini Company Facebook Page  
11/13/20191 hour, 11 minutes, 1 second
Episode Artwork

Side Hustle Sales Page Strategies with Amanda Genther

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Amanda Genther, an online marketing strategist who helps female entrepreneurs consistently grow their audience, their email lists and their bottom lines. She’s also the host of the Inspired for Action podcast where she share strategies, tips and advice on how to take imperfect action every day to grow your business. I met Amanda through a technology panel we both did for the Rebel Boss Virtual Summit hosted by Eden Fried (who I interviewed back in Ep. 234) and I just instantly connected with her and knew I had to get her on the podcast not only to share her business journey but also because she’s an expert in creating sales pages that convert - which if you’re marketing yourself online, you’re 100% going to need someday! Today we’re talking about: The full story behind how Amanda was able to leave her job and start her business. How she overcame imposter syndrome to build her business. How you can reach success FASTER and become known for something. Why you shouldn’t wait until you’ve chosen a niche before you get started. The #1 biggest struggle web designers face (and how to overcome it). Why having a nice website just isn’t enough anymore. How to create a sales page if you have no design or copywriting skills. The first thing you should do before creating any new product. The 3 steps Amanda takes to launch new ideas FAST. 4 common mistakes that Amanda sees people make on their sales pages (and what to do instead). How to get testimonials for your sales page when you haven’t actually had and clients yet. All of Amanda’s revenue streams and exactly how she makes money in her business. How Amanda fights her natural tendency to keep creating new products every time she has a new idea so that she can focus on what’s working. What a typical work day looks like for Amanda + her family. How to hold yourself accountable to the things you say you want to do. Amanda’s advice if you’re struggling to get traction with your business. The beliefs Amanda had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Amanda: “The only two things you need to launch are an offer and a sales page.” “Just throw things out there, see what works and see what people resonate with.”  “Fail faster so you can figure out what you’re supposed to be doing. If it doesn’t work, move on to the next idea, it’s not a big deal!” Resources mentioned in this episode: Megan Minns Amanda’s Sales Page Starter Guide Free Mini-Course: Sales Page Success Secrets My Free Jumpstart Your Website Traffic Mini Course Inspired for Action Podcast (iTunes) Bio: Amanda Genther is an online marketing strategist and sales page designer who helps coaches, creatives and course creators consistently grow their audience, their email lists and their bottom lines. She's also the host of the Inspired for Action podcast where she shares strategies, tips and advice on how to take imperfect action every day to grow your business. When she's not at her desk setting up launch funnels and designing sales pages for her clients, she's probably lounging in her living room with her 2 littles, watching the latest superhero flick (2 boys) or forcing them to watch Gilmore Girls with her for the millionth time. You can connect with her on Instagram, or learn more on her website.  Connect with Amanda: Website: https://amandagenther.com/ Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/amandagenther/
11/6/20191 hour, 3 minutes, 30 seconds
Episode Artwork

September 2019 Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to my September 2019 Income Report! Every month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! Before we dive in to September’s income report, I want to share an email I got from one of my listeners because she asked a really great question that I thought some of you might also have too, so I wanted to answer it for you here in case you were wondering the same thing. She writes: “I love your income reports, they are so candid & detailed, and I always got a lot of insight from it. I’m a little confused about your August report because: you stopped your 1 on 1 consulting because you prefer the Information business model to focus, as it more scalable & less time consuming but you are selling a course that teach people to be a Web Designer in one of your course (a consultant business model) – that you stops doing it :)) Don’t you think that’s a contradicting message? As a freelance web developer myself, I really know that 1 on 1 consulting work is really time consuming. Do you think I should try to pivot to an information business model too? Thanks! Here’s my response: I LOVE this question SO MUCH, and I’m really glad that you asked. If I were ONLY doing freelance web design, and I didn’t want to do the teaching, training, mentoring and podcasting part of my business, I’d keep taking 1:1 clients all day because I FINALLY figured out how to attract my ideal clients and keep my projects running smoothly. I love my clients, they’re a blast to work with – and because I figured that out and I know how much other web designers STRUGGLE with that, I want to teach them how to do it. I have bigger goals for my business. At first, it was about making a living and being able to quit my day job… and I’ve done that. Now I want to serve WAY more people than I can with 1:1 client work alone – and that’s why I’m stopping 1:1 client work so that I can help more people. It’s not all about being able to make more money with an information model for me. It’s alsp about how many people I can reach and help with an information model. The information model isn’t right for everyone. Some people don’t WANT to create that kind of content and put themselves out there like that. And the 1:1 model isn’t right for everyone because some people need more flexibility in their schedule, etc. So to answer your question – do I think YOU should change to and information model? Only YOU can answer that question. What do you want? What’s going to get you there – bigger paydays with 1:1 web design clients, or the slower growth of an information-model? I think that a blend of both at first is GREAT because they support each other. I hope that helps – and let me know if you have any other questions, I’m an open book!!! So if you guys have any questions, that goes for you too! Reach out, I’m an open book! Okay, let’s dive in to September’s income report. Important things that happened in September: I beta-launched my free “Jumpstart Your Website Traffic” mini-course to my email list. I opened enrollment for my Web Designer Academy. I traveled to Austin for a weekend mastermind retreat with my biz besties. “The thoughts that got you here are going to be the thoughts that keep you from getting to your next goal.” Review of my goals My target revenue goal is $15,000 a month. My minimum baseline is to make around $2500 to cover my normal monthly expenses, I set aside $2500 a month for taxes, I pay myself $5,000 a month and I want to build up a reserve so that I can invest in my team, give myself a raise, have a cushion to cover the ebbs and flows of revenue and eventually cover my husband’s salary. So my minimum baseline is $10,000 a month, and as I mentioned in my income report last month, I want to hit that first $15,000 month by March of 2020. So with that, here’s how much money I made in September of 2019. Total Revenue: $11,824.34 Affiliate Income: $2470.70 Courses: $6559.64 Done For You & Consulting: $2794 Total Expenses: $2482.70 Out of the ordinary expenses: Facebook Ads to promote “How to Start a Freelance Web Design Business Masterclass” – $449 Travel to Lake Austin for Mastermind Retreat – $387 Registration for a conference I’m attending in April: $497   Which means I ran the bare bones of my business for just $1149.70 in September. Good to know in case life hits the fan, and that will also help me meet some of the goals I set at my mastermind retreat, which I’ll talk about a bit later. Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here. Net Profit: $8,981.64 Biggest Lessons Learned The first thing I noticed when I pulled together my numbers for September is that my online courses earned more money than ever before in the history of my business. My passive income and courses combined accounted for 76% of my revenue this month, whereas in previous months it’s never accounted for more than 50%. And that’s so exciting!!! So I mentioned that I beta-launched my Free Jumpstart Your Website Traffic Mini Course to my email list – so let me explain what that is and why it’s so important to my overall business goals: I have a course called that Website Marketing Lab that teaches people how to market themselves online and get clients. And I only open that course for enrollment a few times a year, and how I promote it is through a live 5 Day Challenge where I go live in a Facebook group nightly for 5 days, and I teach some core concepts about online marketing and give people action steps to take to get started, and then I give them feedback on their homework and stuff – basically giving them a taste of what it’s like to work with me inside my program. And at the end, I share more about the Website Marketing Lab and how people can continue to work with me after the free live Challenge is over, and then I’d give them a week to enroll, and then I’d close the doors and start walking the new group through the lessons. And that’s great, and I love it, but I’d always get people telling me that they missed the training, that they want to enroll but now’s not the right time, or asking me when it’s going to open again because they heard about how awesome it is from a friend in the course – and I’d always have to tell them, “Sorry, it’s gonna be a few months before I open again” and they’re all bummed out because they want to get started NOW. So in working with the team over at Growth University, we came up with the idea of taking the concepts I teach in the live challenge, tweaking them a bit since I’m not there to answer questions and give the feedback like I am during the live challenge and turn it into a mini-course that’s delivered entirely via email – and at the end of the course, I invite people to who want to learn more about working with me to continue to get emails about how they can join the Website Marketing Lab. And then I have the doors to the program always open so that people don’t have to wait for my live challenges to enroll – and I can consistently bring on new students. The other reason that I’m excited about the Free Jumpstart Your Website Traffic Mini Course is that I have a new freebie I can market to help people who ALREADY have a website, and don’t need my Free 5 Day Website Challenge. That opens me up to a whole new group of people that are my ideal client. So I wrote all the content for the course, the sales emails and the sales page in August and September, and then in September I invited my current email list subscribers to sign up for the new course so that I could get a baseline: How many people that signed up for the course joined the Website Marketing Lab? Did people get what they expected out of the free mini course? Why didn’t people buy? And I can use that information to make improvements AND predict my future revenue so that I can start marketing that free mini-course on its own! And I’ll still do a live challenge twice a year because I LOVE doing those, but this way it’s a win-win – people can enroll when the timing is right for them, not me, and I can have income coming in consistently year-round, not just around launch times. The other thing that contributed to my highest-ever course income is my Web Designer Academy. I historically have opened doors to that just once a year in September and we opened again this year. And I’ve always used Facebook Ads to connect with freelance web designers who probably have never heard of me to invite them to a free training – and this year I merged all of the prior free trainings I’ve done for them into a live, 3 part masterclass series, again in a Facebook group, to teach them how to create a successful freelance web design business. At the end of those trainings, I let them know that I’m going to be sharing more information about the Web Designer Academy after the trainings are over… and the crazy thing was, this time, for the first time ever, people were asking me questions about the Web Designer Academy in the Facebook Group, on the live sessions! So this year, I spent $449 on Facebook ads, and I used Claire Pelletreau’s Facebook Ad Spend calculator to figure out my budget and my expected return on investment – and I gotta say, that calculator NAILED IT. I talked to Claire back in episode 231 all about when is the right time to use Facebook Ads in your business so you can go back and listen to that one here. But here’s the interesting thing about this launch – I had the smallest number of people ever sign up for the free training, but I sold more spots in the Web Designer Academy this year in the first 2 days than I did all of last year – and at the time of writing this income report, the launch isn’t over yet. And I think it’s because of the live engagement, seriously. I think it’s because I showed up in a Facebook group for 3 days, interacted with everyone in there, shared everything I could share in 60 minutes a day, and answered all their questions. I didn’t do a big sales presentation, and I also gave people a chance in every step of the way to opt out of learning more about the Web Designer Academy. It’s so much easier to get customers when you’re not trying to sell. And that’s what I teach people to do inside my programs too. And I’m also trying to figure out how I can let people join the Web Designer Academy all year long, and not miss out on the mentorship component – which is why I only open it once a year, because it’s really a year-long mentorship. But there are people who don’t want that, but they want lessons and strategies and templates. So I’m working with my team at Growth University on that too. But it’s gotta be a win-win for both of us, not just a way for me to sell more courses. Okay, so switching gears a little bit here… If you listened to last month’s income report, Episode 252, I shared with you that I decided to stop taking 1:1 web design clients because I spend 80% of my time on them but they only account for 50% of my revenue. In September, I’m currently working on finalizing my last 1:1 project, but I didn’t bring in any revenue from it because we’re between payment cycles. Like I said last month, I know the path forward for me and I just need to keep moving forward. And that takes me back to that quote I’d heard on a podcast all about how “The thoughts that got me here are going to be the thoughts that keep you from getting to your next goal.” For the past several months I’ve been thinking “Just keep doing what you’re doing…” and that was a great thought. It kept me focused and on track to get everything in place so that I could market my courses and grow my scalable revenue streams. But now it’s time for me to switch gears – and I talk about this all the time to students inside my Website Marketing Lab and my Web Designer Academy – it’s time for me to move out of CREATE mode into DO mode. It’s time to start marketing and getting myself out in front of my ideal customers in a bigger way. And that’s why my September mastermind couldn’t have come at a better time. Back in Episode 177, I shared with you how I went to a mastermind retreat in September of 2018 in Austin Texas with 5 strangers who became 5 of my closest friends. Since then we’ve met monthly, hold each other accountable to our goals and communicate daily via a group text and Marco Polo. We got together again this September at a gorgeous AirBNB on Lake Travis in Austin and basically had a three-day business-planning slumber party. Pretty much my dream life. The format we did this year was Friday night, we each recapped our goals from last year, what we accomplished, what we didn’t accomplish and what held us back from our goals. On Saturday, we each had a hot seat where we shared our goals for the next 5 years and what we thought needed to happen to get us there – and then we challenged each other on those goals, like, do they align with our other goals, why do we really want those goals, is that serving us, what’s holding us back from just going for it. And then on Sunday morning, we broke into groups and taught each other – because we all have a strength and skill that someone else in the group can benefit from. Sunday afternoon we had a work day where we knocked out some of those important projects that we knew would get back-burnered the moment we got home. And there was amazing food we cooked together, all planned by one of the girls who is a lifestyle and food blogger, and delicious wine, and great music, some tears and lots of laughs. So I wanted to share with you a couple of the goals that came out of the retreat for me and why I chose those goals so that if you’re thinking about what you want to work on in your side hustle next year, maybe this will give you a few ideas: Goal #1: Double my email list subscribers by September 2020. Why? Because that’s how I market and sell my online courses. I make offers to the people on my email list who have specifically expressed interest in solving the problem that my online courses solve: learning how to build a website, learning how to market themselves online, and learning how to have a successful freelance web design business. And if I want my revenue to grow so that I can hit that $15,000 a month number (and ideally all of that will come from affiliate marketing and courses with no consulting or 1:1 client work), then I need to reach more people. How? Continue doing exactly what I teach my students to do inside my Website Marketing Lab. Stop trying to build followings and relying on algorithms to connect me with my ideal clients online and start building relationships instead. But what I need to do differently than what I’ve been doing is put way more time into that. I’ve been spending a lot of necessary time shoring up my foundation to prepare for that growth, but now it’s time to grow. And that’s why the thought “Just keep doing what you’re doing…” isn’t going to get me to the next level. The thought that’s going to take me to the next level is “It’s time to show up and put myself out there.” Goal #2: Work 40 hours a week, and stop working weekends. Now that I’m not taking 1:1 client work anymore, technically I should have 80% more time… What I used to do was spend Tuesday – Friday on client work, and then Saturday – Monday on my own stuff. And if you’ve listened to this podcast for any amount of time, overworking has been a theme. It started in my side hustle days because I needed to work that much to grow the business outside of my day job. It continued through that first year after I quit my day job because I was so scared of not making enough money to pay the bills. And then it just became a habit, and a convenient excuse for not doing the other things in my life I wanted to do, but that were going to be hard. Like finally losing weight. Or a buffer to escape into when I didn’t want to think about other things. Now that I’m phasing clients out, I have no excuses. And I don’t want my whole life to be about work, even though I love what I do. And I want to see what I’m capable of when I constrain myself to 40 hours a week (I gotta make it a challenge, right?) I talked to two millionaire business owners on this podcast, Bernadette Doyle in Episode 198 and Kelly Roach in Episode 196, both who challenged me to constrain my work hours… And I did, for awhile, but then I ramped right back up. So I set a goal to reduce my work week to 40 hours, to stop working weekends, to take 4 one-week vacations a year and to not work on holidays. And part of my accountable is to tell you guys, on the podcast, of this goal and start reporting hours worked in my income reports. So you’ll start to see those in my income reports starting in October 2019. So overall, I feel like by having clarity in my business on exactly what I help people with, crystal clear goals and a step-by-step plan of action for making happen, I have no doubt I’ll reach those revenue goals… I think my biggest challenge, honestly, is going to be the 40 hour work week and taking more time off. And I want to set a good example for you guys. I don’t want you to think your dream isn’t possible because you can’t work as much as I do. You don’t HAVE to work as much as I do. I don’t have to work as much as I do! So I’ll keep you posted on that. And if you need a website but have no idea how to get started, go to https://www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day and sign up for the 5 Day Website Challenge and learn how to create a website for your side hustle. And if already have a website and you want to learn how to get traffic to it, go to www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com and sign up for my free 6-part mini-course that’ll walk you through how to get started getting targeted traffic to your website.
10/30/201945 minutes, 57 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 256 - How to Sell Your Blog for Six Figures with Carrie Smith Nicolson

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Carrie Smith Nicolson. Carrie’s been blogging since 2011, and in October of 2018, she sold her first blog, carefulcents.com for nearly six figures! And she’s on the show today to share with you exactly how she did it. Today we’re talking about: Why Carrie decided to start a personal finance blog when there were already a lot of personal finance blogs out there. The steps she took to quit her day job two years in and start blogging full time. Unconventional strategies Carrie used to grow her audience. Exactly how Carrie monetized her blog. How she came up with the idea to sell her blog, how she found a buyer, decided on the price and what she put in her sales contract. Blog growth strategies that Carrie’s most successful 6 and 7 figure clients are using. The most important thing to make sure you include in your blog. What pillar content is and how to use it to your advantage. Carrie’s advice if you’re struggling to get traction with your blog. The beliefs Carrie had to change about herself to get where she is today. Before we dive in, what’s crazy to me is that when I was preparing the show notes for this interview I searched my inbox for Carrie’s bio, I found this email thread from 2016 where Carrie writes: “Shannon, I just finished going through your entire Free 5-Day Website Challenge and have completely overhauled my website and membership site: http://www.carefulcents.com/ THANK YOU! This is something that's been on my list for a long time and I'm thrilled that I was finally able to get moving on it.” And then she goes on two years later to sell her blog for almost six figures. Wow. So if you’ve been wavering on whether you should start a blog, or you need a website for your side hustle, or your website frustrates the heck out of you and holds you back, seriously, you need to sign up for my free training - I’ll tell you how at the end of this episode. My favorite quotes from Carrie: “You have to invest in yourself.” “Once you put it out there, even just by thinking it, the universe just brings you the right people.” “If so many people are asking, maybe your experience can help.” “Figure out what you really love - and what you are good at.” “Niche down, you can always expand later.” “I would do stuff that I love, that I’m good at, and that doesn’t tie me to a desk.” “Quitting doesn’t mean failing.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Dave Ramsey Careful Cents (the blog Carrie sold) HashtagColoradoLife Podcast Carrie’s E-book: The Ultimate Guide to Selling a Blog: How to Sell Your Blog for Six Figures and Be Your Own Broker Bio: After being a workaholic in her twenties, Carrie Smith Nicholson became debt free and then quit her job in 2013. During this time, she founded the blog carefulcents.com and grew it into a well-known financial resource. Earlier this year she sold her business for six figures to dedicate more time to growing Hashtag Colorado Life! Over the past 7 years Carrie has worked with companies like Chase, Capital One, FreshBooks, QuickBooks, and many other well-known brands. When she’s not selling blogs and living the #ColoradoLife, Carrie helps her clients with building virtual teams and project management for their online businesses over at https://carrieconsiders.com/. Connect with Carrie: Website: https://carrieconsiders.com/ Instagram: @carrieconsiders
10/23/20191 hour, 54 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 255 - De-Risking the Move to Self-Employment with Matt Baker

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Matt Baker. He’s the VP of Corporate Strategy and International Expansion at FreshBooks, which makes accounting, bookkeeping and invoicing software to help service providers get paid faster and save time on tedious administrative tasks. Matt’s also super passionate about helping entrepreneurs mitigate the risks associated with going from side hustle to self employed. I’m super pumped to have him on the show - even though we both graduated from colleges that have a huge football rivalry (Go Buckeyes!) - to share some of his insights with you because he’s in the unique position at Freshbooks to have access to a lot of data about challenges faced by people who are self-employed, and what prevents people who really, really want to quit their day jobs and have the freedom, flexibility and financial independence that comes with working for yourself from making the leap. Today we’re talking about: What’s stopping the 20 million Americans who say they want to be self-employed but aren’t taking the leap. A low-risk way to start your business so that you don’t have to jump without a safety net. How to figure out if you are charging too little, and what to do instead. The difference between value-based billing and time-based billing, and which one Matt advises side hustlers use. Matt’s best advice for you if you want to make the jump to self-employed. Matt’s best advice for how you can create a sustainable, long-term business. My favorite quotes from Matt: “You don’t want to price on surviving, you want to price on thriving.” “You have to know how to go out and find your own clients.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Freshbooks All-In-One Small Business Invoicing and Accounting Solution Ep. 228: How to Price Your Products & Services with Paul Klein of Pricing is Positioning Breaking the Time Barrier E-book Connect with Matt: Freshbooks Website LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/bakermatthew/ Bio: Matt Baker is a money strategist and business coach who’s passionate about helping entrepreneurs solve their most challenging problems. As VP of Corporate Strategy and International Expansion at FreshBooks, Matt is helping millions of self-employed pro’s grow their businesses and get paid faster. As a reformed management consultant and ex-Google strategist, Matt loves asking the tough questions that lead to tipping points in business. When he’s not helping businesses grow, you’ll find him teaching a Change Management course at UC Berkeley or giving back via his seat as a board member at the Next Step Learning Center, an adult literacy program based in Oakland.
10/16/201943 minutes, 38 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 254 - Creating Successful Online Courses with Emily Walker

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Emily Walker of the Course Wellness Podcast. Emily is a learning designer and podcaster who is dedicated to supporting entrepreneurs like us to create transformative online programs for our communities. Emily and I met on a tech panel we did for the Rebel Boss Summit all about online course tech, and her approach to online course creation makes so much sense and is unlike anything else I see and hear from the experts I follow online. That’s why I’m so excited to have her on the show not only to share her business journey but also to share her thoughts on adult learning design and online course creation. Especially for side hustlers - because as we all know, your time is your most precious asset when you have a full-time job, and online courses are one of the best investments of your time because they are scalable, meaning you can serve an exponential number of people in the same amount of time. But creating a great online course that gets results for your students isn’t a given, and that’s where Emily comes in. Today we’re talking about: How Emily discovered a major gap in the online business world and realized she had the perfect skillset to fill it. Why your online course shouldn’t be focused on you and what you know (and what to focus on instead). Why less is more when it comes to your online course. The one thing you must know about your audience to create a successful online course. How this one small shift in your sales language can make a big impact. Ways you can ensure your students’ success. How to pick the best online course platform for your course. What to do if you are feeling intimidated by all the course creation tech. How to market yourself if you don’t like writing blog posts. How Emily avoids overworking and manages her daily priorities. Emily’s advice if you’re struggling to grow your online course. The two beliefs Emily had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Emily: “Get it out there, start changing people’s lives with your information.” “Create a dialogue with your people, ask them what they want, ask them what they need, ask them how they like to learn.” “It’s more important to share things with the world and share with people then to have something completely perfect.” “In an online business we can always make changes, we can always pivot and grow.” From one of Emily’s mentors to her: “100% perfect but trapped in your head isn’t helping anyone.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Emily’s website - www.modernleaderscollective.com Reina + Co The Course Wellness Podcast Bio: Emily Walker is a leader, learning designer, and workshop facilitator from beautiful Victoria, British Columbia. Emily is the foundress of the Modern Leaders Collective, where she guides heart-centred and soul-fuelled entrepreneurs to create transformative online programs for their people. Working with a diverse range of clients, from life-changing business coaches, to best-selling authors, to seven figure mindset queens, Emily combines her signature framework for designing learning with the tools for the necessary inner work so that you can say goodbye to low completion rates and hello to empowering transformation. When she’s not leading workshops or new content for her community, Emily can be found hanging out in yoga pants with her two kitties and her partner, dreaming of their next trip to France. Connect with Emily: Website: www.modernleaderscollective.com Instagram: @modernleadersco Pinterest: https://www.pinterest.ca/modernleadersco/ Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/modernleadersco  
10/9/20191 hour, 29 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 253 - Pivoting to Find Your Purpose with Kim Wensel

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Kim Wensel from the Pattern of Purpose Podcast. Kim is a brand strategist who helps entrepreneurs and small businesses learn to speak their clients’ language so that they can connect with their ideal audience. So funny story - Kim and I had an interview scheduled a week before this one - and I was having one of those weeks… You know, where everything that can go wrong does? It was just that kind of a week.  So Kim and I get on our call and I can see her but I can’t hear her so after a bunch of troubleshooting, I restart Zoom, and we get it working, and we dive into one of the most compelling and inspiring interviews I’ve done… and then…. I realize that I didn’t hit record. Ugh. My heart sank and at that point, we decided to just reschedule instead of starting over.  So what you’re hearing today is interview #2 with Kim Wensel, which lucky for me, we got to spend even more time getting to know each other and I’m super excited to introduce to Kim. Her journey to self-employment is super inspiring! Today we’re talking about: Kim’s side hustle journey and her quest to find work that lights her up (instead of burning her out). Why your first side hustle doesn’t have to be your last, and how to pivot when things don’t feel right. Why it’s important not to try to avoid the messy middle. How to set yourself and your business apart in a saturated market Three key things to practice to set yourself up for side hustle success. Why money is the least important factor in how you design your business (and what to focus on instead). How to effectively speak to your ideal client. Why having a solid vision in your business is critical to your success (and how to start crafting one). The one belief Kim had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Kim: “You really can’t compare where you are in your business to others.” “You can have some patience while still having drive.” “Set yourself apart by providing an absolutely mind blowing experience for your clients.” “It’s better to have a no than to have a yes and feel like you are being taken advantage of at every turn.” On not charging enough: “I thought that if people paid me more, they would have exponentially higher expectations of me.” “Nobody is going to see your genius if you can’t talk about it.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Kim’s website - https://www.patternofpurpose.com/ The 4 Hour Work Week by Tim Ferriss Pattern of Purpose Podcast Bio: Kim Wensel is a brand strategist for entrepreneurs who want to position their business as the go-to in their industry. She helps them move from guessing what their audience is looking for to having a deep understanding of their needs, resulting in polished, powerful brand messaging. In a world with a template for everything, Kim focuses on immersive engagements with her clients, drawing out their voice and highlighting what makes their brand truly unique. When she’s not wordsmithing, she can be found playing the 3-marker challenge with her two kids or planning her next adults-only getaway with her husband. Connect with Kim: Website: https://www.patternofpurpose.com/ Instagram: @pattern_ofpurpose and @kimwensel Pinterest: https://www.pinterest.com/patternofpurpose/
10/2/20191 hour, 3 minutes, 51 seconds
Episode Artwork

August Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to my August 2019 Income Report! Every month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! Important things that happened in August I decided to stop taking 1:1 web design clients for at least 6 months, maybe longer. I continued working on my “Jumpstart Your Website Traffic” evergreen course. I released a private member podcast for my Website Marketing Lab Students. I moved all my websites from my good ol’ Bluehost Shared Hosting to their WP Pro Optimize WordPress hosting. I booked a photographer to get new brand photos taken for the first time since 2016! I redesigned my Website Marketing Lab, Web Designer Academy + individual courses dashboards. “The how presents itself once the commitment is made.” Corrine Crabtree Review of my goals My target revenue goal is $15,000 a month. My minimum baseline is to make around $2500 to cover my normal monthly expenses, I set aside $2500 a month for taxes, I pay myself $5,000 a month and I want to build up a reserve so that I can invest in my team, give myself a raise, have a cushion to cover the ebbs and flows of revenue and eventually cover my husband’s salary. So my minimum baseline is $10,000 a month, and as I mentioned in my income report last month, I want to hit that first $15,000 month by March of 2020. So with that, here’s how much money I made in August of 2019. Total Revenue: $12,243.69 Affiliate Income: $2381.30 Courses: $3574.39 Done For You & Consulting: $6288.00 Total Expenses: $1953.78 Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here.   Net Profit: $10,289.91   Biggest Lessons Learned So I’d mentioned in my July income report that I’d cleared my schedule to work on content and that I only kept a few pre-scheduled meetings and blocked my calendar from anything else being scheduled. And let me tell you, it felt like a vacation. Even though I worked every single day, weekends included, it did not feel like work at all. It was invigorating. Because I was making my own schedule, setting my own priorities, and having full control and flexibility over my days. And that’s why I started this business in the first place! If you’ve been around here any amount of time, you know that my business is about 50% scalable income through affiliate revenue and courses, and 50% time-for-money through consulting and 1:1 web design work. And back in February and March, I’d gone through Nathalie Lussier’s AccessAlly advocate training to get certified to be listed on her website as someone approved by their company to build membership sites and online courses for their AccessAlly customers. And that led to a TON of new client inquiries and opportunities to work on some really cool projects… And also a ton of drama in my mind. Because my calendar starting getting booked again with tons of meetings. I started waking up with major anxiety on all the things I had to get done that day.  I started working every evening and weekend and saying no to spending time with family and friends because I needed time to get my stuff done. I’d had a few meetings with a potential client with a really big and lucrative project.  They had outgrown their current course platform and wanted to move to AccessAlly. And just a side note to those of you who want to build an online course someday…  Consider starting on a platform that can grow with you. Plug and play platforms like Teachable and Thinkific are great for your budget when you’re starting out, but know that you’ll pay the piper when it comes time to move because it’s not easy. There’s a LOT of moving pieces involved. Anyway, I had several meetings with this client to understand their needs and fully spec out their project and give them an estimate, and as I was calculating the number of hours it would take me, and then looking at my calendar to see where I’d fit this project in, I realized that in order to get it done in their requested timeline of 2 months one - it just wouldn’t be possible without me bringing on a team and getting them up to speed, two, I would have to press pause on my entire business for 2 months and focus exclusively on this client. And if I didn’t bring in help, I’d need to press pause on my business for 4 months. And deep down in my gut, I didn’t want to do it. But I thought, “You know, I need to still give a proposal, and I just need to put a price on it that would make it worth it to me to do it. And then I just delay my Website Marketing Lab and Web Designer Academy launches, or I can just fit my stuff in on the evenings and weekends.” And in that moment, I realized that I’d made the scalable revenue side of my business my side hustle, and prioritized the instant gratification and relief that comes with getting that first deposit from a client in my bank account.  It was the same fear that prevented me from quitting my day job in the first place. Why do I keep telling myself that I want to grow the scalable revenue side of my business, the side that I love, that doesn’t feel like work, that gives me total freedom, and yet my actions are to continue to take on 1:1 clients and treat my stuff as my side hustle? So I made the decision to let this particular client know that I wouldn’t be submitting a proposal because I wouldn’t be able to meet their timeline and give their project the undivided attention it would need to be successful. I updated my sales page for my 1:1 web design package to notify people that I’m not accepting projects until February of 2020 and directed them to my Web Designer Academy Expert Directory. I updated my Acuity Scheduling availability to accept consultations to 1 hour a week (and after a conversation with Rana Rosen in Episode 249, I realized that by doing that, I left the door cracked open JUST a little bit to breaking my commitment to myself.  And then I did last week’s interview with Amy Eaton, Episode 251, all about her journey from freelance photographer, trading her time for money to creating a massively successful online course teaching makers how to take photos of their products. It was an amazing interview. We talked about how you have to be crystal clear on what you want, and how we both wanted freedom more than anything else and that’s why we do what we do. And then she said that she made the decision to stop taking clients so that she could focus on growing her scalable revenue, and when she got inquiries, she’d say “I’m not taking any new clients right now…” and to me, those sounded like magical words. I’d never thought of saying them before. Because it still leaves the option open for me to make a different decision should I want to. And then she said something at the end of our interview about how she had to stop playing small.  You can go back and listen to it - it was SO GOOD, but in that moment I realized that by continuing to accept 1:1 web design clients so that I didn’t have to feel the fear of maybe not making enough money - I was playing small.  By not going all in on the scalable income side of my business and always having one foot in client work and one foot in my courses, I’m keeping myself safe. I’m staying small and not taking any risks. I’ve been crystal clear on what I’ve wanted from the moment I started this business, but I keep cheating on my dream every time I accept a new client project. So in August, I made a decision.  I’m not taking any new clients right now. I worked on finishing up the ones I have, and I started sending new inquiries to my Web Designer Academy grads who are listed in my expert directory.  And starting in September, I’m focusing exclusively on marketing my Free 5 Day Website Challenge, my free Jumpstart your Website Traffic Mini Course, and opening the doors to my Web Designer Academy twice a year instead of once, and doing consistent promotions for my Website Marketing Lab. It really feels like I quit my day job again. I’m cutting the cord and letting go of that security of the big payday to go all in on marketing myself and growing my audience. And I’m 100% confident that I have the right system, strategies and support in place to do it. So if you want to follow this new chapter of my journey, including all the wins and mistakes I make along the way, be sure to subscribe to the podcast so that you don’t miss an episode. Thanks so much for listening, and I’ll see you right here next week with my guest Kim Wensel from the Pattern of Purpose Podcast all about how to pivot to find your purpose. And if you need a website but have no idea how to get started, go to https://www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day and sign up for the 5 Day Website Challenge and learn how to create a website for your side hustle. And if already have a website and you want to learn how to get traffic to it, go to www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com and sign up for my free 6-part mini-course that’ll walk you through how to get started getting targeted traffic to your website.
9/25/201936 minutes, 32 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 251 - How to Stop Playing it Small in Your Side Hustle with Amy Eaton

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Amy Eaton of AmyTakesPictures.com Amy is a photographer-turned-educator who teaches makers + Etsy sellers how to DIY their own gorgeous product photos. I was connected to Amy by my team member and right hand woman Laura who also works with Amy, and she kept telling me “You gotta get her on the podcast, she’s awesome!”  And you guys, I’m SO glad I did because Amy had a TON of fantastic advice for you guys to help you grow, and she’s the perfect example of someone who took a service traditionally done one on one that required her time and physical presence - and turned it into a scalable business that doesn’t require her to be there to run. Not only that - my conversation with Amy was another transformational one for me where I had the realization that I’ve been playing it small in my business and that it’s time to make some big changes… More on that later. Today we’re talking about: How Amy took her skills and created an online course to teach photography to non-techie product makers. Amy’s journey from side hustle to self employed, why she then went back to corporate and what ultimately made her go all in and take her photography business full-time. The one thing that’s more important to the success of your business than anything else. What Amy did after her business failed. Exactly how Amy built her audience and her email list. The power in knowing your numbers. Why you should ask yourself what you really want out of your business. Why to avoid focusing on what you offer, and what to focus on instead. How playing small might be holding you back, and how to start playing it big. Amy’s advice for you if you’re struggling to get traction in your side hustle. The one belief Amy had to change about herself to get where she is today. And just one more thing before we dive in - we unfortunately had a really spotty connection for our interview - but our conversation was SO GOOD I didn’t want to stop and reschedule because sometimes, you lose the magic of that first connection, you know what I mean? There is so much actionable and inspiring stuff in this interview that I hope you’ll give me a pass on the audio - I did my best to clean it up for you guys… but shocker, I’m not a professional sound engineer!! Okay, so let’s go ahead and dive into my interview with Amy Eaton of AmyTakesPictures.com My favorite quotes from Amy: “What strategy do you bring that’s unique to you that's going to transform the people you serve?” “You can create the best thing in the world but if nobody knows about it, it doesn’t matter.” “Helping people is important to my life, it feeds my soul.” “Persevere until you have nothing left and then keep going more.” So I mentioned in our intro that my conversation with Amy was another transformational one for me where I had the realization that I’ve been playing it small in my business and that it’s time to make some big changes…  And I realized that it’s finally time for me to press pause on taking one on one web design clients and focus exclusively on my signature programs, the Website Marketing Lab and the Web Designer Academy. I’ve been scared to do it, because the one on one jobs are my security blanket. They’re my steady paycheck.  But my goal from day one has always been to make 100% of my revenue from scalable sources - my courses.  And talking to Amy solidified what I’ve known for a long time… I’m not spending my time on my goal. I’m spending 80% of my time on client work, which brings in 50% of my revenue. I spend 20% of my time on marketing my own business, which brings in 50% of my revenue. Imagine what I can do if I shift how I’m spending my time to my own business? So I did it. I made the decision to stop accepting one on one clients for at least the next 6 months and focus on growing my audience and marketing my courses. It honestly feels like I made the decision to quit my day job again. I’m having all kinds of deja vu over here... But I’ve been playing small for a long time, and thanks to conversations on this show with people like Amy, I’m ready to start playing big. So stay tuned! Amy is hosting a free 5 day challenge to help makers get better product photos in just 5 days from September 23rd - 27th.  Registration for 5 Days To Better Product Photos is now open at www.amytakespictures.com/challenge.    Resources mentioned in this episode: www.amytakespictures.com The Startup Podcast: Pirate Needs Pirate Snap, Sell, Succeed Course Bio: Amy is a photographer and educator with over 10 years of experience in this wild world of chasing light and creating images. As a product photographer, she's worked with handmade and product-based sellers for several years, and now empowers makers to take their own beautiful product images through her signature program Snap, Sell, Succeed.  After side hustling (and struggling) for several years, Amy was able to finally break free from her day job and launch her online product photography courses for makers. Within two years, Amy has achieved her status as a six-figure entrepreneur and reached two major goals - knowing she'll never have to return to her day job again, and being able to replace her husband's income as well, which allowed him to leave his full-time job as well. They now work from home together, growing their business and raising their two young children. Amy's work has been featured on podcasts an publications, such as Handmade Seller Magazine, Maker Academy, Heart Soul & Hustle, Being Boss, and Happily Ever Crafter. Connect with Amy: Website: amytakespictures.com Instagram: @amy.takes.pictures Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/amyeatonphotography Pinterest: https://www.pinterest.com/amyeatonphoto/ YouTube: www.youtube.com/amyeaton
9/18/201955 minutes, 5 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 250 - 3 Tough-Love Secrets to Transition from Side Hustler to CEO with Dr. Cortney Baker

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Dr. Cortney Baker of the Women in Business podcast. Dr. Cortney’s mission is to equip the next generation of women leaders to start and scale successful service-based businesses in her efforts to help achieve gender equality at the C-Suite level. Guests like Dr. Cortney are one of the reasons I absolutely love doing this podcast, because they bring me new perspectives that I hadn’t considered before.  My conversation with Dr. Cortney made me take a hard look at something really uncomfortable for me that I’d totally been avoiding looking at in my business. And today she’s sharing with us 3 tough-love secrets to help you transition from side hustler to CEO (and why you absolutely can call yourself the CEO of your business). Today we’re talking about: Why Dr. Cortney decided to leave her day job to start her own business and the challenges she had to overcome to grow it to 8 figures. Why there’s “no such thing as passive income where you go to bed broke and wake up a millionaire.” Why she’s so passionate about helping millennial women create sustainable service-based businesses. Why “following your passion” is bad advice and what to do instead. Exactly what need to know about your business in order to be successful. The most important thing to guard in your life so that you can have a bigger impact. What superpower you can cultivate to ensure your success. When you’re allowed to call yourself “CEO”. The one belief Dr. Cortney had to change about herself to get where she is today. One more thing before we dive in - Dr. Cortney is holding a free training TODAY, September 11, 2019 on her 5 Step Framework to Building Your Profitable Service-Based Business all about how to replace your salary in 6 months or less without burning out, hiring a big team, or dealing with the confusion of doing it all alone. You can sign up for her free training at https://www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/ceo. And if you’re listening to this after the webinar is over be sure to head over to Dr. Cortney’s website to get on her list to find out about the next one and grab her 10 secrets you need to know before starting a service-based business - which you can get your hands on at https://www.drcortneybaker.com/10secrets. Okay, let’s dive into my interview with Dr. Cortney Baker of the Women in Business podcast! My favorite quotes from Dr. Cortney: “There is no such thing as passive income where you go to bed broke and wake up a millionaire.” “Solve a problem that pisses you off.” “I didn’t look at quitting as optional.” “It’s not your why, it’s your because. I do this for my daughters because they are worth it.” “Surround yourself with people who will breathe life into your dreams.” My goal in my heart is to see women in business succeed.” Resources mentioned in this episode: Women in Business Podcast Dr. Cortney’s Side Hustle to CEO Facebook Group www.cortneybaker.com “10 Secrets Female Entrepreneurs Must Know” freebie www.fromsidehustletoceo.com Connect with Dr. Cortney: Instagram: @drcortneybaker Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/drcortneybaker/ Twitter: @cortneyabaker LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/cortneybaker/
9/11/201941 minutes, 54 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 249 - Creating Freedom and Stability in Your Side Hustle with Rana Rosen

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Rana Rosen of Henceforth Consulting for creatives and leaders in career transition. I met Rana because we both actually used the same branding company, Braid Creative, and Rana reached out to me for a consultation as she was making the decision on whether to hire a web designer or DIY. And you guys know me - I’m all about helping you make the right decision for YOU, so Rana and I didn’t end up working together on her website, but we totally connected on a deeper level during our conversations, and so I invited her on the show to share her story with you. I know a lot of you, maybe not all of you, are starting side hustles because you want something different than the 9-5 grind. You’re in a transitional period, and maybe you’re not 100% on leaving your day job or making a total career change, but you want to make a change that gives you more freedom and more control - and that’s what Rana’s all about helping her clients do - become independent. And during our interview, she totally helped me shift the way I think about myself in my business. I’ve always described myself being “self-employed”, but Rana describes herself as being an “independent” and that really resonated with me because the words we use to describe ourselves - even in our own minds - are so powerful. Employee to me means I’m beholden to someone else - and it’s funny because I’ll have friends ask me if I can take an afternoon off and do this or that, and I’m always like, I can’t, I gotta do this, I gotta do that...but independent means I’m free. I’m free to rearrange my schedule if I choose, or I’m free to say no because I choose to do what I planned that day. It’s a subtle difference, but it totally changes my energy and how I show up in my work! Today we’re talking about: How Rana went out on her own as a consultant for organizations and started a side hustle helping with resumes. Why you should take action, even if you aren't 100% ready. How to look at your skills instead of your jobs to figure out what kind of side hustle to create. Why you don’t have to create a full-blown online business as a side hustle. How to create stability while retaining freedom. How to get more comfortable taking bigger risks. The one belief Rana had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Rana: “Every step of the way, I would move mountains to continue to take on the work that I want to take on and grow in the direction I want to grow.” “I love the freedom of chasing my own growth and challenges.” “I feel like I have more stability than ever because no one can fire me from this.” “By putting yourself out there and contributing what uniquely are good at is a way to create the stability. You become known for that and no one can take that from you.” “Sometimes what is most unique about us are the things we take for granted because the come so natural.” Resources Mentioned in this episode: Rana’s consulting business, Henceforth Seth Godin The Ted Interview Podcast On Being Podcast Wave Accounting Typeform Paul Jarvis Brene Brown Elizabeth Gilbert Esther Perel Dr. Shefali Tsabary More About Rana: Rana Rosen is the founder of Henceforth. She’s a facilitator, writer and communications designer. The company grew out of Rana’s background in business—across strategic planning, HR and marketing (consulting and internal roles)—and journalism. The work grew through word of mouth from 2010 and since then Henceforth’s method organically took shape. Learn more about the Henceforth Signature method here.  
9/4/20191 hour, 1 minute, 38 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 248 - July Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to my July 2019 Income Report! Every month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! Important things that happened in July I set a goal to complete all course content creation for the rest of 2019. I launched the all-new 2019 Free 5 Day Website Challenge I created a companion workbook for my Free 5 Day Website Challenge. I booked two new clients Review of my goals My target revenue goal is $15,000 a month. My minimum baseline is to make around $2500 to cover my normal monthly expenses, I set aside $2500 a month for taxes, I pay myself $5,000 a month and I want to build up a reserve so that I can invest in my team, give myself a raise, have a cushion to cover the ebbs and flows of revenue and eventually cover my husband’s salary. So my minimum baseline is $10,000 a month, and as I mentioned in my income report last month, I want to hit that first $15,000 month by March of 2020. What I focused on in July So I pretty much cleared my schedule of as many meetings as possible in July so that I could give my undivided attention to creating content. And I had a massive amount of content to create. I recorded nearly 100 modules inside the Free 5 Day Website Challenge with tutorials for two hosting companies, two email service providers and three different themes - plus an entirely new dashboard and design. I wrote a 300-page companion workbook with step by step instructions that’s available for purchase inside the Free 5 Day Website Challenge that my students had been asking me to create FOR YEARS. I recorded the final 6 marketing experiments for my Website Marketing Lab students, and held a live pricing workshop for my Web Designer Academy students because I needed to update that module. I pretty much put the brakes on any meetings except for pre-scheduled client meetings, podcast interviews and web design consultations. And by the 2nd week in July I’d launched my new free 5 Day Website Challenge, and by the 3rd week in July I released the workbook, and the 4th week I spent tying up loose ends on both of those and recording those Website Marketing Lab experiments. Total Revenue: $12,291.81 Affiliate Income: $1,636.70 Courses: $5156.11 Done For You & Consulting: $5499 Total Expenses: $2850.68 Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here. Net Profit: $9441.13 Biggest Lessons Learned Last month, I said my biggest lesson learned was to keep doing what I’m doing. This month, my biggest lesson learned is that when you listen to what people want and create what they ask for and not what you think they want, that it pays off. The 5 Day Challenge Workbook generated over $2000 in revenue over a weekend. That’s a huge win. And totally worth the hours I put into it. The other lesson I learned is that it’s okay to clear my schedule to work on my own stuff, and that I’m way more productive and efficient when I batch it all together like that. But the final thing I realized is that I’m actually done creating content for awhile. When I first started my business and creating the Free 5 Day Website Challenge, I launched immediately into creating a marketing course called WPOMG (Operation Marketing Genius - because I was trying to play off the BFF theme and be clever) but no one asked for it, and no one bought it. Then I changed it to the BFF Academy and added a few more courses, and I had some sales, but not many and again, it’s because I made what I thought people needed next, not what they wanted. Then I turned that into the Serious Side Hustlers membership, because I was in transition from side hustle to self employed and added a few more modules, and then I finally did a survey and found out that most of my audience didn’t think it was for them and had no idea it was about marketing. I also launched a course called “Websites That Make Money” which teaches people how to monetize from day 1, but there was still something missing because again, I created what I THOUGHT people needed next, not what they had asked for. So last year I did some surveys, and I discovered that what people want to learn is how to market themselves and be found online. And that’s exactly what every single one of my other attempts taught, but I never presented it that way. And that’s how the Website Marketing Lab was born. And THIS TIME, I actually pre-sold it and went through an entire validation process to make sure it had what people wanted to learn, and made it a step-by-step, super actionable course that wasn’t just learning a bunch of stuff and then being left on your own to figure out how to implement. And it’s doing massively well. Students are getting amazing results. And for all that time, I was in constant course creation mode. And you know what I wasn’t doing? Marketing. I talk to my Website Marketing Lab students about going from Research and Planning Mode to Create Mode to Do Mode. Research and planning is when you’re taking all the free trainings and webinars you can get your hands on, and maybe you even buy courses and actually get into them and watch the trainings. It seems like you’re doing a lot, but you’re not getting any results from it because you’re just stuck there. You never move to doing the work or making the thing. Some people move on to making the thing, but that’s where they stop. They build the website, they write all the blog posts, they set up their freebie. But they never “Launch”. They think they have to have all their ducks in a row and then they’ll plan this big “launch” but they have no audience to launch to so they get stuck in confusion and overwhelm and in create mode. Or if you’re like me, you create, create, create but you never do the work to find out if what you’re creating is anywhere close to what you should be creating. You want to skip ahead to the end where the money tree grows so you can feel the relief of everything being okay. That money tree doesn’t exist, by the way. You gotta just move from Create Mode to Do Mode. Stop working on the website, stop working on the blog posts, stop building the course that no one has asked for because you don’t have an audience yet, and start doing the work to build your audience. And Do Mode is really uncomfortable. Because now you have to put yourself out there. You have to share what you’ve created. You have to talk to other people. You worry they might say things like “Who do you think you are to teach me how to build a website? Show me your computer science degree and your extensive portfolio of uber-professional websites for millionaire business owners and MAYBE then I’ll take your free training.” But here’s the secret I’ve learned. Do Mode is where we learn the most. Do Mode is where we learn what we’re made of. It’s where we get to connect with the people we want to serve and find out how we can REALLY help them. It’s where we find out that our worst fears about ourselves either aren’t true, or that if it happens we can handle it. It’s where we stop using the excuse that we don’t have enough time or we’re overwhelmed and we just get to work. And it’s where we feel the fear and do it anyway. And Do Mode is where we get actually feedback from people who are actual potential customers and we can go back into Create Mode armed with real data about what our ideal client needs instead of creating from a place of fear and insecurity and doubt. I finally was in a Create Mode driven by data instead of “that last thing sucked, maybe this will work”. And now it’s time for me to get back into Do Mode and put it all out there. I’m Shannon, I can teach you to build a kickass website and I can show you how to market it too so that you can have whatever it is that you want out of life too. So if you’ve been stuck in research and planning mode for too long, it’s time to get to work and start creating. If you’ve been stuck in create mode, it’s time to give yourself a deadline to move into Do Mode. And if you want someone to hold your hand through all 3 phases, well, I’m your girl. Sign up for my free mini-course, “Jumpstart Your Website Traffic” at www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/jumpstart So that’s it for my July income report. I’m getting reading to shift into full DO MODE for the rest of the year, so you’ll be seeing a lot of me! And if you or someone you know needs a website for your side hustle but you have no idea how to get started, then sign up for the free 5 Day Website Challenge where I walk you through the whole process step by step. You can sign up at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com
8/28/201933 minutes, 7 seconds
Episode Artwork

The Legal Side of Growing Your Side Hustle with Autumn Witt Boyd

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Autumn Witt Boyd of the Legal Roadmap® Podcast where she teaches business owners how to protect their rights and stay out of legal hot water. I’m so excited to have Autumn on the show today because ever since I heard her on the Being Boss Podcast back in 2016, I’ve been listening to her show and recommending it to my community because I think it’s so important to be knowledgeable and empowered when it comes to the legal and financial aspects of our businesses. So if you’ve ever worried that you don’t know what you don’t know when it comes to the legal aspects of your business, you’re not gonna wanna miss this episode! Today we’re talking about: How Autumn transitioned from a traditional law firm to starting a virtual law firm specializing in copywriting, trademarks and contracts How Autumns husband helped push her to start her own business Some challenges Autumn faced when she first started out Why Autumn started a podcast to help market her services Why it’s so important to have a contract in place with your clients Some key items to include in your contract The three searches you should be doing when you pick your business name Strategies and tactics Autumn has used to grow her business The importance of relationship building How Autumn started to leverage digital products in her business Resources for doing it yourself. Autumn’s advice for someone who is struggling to move forward in their side hustle The one belief Autumn had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Autumn: “If you are a service provider who works 1:1 especially at a higher level or on bigger projects, don’t forget that it really is a people business and that is what will bring better clients to you” “The more you can talk to people the more you will learn what people actually need to know, what questions they are asking, what they need help with” Resources Mentioned in this episode: Write Your Own Contract: 5 Terms Your Contract Should Include Autumn’s Contract Templates for Freelancers + Online Business Owners* The Legal Roadmap® Podcast Legal Advice for Creatives on the Being Boss Podcast Legal Protection for Your Online Business Business - Build Your Tribe with Chalene Johnson Podcast Like a Boss United States Patent and Trademark Office Name Checkr Mastermind Dinners* Book More About Autumn: Autumn is an award-winning intellectual property lawyer and AWB Firm founder who helps ambitious business owners like you. Autumn is licensed to practice law in Tennessee and focuses her practice primarily in intellectual property and business matters for entrepreneurs. Autumn helps online influencers including Amy Porterfield, Chalene Johnson's131 Method, Corinne Crabtree of the Losing 100 Lbs podcast, and many more, protect their brands and avoid costly legal mistakes while scaling their businesses. When it comes to intellectual property and business strategies, Autumn is known as a thought leader in the online business community, frequently speaking at conferences, seminars, workshops, and appearing as a guest on podcasts hosted by other experts and business owners. Autumn has been named a “Best Lawyer” in the area of Litigation-Intellectual Property, and a “Super Lawyer” for in the category of Top-Rated Intellectual Property Lawyer, Rising Star, by her peers.
8/21/201949 minutes, 30 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 246 - Starting a Six-Figure Freelance Writing Business with Laura Pennington Briggs

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Laura Pennington Briggs of the Better Biz Academy, a former teacher turned freelance writer, entrepreneur, coach, and public speaker. She is a two-time TEDx speaker and the author of “How to Start Your Own Freelance Writing Business”, published by Entrepreneur Press. Today we’re talking about: How Laura started a side hustle as a freelance writer. Exactly how she shifted her business model from one time projects to repeat retainer clients. How she grew her side hustle while working full time. How she built a 6-figure business - without having a website! Why Laura pivoted to coaching freelancers, and exactly how she did it. How Laura went from knowing absolutely nothing about writing a book to getting published with Entrepreneur Press (and her advice for you if you want to do something totally new that you’ve never done before). Laura’s advice for someone who is struggling to get traction in their side hustle The one belief Laura had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Laura: “Whatever your dream is, start putting yourself in the world of those people.” “As business owners, we hold the power to change anything.” “It’s equally valuable to know, “I don’t want to do this kind of project” as it is to say “this is my dream project”. Resources Mentioned in this episode: Better Biz Academy Advanced Freelancing Podcast Start Your Own Freelance Writing Business - The Complete Guide to Starting and Scaling from Scratch* Book TedX Talk - The Future is Freelancing Mastering Your Freelance Life with Laura - Facebook Group More About Laura: Laura is a freelance writer and entrepreneur who threw out her entire business model at the end of 2015 because she was was sick of working on unfulfilling contracts and outsourcing my work to subcontractors - a process that seemed to add far more work and frustration. Instead of continuing down Burnout Boulevard, she fired half her clients and kicked off the new year with some commitments: one of which was to only work with clients and subcontractors who allowed her to grow my business the way she wanted to. You can learn about Laura here. Connect with Laura: Twitter - @sixfigurewriter Facebook - The Freelance Coach Pinterest - Six Figure Writing Secrets Instagram @authorlaurabriggs  
8/14/201941 minutes, 21 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep 245 - Breaking Free From Freelancing Feast + Famine with Jason Resnick

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! ​My guest today is Jason Resnick of the Live in the Feast and Ask Rezzz podcasts that help freelancers take action ON their business to build recurring revenue. I was introduced to Jason by Carrie Dils, another web developer that I interviewed back in Episode 210 all about how to be a fearless freelancer. She reached out to me and recommended I invite Jason on the show because she thought you guys would benefit from what he has to say about freelancing and side hustling, and I’m so glad that she did because our conversation was eye-opening for me! A web developer by trade, Jason’s focused solely on WordPress for several years now - and he loves WordPress for the same reason I do - it’s gives us total freedom as web developers to create whatever we can imagine - but more importantly, it works really well on the backend for our clients. Jason believes that a rising tide raises all boats, and he’s super active in the WordPress and freelancer communities, and he’s committed to helping freelancers and web designers build a business that stays out of the feast and famine cycle. Today we’re talking about: Jason’s transition from side-hustle to self-employed. How Jason helps freelancers figure out who their ideal client is - and isn’t! Jason’s advice for how to get customers when you are just starting out and how to generate recurring revenue. How to set yourself apart as a freelancer. Why what you do is the least important thing you can communicate to your potential clients, and what to do instead. How Jason packaged his expertise to help other freelancers be successful. Why it’s important to get out of your comfort zone. Jason’s best advice for you if you’re struggling to get traction in your side hustle. The one belief Jason had to change about himself to get where he is today. My favorite quotes from Jason: You have got to niche down, you’ve got to specialize a little bit so you are talking to a singular person, solving a singular problem. Inject your own personality into what you do each and every single day. Resources Mentioned in this episode: Jason’s website - rezzz.com Feast Membership + Community Live in the Feast Podcast Ask Rezz Podcast Connect with Jason: Twitter: Best place to connect Instagram: BTS + Life LinkedIn: All about business Facebook: I'm told I need to be  
8/7/201958 minutes, 25 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 244 - June Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to my June 2019 Income Report! Every month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! Important things that happened in June I continued the personal habits that I’ve been working on, like weekly meal prep, daily journaling and planning. I executed 4 Partnerships (Elevate, Rebel Boss + ConvertKit) I pitched no new partners (on purpose!!) I spent one full week on a project for my old employer. I recorded 4 new podcast episodes with some really awesome people. I created a new inbox + Facebook notification management strategy I continued creating the content for the Website Marketing Lab course. I started recording the content for the new Free 5 Day Website Challenge Notes I found to myself in my planner: You are booked out this week. You are booked out this week. Review of my goals When I quit my day job, I had a goal of generating $10,000 a month in revenue so that I could pay myself $5,000, have $2500 for business expenses and $2500 for taxes. Last month I hit my revenue goal, and my expenses were less than $2500 and I was so excited because I want to give myself a raise by the end of this year, and I eventually want to cover my husband’s salary. Not that he’d ever quit his job and come work with me… but hey, you never know! So there are two ways I can do that - increase my revenue, and reduce my expenses. I’m actually working on both, and my goal is to have my first $15,000 month by March of 2020. What I focused on in June So back in May, I’d opened up the doors to my Website Marketing Lab again - it’s my signature course where I teach online business owners how to market themselves and get traffic to their websites and in June, I was continuing to create tech tutorials for the tech library that’s included in the training, and to host my weekly Live Q&A where I work with the student one-on-one to help them focus, overcome obstacles and keep taking action. I also continue to contract with my former employer, which is super fun because I get to spend time with one of my former colleagues who is a blast, and we actually spent about 6 full days together on a Zoom meeting just hammering out a project together. I enjoyed it, but it took a lot of time away from all the things I do in the business, like marketing, partnerships, content creation, client work… So I totally got behind on my inbox, and Facebook notifications from all the groups I managed, and so I spent an afternoon and played what I call the Inbox Game, where I start at the very bottom and work my way up, and I can’t skip around and I have to Do, Dump or Delegate every single task in my inbox - which means if I gotta spend 15 minutes to do whatever task is in that email so I can respond, it gets done right then and there. And I win when I reach inbox zero. So I did, and then I put a system in place with my team member Laura to maintain my inbox. We set up some canned responses she can use to respond to people who ask WordPress questions to direct them to my Facebook group, and we set up colored labels so she could categorize my emails and I could easily see what emails had to-dos in them, needed my response or that she’d already handled, or that were just FYI’s. And then I scheduled from 1PM to 2PM every day to check email and respond to Facebook notifications. And let me tell you, it’s been hard picking up my phone, looking at email and not just quickly replying, but I made a rule for myself because I get sucked into email like some people get sucked into social media… And I think it’s because I have this underlying thought that “there’s money in there” and “people need me” and then down the rabbit hole I go, and before I know it, I’ve spent an hour replying to emails when I should have been working on a client project and now I’ve gotta make that time up after dinner. So that’s been working out really well, and as long as I’m committed to reserving that time every single day, my inbox is manageable. It’s when I don’t get in there for 4 days because I’ve got my head down in a project that it gives me total anxiety. I’ve mentioned to you that I’m in a program called Growth University run by Bryan Harris of GrowthTools (formerly VideoFruit) and one of the things I’m supposed to do is send one pitch a week for a partnership. I intentionally paused that in June and July, because I knew that I would have my head down updating and redesigned the Free 5 Day Website Challenge and completing the final 6 marketing experiments for the Website Marketing Lab. Once those are done - it’s pitch city in this office!! On a personal level, I’d mentioned to you guys a couple of times that I started listening to a podcast called Losing 100 Pounds by Corinne Crabtree back in January and that by May, I’d lost 17 pounds. And for the first time ever it wasn’t a struggle. I’ve done everything Corrine’s said to do on her podcast, and I’ve built some habits like weekly meal prep, planning what I’m going to eat every day before the day starts, and getting all my garbage thoughts out of my head and onto paper and working through them, and at the time I’m recording this, near the end of July, I’m 23 pounds down. So I’m really proud of that, and I finally no longer have to wonder why it is that I’m so on it when it comes to my business but never had it together when it came to my weight. Now I know why that was the case, and I took massive action to fix it, and just like in my business, I won’t stop, and I’ll reach my goal, however long it takes. And even then, I’ll keep doing what I’m doing and leveling up. So I’m telling you that, A) because I’m totally proud of myself and want to toot my own horn, and B) because there is so much life-changing information out there online - for free - and if you just take ACTION on it, you can change your life. That’s exactly why I created my Free 5 Day Website Challenge, because people that take action on that training CHANGE THEIR LIVES and I’m grateful I can contribute to that and repay the universe in a way for all the information I’ve had access to that’s changed my life, like Corinne’s podcast. Okay, enough of the mushiness. Here’s how much money I made and spent in my business in June of 2019: Total Revenue: $9368.71 Affiliate Income: $1913.10 Courses: $2354.00 Done For You & Consulting: $5101.61 Total Expenses: $2163.54 Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here. Net Profit: $7205.17 Biggest Lessons Learned Honestly, it’s to just keep doing what I’m doing. Keep planning, keep scheduling realistically, keep assessing when the plan breaks down so that I can fix the problems, and just keep showing up. I’ve got big plans for the rest of 2019, and I spent the last week of June and all of July - as you’ll hear in next month’s income report - preparing the groundwork to grow. It’s hard to believe we’re already more than halfway through 2019… where do you want to be by the end of the year? What about by the end of 2020? You totally can do it, and it’s easier than you might think when you get the right systems in place - as I’ve discovered in fitness and in business. Thanks so much for listening, and I’ll see you right here next week! And if you need a website but have no idea how to get started, go to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day and sign up for the 5 Day Website Challenge and learn how to create a website for your side hustle.
7/31/201930 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 243 - Using Your Story to Sell Your Side Hustle with Liz Fleming

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Liz Fleming, a personal branding and digital marketing strategist who teaches entrepreneurs like us how to successfully tell our stories so we can profit from our passions. I met Liz through another guest on the podcast - Wendy Breakstone from Episode 217 - and even though I’d never spoken to Liz prior to this episode, I felt an instant connection to her story because it felt so similar to mine when you just have that moment where you realize that going to college and getting a job to work for someone else on their terms isn’t what you want for the rest of your life - and then all of the feelings and emotions that come from that realization and then the hard work of moving toward change. But here’s what I want you to take away from that - Liz and I bonded over a shared story. And that’s exactly what she helps her clients do - tell their story in a way that gets their website visitors, their newsletter subscribers and their customers bond with them in an authentic way. Today we’re talking about: Liz’s transition from side-hustle to self-employed. Exactly how she booked her first clients. How Liz figured out what to put in her online course. Liz’s 4-E Formula for how to structure a personal brand. Why you should Google yourself. Why your story is important (even if you think it’s not). Liz’s advice on how to attract your ideal client. How Liz schedules her work day. Liz’s strategy for creating a to-do list you can actually get done. Liz’s best advice for you if you’re struggling to get traction in your side hustle. The one belief Liz had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Liz: “A lot of observation, risk taking and staying education was how I really progressed my craft.” “Know that you’re able, capable, knowledgeable and just believe in that to the fullest.” “Maybe it’s been done before, but it’s never been done by me. That is my value and I need to start believing in myself for others to believe in me too.” “You can’t force your natural creativity. You have to let it develop and the only way to do that is to take care of yourself and trust yourself.” “If you are going to live a life of joy and prosperity then you need to look out for number one, and that is YOU.” Resources Mentioned in this episode: Marie Forleo Charlene Johnson Liz’s Brand in Bloom course Liz’s Freebie: 12 Simple Steps to Create Glowing Social Media Profiles More About Liz: Liz Fleming, a personal branding and digital marketing strategist, helps entrepreneurs successfully tell their stories so they can profit from their passions and live life in full bloom. She does so using her proven framework The 4-E Formula™, a four-step system she designed to help entrepreneurs organically maximize and monetize their exposure, which she shares via one-on-one VIP coaching, training programs like her online course Brand in Bloom™ and group immersion workshops. Throughout her decade long career, after representing both small businesses and multi-million dollar organizations like, The PGA of America, The Republic of Tea, and Walkers Shortbread, she’s found that the key to great marketing is leaning on your imagination to tell your true story well and to listen, connect, and engage with others who do the same: to plant seeds of significance. Her work has been featured by The Rising Tide Society/Honeybook, Legacy Magazine, PGA Magazine, The Scalable CEO Podcast, The Rebel Boss Summit, Launch Brand Grow, and CBS News, and she actively gets her clients featured by The New York Times, Oprah Magazine, Today Show, and many more. Her secret to success? Bloom where you’re planted. Connect with Liz: You can connect with her online at elisabethfleming.com and on Instagram, Facebook, LinkedIn, Pinterest and Twitter @mslizfleming  
7/24/201952 minutes, 24 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 242 - Evolving Your Side Hustle to 7-Figures with Chris Parker of WhatIsMyIPAddress.com

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Chris Parker, creator of WhatIsMyIPAddress.com, a website that helps internet users with privacy and security. What’s so cool to me about having Chris on the show is that I’ve literally used his website for my entire professional career.  Before I quit my day job to take my web design training business full time, I worked in marketing and IT for a non-profit and for the IT part of my job I’d go to his site to grab our IP address for vendors, for troubleshooting, for all kinds of things.  Yes, I’m a secret nerd. And in case you’re wondering what the heck an IP address is, it’s a nine-digit number that identifies whatever network or wifi you’re computer or phone is connected to. The router you got from your cable company has an IP address, and anything you do from home online is attached to that address. When you connect to wifi at Starbucks, anything you do from there is attached to Starbucks IP address. I actually have sent over 10,000 people to Chris’s website from inside my free web design training to go find out their IP address so that they can enter it into the website security plugin I recommend in the training and whitelist it so that the security plugin doesn’t block them from doing certain things. But anyway, this episode isn’t about the tech, it’s about the person behind the tech, and how a simple website that solved a problem evolved into a 7-figure business. Today we’re talking about: How WhatIsMyIPAddress.com wasn’t even intended to be a side hustle. How Chris earns income while providing a free service. How much traffic you need to be able to make a significant amount of money from display ads. How Chris discovered affiliate marketing, advice for finding affiliate programs for your niche, and things to avoid with affiliate programs. How Chris and his wife made the decision to take the business full time. How Chris strategized to meet his 3, 6 and 9 month revenue goals once he took his side hustle full time. What a typical work day looks like for Chris as a 7-figure business owner. How to be more productive. The one belief Chris had to change about himself to get where he is today. My favorite quotes from Chris: “You’re the guide to their story, not the hero to their story.” “I wanted to maintain quality of life in the process [of building my business].” “I don’t have to figure it all out tomorrow.” Resources Mentioned in this episode: Bench Accounting Built to Sell* The E-Myth More About Chris: Chris Parker is the founder of WhatIsMyIPAddress.com, a tech-friendly website attracting a remarkable 6,000,000 IP-seeking visitors a month. In 2000, Chris Parker created WhatIsMyIPAddress.com as a solution to a seemingly simple problem he faced at the time— finding his employer’s office IP address. When Chris launched his website—initially as a hobby—it attracted thousands of users. As a result, Chris explored ways to grow it as a side-hustle. In 2014, Chris was laid off at his full-time corporate job. Rather than panic and lose focus, he seized the opportunity to devote himself full-time to his website. Today, WhatIsMyIPAddress.com is among the top 3,000 websites in the U.S. Chris enjoys the fruits of his success, generating close to seven figures annually and living the dream of traveling the world with his wife. Chris is currently shaping WhatIsMyIPAddress.com into a resource for those concerned about online privacy, security and freedom. Connect with Chris: WhatIsMyIPAddress https://whatismyipaddress.com/ https://www.facebook.com/whatismyipaddress https://twitter.com/wimia https://www.linkedin.com/company/18200088 https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCtLYc0W0ZtDaqmi8Fu5gOZw Chris Parker https://www.cgparker.com/ https://twitter.com/chrispcritters https://www.linkedin.com/in/christophergparker/ 
7/17/20191 hour, 58 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 241 - How to Fast-Track Your Side Hustle Growth with Brandi Mowles of Brandi and Company

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Brandi Mowles, a Facebook and Instagram ads manager who grew her business from zero to six figures in just 10 months. She started her online business last year as a social media virtual assistant and soon discovered her love and talent for optimizing sales funnels and driving conversions through Facebook ads. Brandi is super passionate about helping service-based entrepreneurs scale to 5-figure months so that they can enjoy the financial and lifestyle freedom that she has earned. What I loved about Brandi - aside from learning a ton about what NOT to do with Facebook Ads - is that she’s so confident in her knowledge and her ability to help businesses be successful. And I think being confident in what you do combined with a great strategy for marketing yourself is the winning combination to being able to grow your side hustle quickly. Today we’re talking about: How Brandi went from being a stay at home mom to building a 6 figure business in just 10 months. Exactly how she found her first virtual assistant clients. How to respond to job postings online in a way that makes you stand out. How Brandi used LinkedIn to get clients. Why Brandi transitioned from being a virtual assistant to a Facebook Ads manager and how she built a reputation for herself as an expert. Why she’d rather spend $3,000 vs. $100 on training. The biggest mistakes people make with Facebook Ads (that I’ve totally made with mine in the past!) The one belief Brandi had to change about herself to get where she is today. That was such an awesome conversation, and I think back to my first 10 months in business and think, ohmigosh there’s no way I would have been able to do what she did. And it’s not because I didn’t have the knowledge or the skill, it’s because was not nearly as confident as Brandi is. But what I know now is that it’s just all in how I was thinking, and I think the biggest reward I’ve gotten from growing my side hustle is the personal growth that comes with it. And as I grow into the person I need to be to handle success, the success appears. So listen, if you’re looking to fast track your side hustle as a service provider to six figures without having to hire a team, Brandi has something special for you. On July 16th and 17th, she will be sharing the 5-figure framework that not only helped her scale to consistent 10K months but can help you do the same! Register for her free training here https://www.brandimowles.com/register My favorite quote from Brandi: “Stop consuming so much content and go market your services. You’re going to learn so much more by doing then by consuming.” Resources Mentioned in this episode: The LinkedIn Code by Melonie Dodaro Rick Mulready James Wedmore Brandi’s LinkedIn Training More About Brandi As a social media VA turned Facebook ad strategist, Brandi Mowles grew her income from $0 to 6-figures in just 10 months. In addition to running the service-based portion of her business, Brandi also helps other service-based businesses scale to 5-figure months so they can enjoy the same financial and life-freedom that she has. When she isn't creating a killer Facebook ad or teaching other service-based businesses how to scale, you can find Brandi hanging out with her husband and 17-month old daughter. Connect with Brandi Instagram: @brandiandcompany Websites: https://www.brandimowles.com/ + http://brandiandcompany.com/Free Training on her 5 Figure Framework: https://www.brandimowles.com/register
7/10/201945 minutes, 40 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 240 - From High School Teacher to Multiple-Six Figures with Micala Quinn

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Micala Quinn, host of the Live Free Podcast and a self-described work-at-home enthusiast, wife and mom who has become the go-to person for teaching moms step-by-step how to build a profitable freelancing business from scratch. I discovered Micala because my team member Laura, who’s a total mom boss herself, attended a one-day workshop with the host of the Boss Mom podcast Dana Malstaff, and Micala was mentioned in that workshop as someone who has seen massive success with her online business.  So of course, I wanted to invite her on the podcast and find out exactly how she did it. For you guys, not for my own personal selfish reasons... Today we’re talking about: How long it took her to get her first client and how she made it happen. How Micala was able to replace her income as a high school English teacher working just 15 hours a week from home. How Micala made time for her business while working and being a mom. Exactly how she transformed her business model from one-to-one and is now on track to make $500,000 this year. The best advice Micala ever received from her business coach (that you can implement in your business too). The email marketing analytics that Micala pays the most attention to and why you should track your metrics too. Why you don’t need a website to get started making money online. Micala’s best advice for you if you’re struggling to get traction in your side hustle. The one belief Micala had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Micala: “You’ve got to build it as you go.” “The number one thing you can do is market and connect with those potential clients from the beginning.” Resources Mentioned in this episode: Hire My MomThe Live Free PodcastBoss MomFreebies from MicalaMicala’s Instagram More About Micala: Micala Quinn is a wife, mom, online course creator, podcaster, and work at home enthusiast. Her mission is to revolutionize what it means to be a working mother. Micala’s online course is designed to launch working moms into the freelance world prepared, confident, and ready to make their mark. To date, more than 500 moms across the country & world have enrolled in Overwhelmed to Overbooked. In late 2018, Micala launched the Live Free podcast to spread her freelancing method and mission throughout the world. With more than 100 5-star reviews, the podcast has surpassed 40,000 downloads.  When Micala does jump off her WAHM soapbox, you can catch her walking to the park with her kiddos, making cookies, or watching a rerun of Friends for the millionth time with her cute husband, Colin.  
7/3/201945 minutes, 25 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 239 - May Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to my May 2019 Income Report! Every month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! Important Things That Happened in May I kicked off the month with a cold. I continued some personal habits that I’ve been working on, like weekly meal prep, daily journaling and planning. I completed my profile in the AccessAlly Experts Directory (even though I don’t have my full sales page done). I booked one new Done For You client, had a consultation with another, and finished up 2 other Done For You Client Projects. I continued working on my Growth University roadmap to validate my product idea. I ran another 5 Day Freebie Challenge to promote my Website Marketing Lab course. I continued creating the content for the Website Marketing Lab course. I pitched 10 new partnerships, worked on 13 partnerships (with either phone calls or executing the partnership). I accepted applications for my Web Designer Academy Expert Directory. We decided to wait til next year to build our house. Review of Goals So if you’ve been listening to this podcast for awhile, you know that my goal used to always be $10,000 a month so that I could pay myself $5,000 – and then have $2500 for expenses, and $2500 to set aside for taxes. Then I decided to actually do a Dave Ramsey-style budget every month, just like we do in our personal finances, where I project the income that I know for sure is coming in and the expenses that I know for sure are going out – including my 2 $2500 paychecks and taxes, so that I’m much more deliberate about my expenses and that I’m not freaking out at the end of every month, worried about whether I’m gonna have enough cash to pay my paycheck and paying myself late like I had been doing for several months. Because one of the goals that I set back in September of 2018 at the mastermind that I talked about in episode 177 was to cut my expenses down to the bare minimum I needed to run my business and build up an emergency fund – which is totally in alignment with my 2019 words of the year, which are FOCUS and CONSTRAINT. And May is really the first month that I saw the fruits of all of the changes I’ve made so far in 2019. WHAT I FOCUSED ON IN MAY So you may recall from my April income report that I launched my Website Marketing Lab course for the first time back in March.  It teaches you how to market your business online and get traffic to your website in authentic and algortihm-proof way. And then in my April Income report, I broke down my launch strategy and results so that you could replicate my strategy in your business. In May, I opened the doors to the Website Marketing Lab again, with the same 5 Day Freebie Challenge where I taught my method for creating a freebie that helps you grow your email list on autopilot, and then at the end, I invited anyone who wanted to continue on with the process of learning how to market that freebie to join the Website Marketing Lab. This time, it took me WAY less time to do the live challenge and the promotion, because I’d already done it once. I had everything already created, and I just had review the list of things I wanted to change after last time, then double-check everything and update dates, prices and links, and do the live trainings. This time it ran May 13 – May 17, and it was a freaking blast and a huge success!  I TRIPLED my conversion rate from 5 Day Freebie Challenge signups to Website Marketing Lab customers from my March launch. And I give all of the credit for that to the product validation process that I was taught inside of the Growth University training that I told you guys about in my April Income report. I would have totally missed some key things that led me to adjust my marketing and my pricing. I also give a lot of credit to the work I’ve been doing mentally on pricing after having conversations with some of the guests on Pep Talks for Side Hustlers like Paul Klein in episode 228, and Amanda Gallinger in episode 236 – and a conversation I had with my team member Laura after she attended a one-day workshop with Boss Mom Dana Malstaff. A comment she made to me when we were chatting about pricing gave me a nudge to test a new price point, and then an article I read from Ash Ambirge called Ten Urgent Lessons Women Need to Learn About Making Money (without apology). In May, I also continued working on creating the content for the Website Marketing Lab since I pre-sold it in March and then created the content week by week. When I launched, I was able to give the new students instant access to everything to move at their own pace instead of dripping it out weekly based on necessity rather than choice! And in addition to all of that, I pitched a bunch of new potential partners, fulfilled my end of some partnerships like doing bonus trainings for people like Becca Tracey for her Uncage Your Business Course and Suzanne Proska’s Elevate, Inspire and Build an Empire Summit, and talked to a whole bunch of new guests on Pep Talks for Side Hustlers – which is like, my favorite thing to do. On a personal level, I’d mentioned to you guys that I started listening to a podcast called Losing 100 Pounds by Corinne Crabtree. I’d heard about her on one of Amy Porterfield’s podcasts, started listening to her show and everything just started clicking for me – why I wasn’t doing what I said I wanted to do for the past 20 years when it comes to my weight, how to actually get started doing it, how to build habits, how to build motivation, how to be accountable to myself. In January and February to be 100% honest, I listened to the podcast and loved what I was hearing, but I was just dabbling. I wasn’t really implementing any of the free advice I was loving. Then in March, I started actually taking action and doing what I was being taught, every single day no matter what.  By May, I’d built some habits like weekly meal prep, planning what I’m going to eat every day before the day starts, and getting all my garbage thoughts out of my head and onto paper and working through them, and so far I’ve lost 17 pounds from my highest weight, which I logged at the beginning of December last year.  So you might be thinking, 17 pounds in 6 months, that’s not super impressive. That’s not like all the weight loss success stories you hear about where someone loses 50 pounds in 6 months. It breaks down to 2.83 pounds a month, or .7 pounds a week… But the most important thing that I have learned throughout this process is that it’s keeping my commitments to myself, creating a daily plan and following through on the plan OR not following through on the plan and diagnosing why I didn’t follow through and what I can do differently next time – those things, not what diet plan I’m on (which I’m not on one) are what is leading to weight loss that actually finally feels EASY and POSSIBLE – and I don’t care how long it takes to reach my goal. You can apply those same principles to growing your business too. What do you need to do to make it happen? Create a realistic plan. You’re not gonna go from working 0 hours a week on your business to working 20. But 1 hour a week from 0? That’s realistic. But it doesn’t feel like it’s enough, does it. So instead you do nothing. That’s what you need to overcome. Doing what is realistic, not what you think you SHOULD do. Then once you actually create the realistic plan, commit to following through on the plan. If you do follow through, why? Why were you successful? If you don’t follow through, why? What do you need to change for next time. It’s working for me in weight loss, so I’m gonna see how it works for me in business. And I mentioned in earlier income reports that last year we bought land with the intention to build a home, and we were pre-approved what we needed to make it happen AND stay in our home, but when it got through underwriting, in order to make it happen we’d need to bring a 30% down payment to closing instead of 20% BECAUSE when you go to get a mortgage and you’re self-employed, the bank will take the average of the last 2 years of your self employment – which for me is 2017 and 2018 – and in 2017 this business was still a side hustle – and it doesn’t matter what I made in my day job since I don’t have that job anymore – and I didn’t make nearly as much as I did in 2018 when I quit my day job – or what I’ll make this year. So instead of cleaning out our bank accounts to make it happen this year, we’re going to wait til February of next year when it’s a sure thing. And I’m totally okay with that – it gives me even more time to stash cash! So with all of that, here’s how much money I made and spent in May of 2019: TOTAL REVENUE: $10,384.80 Affiliate Income: $1571.30 Courses: $4431.50 Done For You & Consulting: $4382 TOTAL EXPENSES: $2274.74 Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here. NET PROFIT: $8110.06 BIGGEST LESSONS LEARNED Last month, I posted a negative profit of $224.15, which I planned for to give myself a clean slate, so it’s nice that I’m making up for it this month. I’m starting to make up for those paychecks I missed, and at some point this year, I’ll be able to take home more profit or invest in more help so that I’m really, truly focused on those revenue producing activities. I feel like I’ve got all of the pieces in place to start slowly scaling, and to grow into the person I need to become to handle the success that I dream of achieving. I think that’s like, the most important lesson I’ve come to realize overall – is that I’m not going to achieve what I want to achieve if I don’t work on becoming the kind of person who can handle it mentally and has the foundation and systems in place to support it. And now that I’m aware of that, I know exactly what to focus on to grow into that person. Thanks so much for listening, and I’ll see you right here next week! And if you need a website but have no idea how to get started, go to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day and sign up for the 5 Day Website Challenge and learn how to create a website for your side hustle.
6/26/201931 minutes, 41 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 238 - Building Trust via Email with Amazon-Bestselling Author Meera Kothand

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Meera Kothand, an Amazon Bestselling Author* and email marketing strategist who simplifies email marketing so that you can create a tribe that’s addicted to your zone of genius (even if email scares you senseless). I share the story about how I came across Meera on the podcast, but I’m so excited for you guys to hear this episode because we get into a great conversation on overcoming our fear of selling. Today we’re talking about: How Meera started her entrepreneurial journey How Meera overcomes the fears that comes with entrepreneurship Meera’s advice for self publishing a book on Amazon The importance of having a pre-launch before you launch The one thing that Meera would change if she could go back to when she first started her business How Meera would find pockets of time to work on her business while juggling raising her daughter The one belief Meera had to change about herself to get where she is today. Meera’s best advice for you if you’re struggling to get traction in your side hustle. My favorite quotes from Meera: “People need to trust you to buy from you.” “It’s not about doing more, but doing minimum viable. Do the minimum viable to get traction, but make sure your foundation is strong.” Resources Mentioned: Get Meera’s Free Email Marketing Course here. Books: The One Hour Content Plan* The War of Art* Steal Like an Artist* Podcasts: Jeff Goins Online Marketing Made Easy with Amy Porterfield Smart Passive Income with Pat Flynn *These are affiliate links. I make a small commission when you make a purchase at no additional cost to you. Bio: Meera is an email marketing specialist and 3X Amazon Best-selling Author of the book The One Hour Content Plan, Your First 100 and But, I’m not an Expert. She is also the founder of MeeraKothand.Com, an award winning site listed as the Top 100 sites for solopreneurs in 2017 and 2018. Her speciality: Making powerful marketing strategies simple and relatable so that small business owners can build a tribe that’s addicted to their zone of genius. She has been featured on Marketing Profs, YFS, Addicted 2 Success and several other sites. She believes that everyone has to define what their own version of success is, not what someone outlines for you. When she’s not working with clients or on her next book, you can find Meera reading the Rebel Girls Series with her 6-year old daughter. Pinterest: Pinterest.com/meerakothand Twitter: twitter.com/meerakothand
6/19/201955 minutes, 55 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 237 - How to Start a Side Hustle as a Virtual Assistant with Gina Horkey of Horkey Handbook

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Gina Horkey of Horkey Handbook. She’s is a married, millennial mama to two precocious kiddos from Minnesota. Additionally, she’s the founder of Horkey HandBook, a website geared towards helping others find or become a kickass virtual assistant. Gina’s background includes making a living as a professional writer, an online business marketing consultant and a decade of experience in the financial services industry. Today we’re talking about: How Gina made the transition to self-employed first as a freelance writer, then as a Virtual Assistant. How Gina rearranged her schedule to work on her side hustle. Why Gina decided to create a course teaching others how to build a successful VA business. How Gina stands out with her marketing, and some niches that VA’s aren’t currently targeting that could be great opportunities for you. Traits of an ideal Virtual Assistant Why you should make mistakes and embrace failure in your side hustle. How to figure out your hourly rate. Gina’s advice for someone who is struggling to grow their side hustle. The one belief Gina had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Gina: “I’m helping people realize their goals and their dreams while being authentic and real at the same time.” “Find your kind of people by showing yourself. Including your flaws, you’ll connect the most when you are authentically you.” “Position yourself [to your ideal clients] as an investment and not an expense.” “The mistakes and failures are where you learn the most.” “[Being] business-minded is a learned skill and trait.” “If you don’t dream big, you’re not going to get big results.” Connect with Gina: Freebie: 150+ Services You Can Offer as a VA Find a VA Social Media: FB: https://www.facebook.com/HorkeyHandBook Twitter: https://twitter.com/horkeyhandbook Pinterest: http://www.pinterest.com/ghorke LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/gina-horkey/ Instagram: https://www.instagram.com/horkeyhandbook/ YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/channel/UC49yIdhQohqDYtjSXfoh_Uw
6/12/201946 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 236 - Charging Premium Pricing from Day One with Amanda Gallinger

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Amanda Gallinger of Creative Business Collective, a marketing and business strategy expert who helps passionate creatives build profitable online businesses. What blows my mind about Amanda, aside from all the business-changing advice she’s about to share with you in this episode is that a few years ago, she found my free 5 Day Website Challenge and used it to learn WordPress and build all of her websites. I mean, she’s a massively successful business owner and I had no idea that she’d used my training to help her get a handle on WordPress! So she’d been on my mailing list for awhile, which I also had no idea, and then she replied to one of my newsletters one day and asked me to do a bonus training inside of her Soulful Selling course to walk her students through what they needed to do to get their websites set up - which of course I said yes - and then as I always do, I used an invitation to be on the podcast as a way to get to know her better and pick her marketing expert brain for you guys! My interview with Amanda left my head spinning, in a good way!! So typically when a guest comes on the show, I’m recording from the moment they hop on, we chit chat, I do a little countdown and then I introduce them and we just roll from there… But with Amanda, we hit it off so well at the beginning that we just rolled right into to it - so let’s go ahead and dive into my interview with Amanda Gallinger of Creative Business Collective. Today we’re talking about: How Amanda made the transition from corporate to self-employed How Amanda she helps her clients identify their zone of genius and helps them package it as a premium service. Why Amanda started selling her coaching packages at a premium price from the beginning (and how you can too). The one thing your website must have on it to stand out online. The number one thing that will lead to your success. Why hourly pricing isn’t good for your or your ideal client and what to do instead. What a “value ladder” is and how to use it in your business. Why you feel so busy but you’re not making any money - and how to fix it. Amanda’s 90 day rule and how to apply it in your own business. Amanda’s advice for someone who is just starting out and struggling to get traction. The one belief Amanda had to change about herself to get where she is today. My favorite quotes from Amanda: “What’s in your tool box that you can turn around and use to reinvent yourself?” “When someone buys from you, often times they are buying from you because they really like you and they want to be in your energy.” “When people pay, they pay attention.”
6/5/20191 hour, 11 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 235 - Why Your Side Hustle Needs a Podcast with Phyllis Nichols

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Today’s guest is Phyllis Nichols, a marketing, sales and podcasting expert and host of the Sound Advice Sales Podcast with Phyllis Nichols. I was trying to think of a way to describe how Phyllis came to be on the podcast, and I can only think of the world serendipity - an unplanned, fortunate discovery. I got an email from Growth University, the coaching program that I started back in March, and it said “Hey, Shannon, we have someone in our Partnership Accelerator program who serves a similar audience to yours, and so here’s the connection in case you two want to connect and see how you might be able to collaborate.” So we get a meeting set up, and we’re chit-chatting all about our businesses, our goals, who we serve and how we can help each other, and we’re getting a podcast interview scheduled and she asks me what time zone I’m in, and I’m like “Eastern time, Columbus Ohio”, and she goes “No way, where in Columbus?” And I’m like, Blacklick, on the east side. And she goes “No way, I’m in Blacklick too!” So not only are we in the same city, we are in the same suburb and we live less than 2 miles from each other! Phyllis Nichols’ of Sound Advice Sales and Marketing has been helping entrepreneurs build their businesses since 2009 by infusing sales strategies with a daily sales action plan. Her mission is to help you craft the most compelling message and offer and get it out to the world where your audience lives, and helping people start a podcast is just one of the ways that she does that. Today we’re talking about: Why it’s important to pay attention to what other people ask for your help with How to know if your business idea could be successful. The most important part of selling. How small businesses and entrepreneurs can benefit from starting a podcast. Some surprising statistics about podcasts, and why you don’t need to have big numbers to make a big impact. Some tips for how to start a podcast and a free resource for getting started. The one belief Phyllis had to change about herself to get where she is today, and Phyllis’s advice for someone who is just starting out and struggling to get traction. So head on over to http://soundadvicesales.com/ and you can get your hands on that podcast quickstart guide right on the homepage, and then I also was recently on Phyllis’s podcast, which was super fun - I’ll link that up in the show notes and you can also go to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/soundadvice and it’ll send you over to my episode on Phyllis’s website. My favorite quotes from Phyllis: “People want to hear from you!” On imposter syndrome: “I’m good enough. I can back up what I’m saying. I can back up what I’m offering.” “Trust your gut and your feelings.” “My advice: Ask for help, connect with others and ask for help and support” Links: How to Build a Website for Your Podcast Podcast Quick Start Guide Peptalk for Side Hustlers Shannon Mattern Talks Podcasting and Websites
5/29/201958 minutes, 4 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 234 - Achieving Financial Freedom and Flexibility with Eden Fried

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Eden Fried of the Rebel Boss Ladies Podcast helps women achieve financial freedom and flexibility by selling digital products online - and there are two things I love about Eden: One is that she loves to dive into real numbers - and not the big, splashy numbers we see that make us feel like we’ll never get there, but the beginner numbers. Like, how to make your first $500 and then how to scale from there. Two - she understands the importance of relationships and collaboration. Eden reached out to me and pitched a podcast interview swap, a tactic which I’m totally going to steal from her so if you have a podcast, watch out, I’m coming for you. But honestly, interviews are like, the best way to get to know a complete stranger when you meet them for the first time and then you get to spend an hour asking them pretty personal questions about their dreams, mistakes and fears. She got to come on the show and be grilled by me, and then I got the pleasure to be interviewed by her - so definitely go to edenfried.com/podcast or /itunes and subscribe so you don’t miss my episode with her (it’s not out yet) and while you’re at it, make sure you’re subscribed to Pep Talks for Side Hustlers and if you haven’t left a review yet, I’d really appreciate it if you could take a second to go to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/review and leave me a rating and review - that helps the podcast get found on iTunes. Today we’re talking about: How Eden was accepted to law school, but then decided not to go and instead created her own business. How she paid attention to questions her audience was asking her to create her first digital product. Exactly what Eden did to ensure her first digital product was a success. How Eden doesn’t believe in multitasking - and what she does instead. Why you shouldn’t create content for the sake of creating content. Why Eden started her podcast, Rebel Boss Ladies. The #1 most successful tactic Eden uses to grow her email list. Why you should find three people to follow, and focus on just those three people to reduce the noise The one belief Eden had to change about herself Eden’s advice for someone who is just starting out and struggling to get traction I’m so excited to announce that I’ll be speaking at Eden’s Rebel Boss Virtual Summit this summer! I’ll be talking about going from Side Hustle to Solopreneur: How to Leverage Digital Products to Replace Your Day Job Income While Working Full Time. So if you wanna make sure that you get notified when the registration is open and get your free ticket, go to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/rebel to get on the list and I’ll let you know when registration opens. And make sure you head over to edenfried.com and get your hands on her case study all about exactly how she made her first $1,000 online. My favorite quotes from Eden: “I just kept showing up everyday, even though I didn’t have immediate results” “If you’re so hungry for the profits right now, you’re going to miss a lot of the clarity you need for that focus” “If I see that something is working, I’m going to double down on those efforts and continue to make it work” “I am very driven on the one path and I don’t let distractions tempt me and pull me in other directions” “Do something with the time that you have, make it something that you actually enjoy.” “Putting yourself out there, not apologizing and taking action: That’s how you grow.”
5/22/201959 minutes, 21 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 233 - Using Pinterest to Get Traffic with Heather Farris

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Heather Farris is a Pinterest Marketing Strategist with a full-service Pinterest Agency dedicated to helping online entrepreneurs scale their businesses with organic and paid marketing. Her true passion is helping business owners like you craft a custom strategy to get your amazing content in front of your audience on Pinterest. She is always sifting through trends, data and pins to learn more about the audiences she is serving. She’s a multi-passionate full-time traveler with her husband and two little girls. Aside from traveling full-time with her family she loves learning how to use her camera in manual mode and finding off the beaten path restaurants to eat at. Today we’re talking about: How Heather started a blog as a side hustle that quickly turned into a full time Pinterest management business How Heather gave herself a goal to transition from side hustle to full time How Heather and her family now travel full time in their RV while Heather runs her Pinterest Management business What to do for a pin after you publish a new blog post The important metrics to look at to know what content is resonating with your audience How Pinterest is a search engine not a social media platform The niches that perform best on pinterest Why keywording your pins is the most important part of your strategy Why Heather didn’t niche down Heather’s advice for someone who is just starting out The one thing Heather wishes she had set up from the beginning (hint: it has to do with an email list) The one belief Heather had to change about herself My favorite quotes from Heather: “There’s something out there, greater than me, that is guiding me.” “Stop creating what you think your readers are going to like. Ask them what they want and give it to them.” “You have to ask for the sale. You can’t just assume they are going to book you because they get on the call with you. You have to go out and ask.” “It’s my business that is funding this journey.” Connect with Heather: Website: https://www.heatherfarris.com Facebook: www.facebook.com/heatherfarrisco Pinterest: www.pinterest.com/heatherfarrisco Strategy Call: https://www.heatherfarris.com/pinterest-strategy-session/
5/15/201957 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 232 - April Income Report & Behind the Scenes of my Website Marketing Lab Launch

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to my April Income Report! Every month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! Important Things That Happened in April We kicked off the Website Marketing Lab with a new round of students going through the 8-week program. Later in this episode I’m gonna break down my entire launch strategy for you and give you all the stats and numbers so you can see what that looked like. I started working on my Growth University Roadmap I completed the AccessAlly Advocate training. Review of Goals My goal for the month of April was quite a bit different from my typical goal of making $10,000 in revenue and paying myself $5,000 and setting aside the other $5K for taxes and expenses. And that’s because I made two pretty big investments in the future of my business in the first quarter of 2019: #1 – Becoming an AccessAlly Advocate for Nathalie Lussier’s AccessAlly membership plugin. That’s the online course plugin I use to run my Free 5 Day Website Challenge, my Website Marketing Lab and my Web Designer Academy, and it’s the online course platform that I recommend and implement for some of my clients. So basically I paid $1500 for a certification program, and I went through an 8-week training course to learn the ins and outs of the plugin. I completed the program, I’m waiting for my evaluation and then once I’m certified, I’ll be listed in the directory of AccessAlly experts for their customers who want to hire an expert to set up membership sites. I’m super excited about it because I really love the platform, I’ve seen huge success with it in my own business, and I know I’m uniquely positioned as both a web designer and someone who’s had great success with my own online courses to bring massive value to my clients. So that investment was a total no-brainer, I’m 100% confident that I’ll make it back and then some, but it was a short-term outlay of cash out of my bank account make it happen. #2 – Growth University The second big investment I made was in Growth University, a coaching program run by Bryan Harris from Growth Tools, formerly known as VideoFruit. The cost of the program at the time I enrolled was $5,000, and if you listened to my March income report, you know that I had a conversation with my husband about investing in this program, because it meant that instead of writing myself a full paycheck every month, I’d be shorting it by $1000 a month for 5 months to pay for this program, because my husband was a little iffy on me paying some random guy on the internet $5,000 for training (which cracks me up because my business is that I’m some random girl on the internet that people pay thousands of dollars to for training)! My husband is starting to understand that I do lot more than just build websites for clients I find online… Anyway, I opted for the payment plan option, but halfway through April I thought, I’d really just love to pay this off and be done with it and not drag it out, but if I do that, it means that I’ll have to short myself like a paycheck and a half. So again, I had that conversation with my husband, because really what I’m asking is for our personal bank account to pay for this training without it actually commingling our funds – knowing that I’ll do the work and do what it takes to make back the investment and then some. So we did. I paid off the Growth University investment in April, $4000. So, I think about myself in the early years of my business and my mindset around paying for coaching and training vs. my mindset now, and there’s a huge difference in my thought process – and my results. It’s not “I’m gonna spend money on this course and I hope this works for me, I hope I get the results they are promising…” It’s “I’m gonna spend money on this course, and I’m all in. I’m gonna make time for it, I’m gonna do all the steps and I have no doubt that I’ll get results because I’m not going to stop until I reach the goal I set for myself. And if I get stuck or need help, I’m going to ask for help.” Like, the way I used to think about it, it was like the results were out of my hands. And that’s why I kept thinking that things I was doing weren’t working. I’d try them once and if they weren’t a massive success, I’d declare it a flop and try something totally new. I’d think “That strategy doesn’t work, I gotta try something new.” But that’s totally not true, that’s just how I was thinking about it. And that’s not how I’m thinking about my Growth University Roadmap at all. The results are totally in my control. I’m thinking, “Everything I’ve done to this point has led me here, and my only job is to follow the plan we worked out together, and never stop until I reach my goal.” So you’ll see later on when I share my revenue and expenses that I had a HUGE outlay of expenses this month – something I may have thought about in the past as a risk that may or may not pay off. But now I think about them as a bet on myself, and those pay off for me 100% of the time. And they were planned, and I feel good about my decisions, and I am confident that I’ll reach my goals. What I Focused on in April So you may recall from my March income report that I launched my Website Marketing Lab course, which teaches you how to market your business online and get traffic to your website in authentic and algoritim-proof way. So in this income report I’m gonna break down my launch strategy and results for you so that you can do this yourself in the future. For anyone that’s new to the podcast, I have a free training called the 5 Day Website Challenge which teaches people how to DIY their website – and it teaches EVERYTHING. Like, all of the things that I do for my paying clients, I put that process together in a free training to teach people who are in the beginning stages of starting their business and really shouldn’t be investing in a professionally designed website yet how to do it themselves so they can start marketing themselves and getting clients. So I love web design, but websites are really a means to an end, and my real passion is online marketing, and creating websites that help people market themselves, and I love teaching all of those tactics to people, and showing them how to set up the tech to market themselves, because again, when you’re just starting out, you shouldn’t be hiring people to do this stuff for you because you’re testing out a lot of things, and so many things are going to change and you need that flexibility to be able to set that stuff up and make those changes yourself. So people sign up for my 5 Day Website Challenge, and they really just think of me as the tech girl, you know, their WordPress BFF. And the mistake that I’ve made in the past is to just jump straight from “here’s a free training to teach you how to build your website,” to “want to pay me to learn how to market yourself?” and there’s a disconnect. They either don’t look at me as their go-to marketing person, or they don’t realize that they have to market themselves because they think having a website will automatically bring them traffic. So I needed to do something to bridge that gap, the gap from having a website to actually getting traffic to the website, and the gap from thinking of me as your website person to thinking of me as your online marketing person. So that’s why my whole Website Marketing Lab launch strategy starting out with another free training called 5 Day Freebie Challenge where I taught my method for creating a freebie that helps you grow your email list on autopilot, and then at the end, I invited anyone who wanted to continue on with the process of learning how to market that freebie to join the Website Marketing Lab. So here’s how it worked – and I teach this strategy in depth in the free 5 Day Freebie Challenge – which by the way I’m actually hosting another free 5 Day Freebie Challenge on May 13 if you want to get in on it – just go to www.wp-bff.com/freechallenge or click on the link at the top of the show notes to save your spot. First, I have a bit of an advantage because I already have an email list, and last year I did a survey asking them what their biggest struggle has been when it comes to their business and what they want to learn next – and there were 2 things that kept coming up: how to market myself and how to get traffic. And I know that the answer to how to market yourself and how to get traffic is not what people typically think it is, like search engine optimization or blogging or social media. Those are tactics, not a strategy and I think that’s why people get so frustrated is because they go straight to tactics without having all the right pieces of the strategy. The answer to how to market yourself is building an email list, and the way you build an email list is by giving away valuable free content in exchange for an email address. And the way you get traffic is by sharing that free thing online with an irresistible call to action that makes people want to go to your website and get the free thing. And so I knew that what was going to move people from having a website and not getting traffic to having a website that gets traffic is to teach them how to create the freebie that they need to be able to execute all of the marketing tactics that are supposed to bring you traffic. And I also knew that the freebie is just one part of the overall equation, so I could deliver massive value by teaching them how to do that part for free, and then the natural next step for anyone that wanted to then learn how do all the tactics to actually get that freebie in front of their ideal clients would be to join me in the Website Marketing Lab. And if they didn’t join me, that’s okay too, they walked away learning a ton and they might decide to join the next time around, or tell other people about it. So to put together the free training, I outlined the 5 things people needed to learn to create their freebie, and then I decided I wanted to deliver the training live in a Facebook Group where I could interact with people and answer their questions instead of doing via email or prerecording it. I also created a workbook, because I wasn’t just teaching them concepts, I wanted the training to be really actionable, and I wanted them to walk away with something tangible – because I really wanted them to get a taste of what they’d be doing inside of my paid program. So here are the stats: I had 2500 people on my email list at the time. Starting about a week and a half before the 5 Day Freebie Challenge I sent out an email inviting my list to the free training. I sent three more invitations over the course of a week to anyone that didn’t sign up. I added a HelloBar across the top of my WP+BFFs site and my courses site so that any visitors there would see it and sign up. I totally forgot to put it on my Pep Talks for Side Hustlers website. I posted about it on Instagram a couple of times, and I created a pin on Pinterest about it, and I posted it in my Facebook Group a few times. And I mentioned it on a few podcast intros leading up to the start date. I didn’t run any ads for the training at all. I had 600 people sign up for the free training. So then, when people signed up, they got an email letting them know the details of the Challenge and what to expect, that I’d be sending them a workbook the day before the Challenge, and to join a special Challenge-only Facebook group that I created just for the Challenge. Then I’d go live each night at 7PM, and I’d send out the replay to them the next day if they couldn’t join me live. Out of the 600 that signed up, 350 actually joined the Facebook group, and I had about 40 to 50 people join me live every night, which was SUCH a blast. I taught my concept for 20 minutes or so, and then I spent the last 40 minutes answering questions. And by doing it that way, I learned a ton about what their needs were, and when it came time to invite them to join me in the Website Marketing Lab at the end, it was a natural next step for me to make the offer because I knew I was right on track, I wasn’t doing a hard sell, i didn’t feel like an informercial. Throughout the Challenge I let people know that on the last day I was going to let them know how to continue working with me, so it wasn’t like a bait and switch, and then I talked about the Website Marketing Lab at the end of Day 5, and then I also did a followup email sequence to everyone that signed up letting them know what kind of results they could expect by following the marketing roadmap I created for them inside the Website Marketing Lab. So out of 600 people, I had 8 new people join the program at $297 for the first month, and then $49/month ongoing – and that revenue was actually part of my March income report, it’s the $49 ongoing that you’ll see in this income report. And that’s actually in line with what I was expecting based on the price of the program. And then after it was over, I surveyed everyone who signed up but didn’t purchase and asked them what influenced their decision to NOT buy, and over 95% of respondents said that they wanted the program – and that their decision to NOT buy wasn’t motivated by price, which totally validated that I’m marketing it effectively, and that my price isn’t too high. So the key takeaways here are that when you can do something to provide massive value to your ideal client, but that’s also going to give you tons of insight on whether you’re on the right track or not, that’s always a good use of your time. I’m about to break down the revenue numbers for you in a sec, but I want to point out that when I sold the Website Marketing Lab, I hadn’t created any of the content yet. I did that for a few reasons – one, I’ve created programs before that no one purchased, and it’s a total waste of time. Two, doing a Live Challenge and interacting with the people I was going to offer my course to BEFORE I built it helped me make sure that I was creating exactly what they needed, instead of what I thought they needed. And three, it’s totally keeping me accountable to getting all the course content done, because that’s what I spent all my time on in April, was recording the modules I’d outlined, and setting them up in AccessAlly and releasing them to my students, week by week. And like I said, I’m opening up the program again in May and testing a different pricing structure –  with the added bonus for new students that all the content is done so they can work at their own pace! I’m also working on some new techniques to validate the pricing and my offer as part of Growth University so I can get that dialed in – because as those of you that listen to the podcast, I’m always worrying about my pricing. But when your students tell you they can’t believe what they’re getting for the price and that they would have gladly paid more, that’s a sign that you’re on the right track! So with all of that, here’s how much money I made and spent in April of 2019: TOTAL REVENUE: $6529.44 Affiliate Income: $1973.80 Courses: $1891.80 Done For You & Consulting: $2664.64 TOTAL EXPENSES: $6753.60 Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here. NET PROFIT: -$224.15 BIGGEST LESSONS LEARNED This is the first time I’ve posted a negative profit, but I totally expected it, so it didn’t throw me into a panic like it might have had I not started actually planning out a monthly budget before the month started, Dave Ramsey style. I have an extra $4500 in expenses in April due to Growth University and AccessAlly Advocate training, which I totally planned on and knew I wouldn’t be paying myself for the second half of April – but what I didn’t plan for is a Done For You web design client not paying their invoice on time, which is why I have negative profit in April. I did get that payment, just not until May. So right now, I feel like I have a total clean slate. Everything is paid for, I’ve actually reduced my baseline expenses significantly, which you’ll start to see in my May income report which means I get to take home more profit, or bring in more help or whatever needs to happen as my partnerships start to bear fruit and my email list grows and I get more and more successful students coming out of the Website Marketing Lab and Web Designer Academy, and I start booking more lucrative Done For You projects. So my biggest lesson learned this month – and it’s one that I know I’ve mentioned before but it keeps proving itself to be true –  is that how I think, and what I believe about what is possible, is 100% responsible for my results. It’s what drives my action or inaction. It’s not that I signed up for this coaching program or that certification program, it’s that I believe that I will do what it takes to take action on what I learn inside of those programs and that I know I won’t stop until I’ve reached my goal, and that I believe that it’s possible for me. And so if you can start cultivating that belief in yourself too, that you’ll never stop trying until you get what you want, then your success is guaranteed. So if you want to sign up for my next 5 Day Freebie Challenge, even if you’re listening to this months after it was published, head on over to www.wp-bff.com/freechallenge and save your spot in the next one – I’ll teach you everything I can pack into 5 daily lessons about how to create the kind of freebie that helps you market yourself online. And if you need a website but have no idea how to get started, go to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day and sign up for the 5 Day Website Challenge and learn how to create a website for your side hustle.
5/8/201949 minutes, 1 second
Episode Artwork

Ep. 231 - When to Start Using Facebook Ads in Your Side Hustle with Claire Pelletreau

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Claire Pelletreau is a Facebook + Instagram ads expert and host of the the Get Paid Podcast. I discovered Claire back in 2015 when I had just started my business and started to figure out that there was this whole world of online entrepreneurs helping each other learn what they needed to learn to actually get traction and grow their businesses online. I came across her in Becca Tracey’s Uncaged Lifers Facebook Group, saw that she taught Facebook Ads and I immediately picked up her Absolute Facebook Ads course. Not only is she a Facebook Ads expert who runs ads for her clients and teaches her students how to run successful ad campaigns for their clients, she also has a podcast called Get Paid, where she gets into the nitty gritty with some of your favorite online entrepreneurs to find out exactly what it takes to run their businesses online. What I’ve always loved about Claire is that she’s real, she’s honest, vulnerable and she tells it like it is - and I really gravitate toward people like that because I’ve made every mistake you can possibly make in trying to grow my business - especially when it comes to Facebook Ads - and what I find inspiring about Claire is that she’s made all the mistakes too, and she’s super successful because of it. And so as I’ve had more and more guests on this podcast to talk about their business journeys, what I’ve realized is that mistakes are a prerequisite for success. Not a single person that I’ve talked to, myself and Claire included, just nailed it right from the start. If you’re not out there trying things, underpricing yourself, and being nervous on consultation calls and launching products to crickets and screwing up your tech, you’re probably not learning, and you’re not growing. And we continue to make mistakes, and I think Claire already knows this, but what’s really changed for me is how I think about them. It’s what I make those mistakes and failures mean. So I’m really excited for you to hear my conversation with Claire about her business evolution and how you can get started using Facebook Ads in your business in a really effective way. Today we’re talking about: How a job loss pushed Claire to take her side hustle as a FB ads manager to a full time How Claire went to work for an agency and helped her get her confidence back after taking time off from her business Claire’s advice on pricing Why Claire is very clear on who her product is targeting When to start investing in Facebook ads Claire’s advice on the one Facebook ad strategy you can implement RIGHT NOW The importance of brand awareness Claire’s advice for what metrics to look at when you run Facebook ads Claire’s advice for someone who is just starting out My favorite quotes from Claire: “We want to help people but it’s not our job to help everyone” “Focus on the highest impact activities” “Just try to help as many people as you can with the problem you know how to solve really well” Bio: Claire Pelletreau is a Facebook ad and conversion optimization expert. She spends her days brainstorming ad strategies with her students, training a future generation of professional ad managers, and overseeing several thousands of dollars in client ad spend. She specializes in running ads that sell online courses, but will happily geek out with you on ways to scale every kind of business with paid traffic. Claire also LOVES talking about money - profit, loss, the whole shebang. She asks her guests how much they charge - and how much they earn - on her show, the Get Paid Podcast.
5/1/201958 minutes, 39 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 230 - Creating a Thriving Web Design Business with Sam Munoz

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Sam Munoz is a web designer who specializes in creating in high-converting, optimized, functional & beautiful WordPress websites and membership spaces - but what I really love about Sam is that her mission is to empower her clients. I absolutely love talking to other web designers about how they do business - and even if you’re not a web designer, you’re going to get so much out of this podcast because if you’re doing business online, at some point in your journey, you’re probably going to transition from DIY to done for you, and in addition to talking about Sam’s story and her business journey and pricing and finding clients and all the juicy questions I ask people on this podcast, we talk about what to look for when hiring a web designer to create a home for your business online that’s going to grow with you. Today Sam and I are talking about: What a “sustainable website” is and why you want one. How Sam took a leap of faith and jumped into the online business entrepreneurial world How Sam leveraged her online network to find her first clients How Sam went from being the jack-of-all-tech to finding her niche. The importance of teaching your clients what you do What to look for when hiring a web designer How Sam figured out how much to charge when she was first starting out How Sam balances family and her business, and establishes boundaries with her clients Sam’s advice for adding team members Sam’s best advice for someone who is just starting out I absolutely loved having Sam on the podcast, and you have GOT to go check out her Effortless Web Kits at www.wp-bff.com/effortless Yes, I’m a proud affiliate, and they are gorgeous, and they are genius. They’re so much more than just a theme. They work on top of the Divi theme, so if you’ve taken my Free 5 Day Website Challenge and opted for the Divi theme route, you already have what you need to get an Effortless Web Kit installed right on top of it. And if you don’t have the Divi theme, but you want an Effortless Web Kit you can switch to the Divi theme and layer than on. And if you don’t have a website at all and have no idea how to get started, definitely check out my Free 5 Day Website Challenge, I’ll show you how to get everything set up, and then when you get to design day, you’ll have the option to DIY your own design with my tutorials, or get one of Sam’s gorgeous designs and make it your own! Thanks so much for hanging out with us today, and I’ll see you next time! My favorite quotes from Sam: “The core purpose of your website it to function really well for your business.” “It’s important to understand the value you bring to the table and price accordingly - and not under-price yourself.” Bio: Sam is a Wordpress tech wizard & the creator of the Effortless Website Kits. After receiving a B.S. in General Engineering & exploring many passions, her heart and mind aligned to use her degree and experience unconventionally - through sustainable web development. Sam builds incredible websites and membership sites for her high performing clients & empowers business owners (both the technically inclined and not) to use the power of their website to convert visitors into customers. Aside from her obvious obsession with coding & computers, Sam also enjoys coffee, reading, snuggling, running and solo dance parties. Social Profiles: Instagram: https://instagram.com/hellosammunoz Facebook: https://facebook.com/sammunozconsulting Pinterest: https://pinterest.com/hellosammunoz Website performance quiz: https://samanthamunoz.com/quizwpbff
4/27/20191 hour, 5 minutes, 31 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 229 - Understanding the Financial Side of Your Side Hustle with Melissa Whaley

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! So it’s about two weeks after tax day here in the US, so by now you’ve probably gone through the tedious process of filing your income taxes. It’s the unglamourous part of online business that nobody really talks about. Sure, we all talk about the freedom, flexibility and financial independence that comes with being your own boss and owning your own business - but the flip side of that is that we’re also still responsible for all the boring and sometimes complicated administrative stuff that we also were annoyed by at our day jobs, like filling out expense reports and other tedious stuff like that. So when it comes to taxes, if you’re a side hustler, you’ve got that extra layer of reporting your side hustle income and expenses on top of your W2 wages, and then making sure you’re paying taxes to all the people you’re required to pay taxes to, like in my case it’s Federal, State and local, and I’m honestly never 100% confident that I’m doing it right. And I don’t know if you’ve ever had this experience, but the couple of times that I’ve tried to hire a CPA in the past, I left those meetings even more confused than when I walked in, feeling like I needed to learn a whole other language in order to follow the conversation and knowing that this definitely is not the right person for me if they can’t - or won’t - explain things to me in a way that I can understand. That’s why I’m so excited to bring you today’s guest, Melissa Whaley. She’s an accountant who works specifically with online business owners like us to help us understand the financial side our businesses without making us feel like total idiots in the process! I’m so excited to have Melissa on the podcast today, not only for my own selfish reasons because I’ve been doing my books and taxes on my own for so long and have always had this really uneasy feeling about whether or not I’m doing it right, but because Melissa’s just like us. She started out working at a large tax company, and she wanted the freedom, flexibility and financial independence that comes with running your own business - especially because she’s got four kids! But she saw a gap in the way her clients were being served, and she stepped in to fill it. Today on the podcast Melissa and I are talking about: Exactly how and why Melissa helps online entrepreneurs and side hustlers like us with our business financials and taxes. How Melissa took a skill she already had and turned it into an online business. The general rule for knowing when you need to start paying quarterly taxes when you’re still side hustling. How to look at your business finances in a way that makes sense as a layperson. What to pay attention to when it comes to your expenses. What to look for when choosing an accountant or CPA. How Melissa manages running her business as a wife and mother of four. Melissa’s best advice for growing your team. The one belief Melissa had to change about herself to get where she is today. Resources Mentioned in this Episode: www.MelissaWhaley.com The Legal Roadmap Podcast with Autumn Witt Boyd - Tax Strategies for 7-Figure Businesses Where to connect with Melissa: Melissa’s Instagram www.MelissaWhaley.com My favorite quotes from Melissa: “When you’re an expert in an area it’s not that you have everything memorized in your head, it’s that you know enough about the subject to be able to research and find the right answer.” “If you ignore your numbers for too long, that’s a recipe for your business to implode and for you to burn out.” “When you know the numbers in your business it’s really empowering. It really helps you make that next good decision to move your business in a positive direction.” "It’s important to be able to step back, evaluate where you’re at and where your business is at and say, ‘Ok I need to make these changes.’” “We want to have businesses that make us feel good and feel fulfilled and we are enjoying serving other people.” Bio: Melissa is a Virtual Tax Advisor for creative business owners. She helps demystify taxes for people who light up over their work and freak out over their numbers. She is a California native, married to her college sweetheart for 10 years and they have 4 awesome kids together. You can find her chugging iced coffee while geeking out over all things tax.
4/24/201952 minutes, 33 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 228 - How to Price Your Products & Services with Paul Klein of Pricing is Positioning

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! One of the things that always blows my mind about this online business that I’ve built is how it’s connected me with so many kind and generous people, but like, in the most unexpected ways. Today’s guest is Paul Klein of the Pricing is Positioning Podcast, and he and I connected through a YouTube tutorial I had honestly forgotten that I’d created all about how to get an Alexa Flash Briefing set up! Paul found my tutorial, set up his Flash Briefing and starting following me, and then he reached out and offered to share his expertise on pricing and positioning with you guys on the podcast - and knowing that this is one of the places that you guys struggle with - and I still wrestle with myself - it was an easy yes! So, I always like to tell you guys how I find guests on this show because I want you to see that everything you put out online, even if it doesn’t do what YOU expected it to do, has a ripple effect. I created that Alexa Flash Briefing tutorial at the time on the advice of my business coach, at the time when this podcast was only ever going to be an Alexa Flash Briefing, because there weren’t many people in the space it was an uncrowded place to emerge as a leader and get more traffic to my website. As it turns out, I’m waaay too long-winded for flash briefings, I need, like at least 30 minutes to say what I need to say, so I didn’t really do much more with Alexa. That tutorial isn’t sending me gobs of traffic like my frantic, scared, just-quit-my-day-job self thought, but it’s bringing me so much more value than I ever could have imagined by sending us awesome people like Paul! The other thing to note about that story is that if you have great value to offer, don’t be afraid to reach out and offer it to people who serve a similar audience! So today on the podcast, Paul and I are talking about: How Paul started a side hustle consulting business, quit his day job and pivoted to helping people move forward with their side hustle Paul’s three pillars of revenue Paul’s tactics and strategies for setting pricing Paul’s advice for someone who is just starting out How to shift your mindset about your value The three types of service businesses and how they work together to help you generate more revenue Paul’s advice for increasing your value The importance of providing pricing options to your customers Why you should change your focus from time-for-money pricing to value pricing Paul’s advice for someone who is starting their side hustle The belief Paul had to change about himself to get where he is today. Resources Mentioned in this episode: The Product Pricing Roadmap free PDF and video tutorial Webinar: FREE Online Masterclass on Tuesday, April 23rd at 1pm EST (10am PST). Connect with Paul: Web: www.paulklein.net or www.pricingispositioning.com Podcast: Pricing Is Positioning on iTunes, Spotify, and thanks to you Shannon AmazonAlexa. LinkedIn - https://www.linkedin.com/in/paulkleintv/ Facebook - https://www.facebook.com/paulkleintv Instagram - https://www.instagram.com/paulkleinTV/ Twitter - https://twitter.com/PaulKleinTV YouTube - https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCoQRkgXR4ClPAub12lXgPwg Some of my favorite quotes from Paul: “I looked inward to what was important to me, and that was what lead me to the entrepreneurship lifestyle, the freedom and the flexibility that comes with it.” “Take small courses of action each day, each week, each quarter and then at some point you can jump.” “People often undercharge or undervalue themselves.” “Your unique skills, story and experiences are your greatest value.” “Business is nothing more than solving problems for a profit.” “It’s not what you are charging, it’s the value you bring to the client.” “People buy outcomes, not time.” “Take that next best step that’s going to move you forward in your side hustle and your brand and quit looking at everyone else.” “Get in the game, jump in and get going!” Bio: Paul Klein is a business consultant and entrepreneur. Paul’s consulting services are centered on his areas of expertise in helping executive level professionals transition from their corporate or government roles to starting and scaling their own 7-figure consulting or freelance business. Paul’s experience as principal and chief executive officer (CEO) of a successful consulting firm and Co-Founder Owner of a software company positions him to provide practical common sense approaches to starting and creating your own consulting or freelance business. Paul has consulted and worked with numerous national and international brands, including: Target, Slack, UC Berkley, Cracker Barrel, Holiday Inn, KFC, Taco Bell, Yum Brands, JC Penney, Bebe, Dollar General, Sherwin Williams, Les Schwab, and more.    
4/20/201951 minutes, 3 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 227 - From Broke and Frustrated to $100,000/Month Blogging in Less Than 3 Years with Alex Nerney from CreateandGo.com

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! My guest today is Alex Nerney of CreateandGo.com. In 2016, after side hustling on their blog for about a year, Alex and his girlfriend Lauren McManus decided to go all in on themselves. They sold everything they owned, quit their full time jobs, and moved in with Alex’s dad in Seattle and became full time bloggers. So when I heard about Create and Go, I was on Alex and Lauren’s website, reading their story on their about page, which by the way, guys, is a really good story and I’ll link up that page in the show notes, there were two things that really stood out to me and made me want to invite them on the show: The first thing was this quote from the story: “We were blessed and plenty thankful for what we had, but there was one feeling we couldn’t escape. Is this really it? Really… Is this really IT??? Yeah, getting drunk on the weekends when you’re young is fun and who doesn’t love going to the movies for the bajillionth time in your life, but we couldn’t escape the feeling there had to be more to life than this.” And if you guys have listened to this podcast for awhile, you know that the exact same thing happened to me when I was sitting at my desk at my day job one day, this feeling of dread just washed over me and I was like, “Is this IT? Is this really all there is?” And so I felt an instant connection to their story. The second thing that stood to me (aside from the fact that Alex and Lauren grew their online business to over $100,000 a month - yes, a month - over the course of span of 2 years) is that they share in detail on their About page every single failure and misstep along the way. So I’m gonna stop here and let Alex tell you the full story in our interview, but what I really want you to take away from this interview is that you gotta try a lot of different things, you gotta make mistakes and learn from them and try something new, and just never stop because you eventually will find your way, just like Alex and Lauren did. So in today’s episode, we’re talking about: How Alex and Lauren quit their day jobs and went all in to run their health and wellness blog full time How Alex and Lauren leveraged Pinterest to gain traffic to their blog What content does best on Pinterest What common themes Alex sees that separates the people that become successful from the ones who flop The exact steps they took to monetize their first blog, Avocadu.com How Alex and Lauren build trust with their audience by marketing towards deeper values The importance of being honest with your audience Alex’s advice for starting a YouTube channel Alex’s belief that he had to change about himself My favorite quotes from Alex: “If people are telling you that you work too hard, you are probably on the right track.” “You have to give up things that are good for something greater.” “Growth in anything requires an obnoxious amount of effort.” “If you feel like you are a hard worker but you are wondering why you are spinning your wheels, these are solutions for you. These are real solutions that literally just take a hustler’s mindset and stickability.” Links mentioned in this episode: About Alex and Lauren Digital Marketer.com https://createandgo.com/ https://createandgo.com/how-to-start-a-blog/ https://createandgo.com/how-to-make-money-blogging/ https://courses.createandgo.com/p/launch-your-blog Bio: Alex is the founder of Create and Go, an online blog that teaches others how to start a blog and eventually make money blogging. Alex and his partner Lauren quit their jobs, sold almost everything they owned and went all-in blogging. Within their first year, they made $103,000 blogging. By year three, they are currently making over $100,000 per month online! And the best thing is Alex and his partner Lauren live their life completely on their terms! Facebook: https://www.facebook.com/createandgo.co/ YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/channel/UCOkrld1FHoM_VMMjaeMekug
4/17/201947 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 226 - Experimenting Your Way to Success with Sarah Morgan of XOSarah

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Today’s guest is Sarah Morgan of xosarah.com She’s a former side hustler turned freelance web designer turned online growth coach who helps people who want freedom, flexibility and financial independence create and grow their online businesses without overwhelm. After running a successful website design business, selling hundreds of blog templates on Etsy, launching ebooks + courses, and teaching over 7,000 students to growth their blog, social media, and email list, she’s learned a few things about where people get stuck/stalled/stressed out and how to get them growing again. Today we’re talking about: How Sarah started her online business selling e-books How she found clients when she first was starting out How Sarah listened to her audience to find out what they would like her to create The importance of having your own website, email list and blog Sarah’s marketing strategy to drive traffic to her site How Sarah schedules her tasks and days The importance of trusting yourself when it comes to your business Tips for taking better selfies (because I totally asked!) Sarah’s strategy for Instagram posting and engagement And be sure to head on over to https://xosarah.com/ and get on Sarah’s email list - she’s got some fantastic freebies for you. My favorite quotes from Sarah: “I’m very focused. I do just the tasks that are in my schedule and add everything else that comes up later in the month or week.” “I’m big on weeding out the things that aren’t bringing results.” “Experiment. Figure out if it works. If it does, keep doing it. If it doesn’t, cross it off and be done.” “You don’t need to do extra work that isn’t going to be a lot of value to your readers, your students, your clients.” “You gotta screw it up a little to figure out what works and find some success.” “Focus on the stuff that actually brings in results.” Links Mentioned in this episode: Email Marketing & Pinterest Tactics with Sarah Morgan - Thrive Episode 21 Bio: Sarah Morgan is an Emmy Award-winning digital strategist who’s been blogging and building websites since age 13. After escaping her corporate design job, she made it her mission to help bloggers and solo business owners grow their online presence without overwhelm slowing them down. Through coaching and courses, Sarah strives to help you simplify your strategies, focus on done over perfect, and find YOUR best way to connect, grow, and earn online. She shares all of her growth and productivity-boosting secrets at XOSarah.com and on social media @xosarahmorgan.
4/13/201941 minutes, 40 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 225 - March Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to my March Income Report! Every month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! My March Goals So in my February Income Report, I talked about how instead of just saying I want to make $10,000 so I can pay myself $5K and have $2500 for taxes and $2500 for expenses and then being frustrated every month when it didn’t pan out that way because it pretty much never does, I decided to plan ahead for a realistic month in detail instead. Just like I’ve been doing for years with our personal budget, Dave Ramsey style. Write down all the known expenses, think about what other expenses might come up based on what I’ve got planned for the month, and then write down all the known income that’s coming in that month and see how it all shakes out. And then I know if I need to do any extra promotion of my products or do some extra outreach to book a new web design client instead of just crossing my fingers and hoping that it all works out! I mean, I wasn’t actually doing that, I had revenue goals and expense targets, but honestly they always left me feeling totally out of control. So I still have revenue goals, and it’s still $10,000 a month now, with the goal to have that up to $15,000 by the end of the year, but now, I feel like I’m in control from the start of the month, and I feel so much more confident. And just like my food plan and my exercise plan, if it’s not on the plan, it can’t just be added willy-nilly. The Shannon that sat down and planned out this month had her reasons why she decided this all ahead of time, and it’s my job to honor that plan. If you want to learn more about this planning mindset, go check out the podcast Losing 100 Pounds with Phit N Phat – even if you’re not into weight loss, seriously, its really really good and you can just take everything she says about weight loss, substitute business or marketing and she’ll blow your mind wide open. What I Focused on in March In March, I kicked off the month speaking at the Thrive Conference for bloggers, which was so amazing. I got to see all the girls in my mastermind again and spend time with them, I got to present on Google Analytics and what metrics to shoot for when monetizing your blog, and I got to meet some of the listeners of my podcast and 5 Day Website Challengers in person, which is always so awesome and humbling every time I meet someone in person who I’ve helped build a website and start a business. Also in March, I launched the latest iteration of my online course, The Website Marketing Lab. I kicked it off with the free 5 Day Freebie Challenge where I taught my method for creating a freebie that helps you grow your email list on autopilot. Then after that 5 Day Challenge I opened up enrollment into the Website Marketing Lab, which teaches how to actually market yourself online in a way that feels authentic, how to find your ideal clients online, get them back to your website and eventually turn them into your best customers. My big focus in March was creating all the content for the 5 Day Freebie Challenge, marketing it and getting as many signups as possible. And I’ll break down my launch strategy for you with all my numbers and results in a future episode. The other thing I focused on in March were the few open Done For You client projects I had open. I shifted around my yoga schedule so that I’d have bigger uninterrupted blocks of time to work on those projects, and I moved as many meetings as possible to start at 3PM or later so that I could have more uninterrupted time during that day to focus on getting that work done as fast as possible. Also, the fruits of my Partnership Accelerator labor were totally paying off in March because I did a TON of guest interviews for this podcast, and you’ll hear those all throughout the month of April!  You may have noticed that I’m up to two episodes a week, Wednesdays and Saturdays, because I’ve had so many guests on the show if I spread them out weekly you wouldn’t get to hear from them til June – and they are SO GOOD, you guys, I don’t want you to wait to learn from all of my guests! Finally, I made the decision to continue on with the Growth Tools Team after the Partnership Accelerator, and I made a really big decision to invest in Growth University. And when I say I, I really mean we, because it’s one of those investments that’s more than just a normal online course, and I felt like rose to the level of having a conversation with my husband about it, because it’s very possible that in the short term I might have to pay myself a little less each month to cover it. So of course I took him to his favorite place to get craft beer, and then imagine telling someone who understands what you do for a living on like a very surface level – just like I know what he does for a living but I have no real grasp of the details of it – that you want to pay some guy you met online thousands of dollars to help you grow your business. So I’m answering questions like, “Okay, who is this guy?” “Bryan Harris from VideoFruit.” “How do you know him?” “Well, I heard him a few years ago on a podcast that I listen to with this other guy, Pat Flynn who’s the one that gave me the idea to start this business in the first place? I heard him on Pat’s podcast and I started following him, and taking action on all of his free advice and every single thing he ever recommended worked really well for me. So then I joined his Partnership Accelerator in January and that’s why I’ve been having so many interviews with guests on my podcasts and collaborating with all these people, and they invited me to their coaching program and I really, really think it’s going to be the thing that takes me to the next level.” And then he gives me like a long stare and is like, “I trust you, but I don’t want you to pay for it all up front just in case it turns out to be a scam.” And you guys, in that moment I felt such a wave of relief. Because this is unlike any other business coaching or program I’ve done. So when I enrolled, I had to fill out this like, super comprehensive form telling them everything about me, my business, my customers, my pain points, my goals and my dreams, my numbers, my revenue, and then they went away for a couple weeks and reviewed all of my stuff, and then came back to me with a personalized step-by-step roadmap of all the steps I need to take to reach my goal. Like, I don’t have to guess anymore. I don’t have to wonder if I’m doing the right things anymore. I know exactly what to focus on and where to put my time in order to get where I want to be. And the other really cool thing is that all of my students inside the Website Marketing Lab are getting the benefit of me going through my own process as I lead them through theres. It’s pretty awesome and I’m very excited about it – so I’ll keep you posted in future income reports. Total Revenue: $11,846.18 Affiliate Income: $1815.80 Courses: $5098.00 Done For You & Consulting: $4932.38 Total Expenses: $4714.32 Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here. Net Profit: $7131.86 Biggest Lessons Learned As I reflect on March, for I think the very first time, my online course revenue exceeded my 1:1 client project revenue, and that, my friends is SUPER exciting. That is totally my plan. I’m not abandoning my 1:1 client work, but I want the majority of my income to be from scalable sources and be consistent, recurring revenue every month that I can count on. And so I think I’m definitely on the right track. And like I mentioned last month how I felt like I was really getting behind, paying myself late and from money that’s really next month’s money to pay paychecks this month, that cash flow is easing up a bit. I’m still working a lot of hours simply because I’ve decided to take on all the client work instead of outsourcing so that I can improve my cash flow, because sometimes you gotta do what you gotta do, right? But the difference between now and last year when I burnt myself out overworking is that I’m making time for me. I’m working out every day, I’m getting good sleep, I’m drinking lots of water, I’m planning my healthy meals ahead, I don’t feel super stressed out all the time. The planning method my business coach Vicki Fitch taught me – I feel like it’s finally become second nature. I’m planning ahead, I’m showing up like a boss, I don’t always feel behind and like everything’s on fire, and I have a solid plan and roadmap ahead of me. And we’re only 3 months into 2019! My Website Marketing Lab launch was so much fun, you guys. Instead of doing a webinar, or just doing it all via email, I did a Facebook Challenge where every night for 5 nights I went live in a special facebook group just for this promotion, and I taught something about how to create a shareworthy freebie that helps you grow your email list on autopilot – and the engagement and participation I had in that group was like, mindblowing! It was a total blast. And then after those 5 days, I opened up the cart, continued giving feedback and teaching in the Facebook group and then anyone that wanted to continue with the next steps in the program joined the Website Marketing. It was one of the first programs and promotions, aside from the Web Designer Academy that just felt, right. Like, not everything went right, I messed some things up and whatever, but I felt totally solid in the value I was delivering and that’s in the program. And I’ve honestly always felt a little shaky on that with the other programs I’ve done, I think because I hadn’t framed a clear outcome for my students. And in the Website Marketing Lab we have a clear goal – your first or next 500 email subscribers – with really actionable steps to get you there. I can’t wait to do it again in May! But like I mentioned earlier, I’ll do a whole separate episode for you breaking down my whole launch process. So that’s it for my March income report, and I’ll see you right here next week where I’m talking with Sarah Morgan of XOSarah all about how to experiment your way to success.
4/10/201935 minutes, 44 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 224 - Monetizing Your Niche with Stacey Ogden of Side Hustle Teachers

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Today I’m bringing you Stacey Ogden of Side Hustle Teachers, who believes that being a teacher doesn’t mean that you have to be broke or burnt out. Through her Side Hustle Summer Camp, she helps teachers that want to start a business as a way to stay busy over the summer, or want a different way to pursue their passions, or are looking to transition out of the classroom altogether. Stacey’s business is a great example of niching down. She takes a topic that is very broad, like starting an online business, and instead of trying to teach it to a very broad audience, like entrepreneurs or women or mom, she blended it with her passion and her experience and then laser-focused it on teachers, which allows her to speak directly to them in a way that resonates with them. You can go check out her website, www.side-hustle-teachers.com to see how she does it, and if you know any teachers, share this episode with them! You never know if they’ve had the inkling that they’ve wanted to do something different, and Stacey might just be the guide they need to take the first step. She has a couple of freebies on her Resources page so you can choose your own adventure - if you already have an idea for your side hustle she’ll help you cultivate it, or if you have no idea what you want to do but you know you want to do something, she’ll help you figure that out. Today we’re talking about: How Stacey started a blog for moms then pivoted to helping teachers figure out how to start a side hustle How Stacey leveraged skills she had already (instead of trying to learn a bunch of new ones) to serve her audience. The importance of listening to your inner voice How she monetizes her blog Three different strategies Stacey uses to drive traffic to her website. The method Stacey walks teachers through to help them figure out what they want to do Her best advice for what to do if you aren’t getting traction in your side hustle What Stacey had to do to start really believing that she’s a legit business owner The one belief she had to change about herself to get where she is today If you’re an educator, or you know one, you can join the Side Hustle Teachers Facebook Group. Side Hustle Summer Camp enrollment opens on May 6, so spread the word to all your teacher friends and check out Stacey’s podcast too! My favorite quotes from Stacey in this episode: “What are some small tweaks I can make to make my audience’s life even easier - and make them realize that I totally get where they are coming from?” “You have so many skills that go into being “just a teacher.” Let’s hash those out. What are you not only good at but what do you enjoy?” "I wasn’t a teacher by trade, I AM a teacher. It’s just my nature. It’s part of who I am, like my DNA."  
4/6/201941 minutes, 49 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 223 - How to Get Exposure and Grow Your Side Hustle with Nagina Abdullah

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! I’m so excited to bring you today’s guest, Nagina Abdullah of MasalaBody.com. Nagina and I met through Videofruit’s Partnership Accelerator program, and the moment we started chatting I knew I had to get her on the podcast to share her inspiring story with you! Today we’re talking about: How Nagina took the results of a personal transformation and turned it into a successful 1:1 coaching side hustle Nagina’s biggest mistakes when she first started out & her best advice for someone who is just starting. The only pages necessary on your website when you go live. Nagina’s strategy for getting exposure for her business from day 1. Exactly what Nagina does to connect with her audience. The number one thing that helped Nagina execute on her side hustle while working full time and caring for her family. Nagina’s best strategies for finding time for her side hustle. How Nagina got over the fear of putting herself and her offerings out there. Get your hands on the Sweet Spice Cheat Sheet freebie Nagina put together for you at https://Masalabody.com/PT4SH and even if you don’t need to lose 15-40 pounds, go check out Nagina’s website, follow her on Instagram @masalabody and get on her list to get inspired by how she’s connecting with her ideal clients online!   About Nagina: Nagina Abdullah is a health coach for busy women and moms and founder of the website MasalaBody.com. Nagina has taken her business from $0 to $100k+ annually on the side of her day job by helping other busy women lose weight while indulging and eating more delicious foods. She has helped hundreds of women lose 15-40 pounds and shrink their waist. Nagina has been featured in Business Insider,  Health.com, Huffington Post and on Fox News. Quotes: “Get your thoughts in front of people. Get feedback, use it, make changes and keep getting better.” “Your goal is to get your ideas and your content out there. It doesn’t have to look beautiful.” “You have to be out there proactively, creating connections, trying to reach new people that you can partner with.”   Leave a Review!  Learn to build a website step by step with the Free 5 Day Website Challenge at www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day
4/3/201950 minutes, 22 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 222 - February Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to my February Income Report! Every month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! IMPORTANT THINGS THAT HAPPENED IN FEBRUARY I wrapped up Growth Tools’ Partnership Accelerator Program. I finished the migration from Infusionsoft to ConvertKit. I accepted a couple of small projects… I joined the AccessAlly Advocate Program I changed the 5 Day Website Challenge back from free for 30 days only to always free, bundled in the Website Copy Guide with the upgrade & raised the price. I started going live on my Facebook page every week. I booked a ton of guests on Pep Talks for Side Hustlers I booked a speaking gig at the Thrive Conference for Bloggers I took a girls trip to Colorado I announced the Web Designer Academy Expert Directory I started listening to a podcast called Losing 100 Pounds, recommended by Amy Porterfield, and it’s been a total game changer. Notes I found to myself in my planner: You are booked out this week, do not accept any more work. You are killing it this week!!!! You are booked out this week and next week. Do not accept any more work. My plan for vacation: let clients know ahead of time, put up an out-of-office, forward support requests to Laura. You are booked out this week. REVIEW OF MY GOALS Last month, I shared with you my revised income goals, which I’ll recap for you here… But before I do, I want to share with you something that I learned from listening to the Losing 100 Pounds podcast. The host of that podcast, Corrine Crabtree, talks about how the most important skill to develop when it comes to weight loss is doing what you say you’re going to do. And that requires two things: creating a plan, and then following that plan. And what I noticed about myself when I first started listening to her is that I resisted creating a plan for what I would eat and how I would exercise every day. It’s the same thing I did back in the day when my business coach wanted me to plan out my months, weeks and days. I wanted freedom, and felt like planning was stifling my freedom. Same thing with food. I didn’t want to “lose my freedom” But then when I committed to taking my biz coach’s advice and start planning, another interesting thing happened: The plan I created for myself could only happen in a perfect world, with all the stars aligned. I could never, ever accomplish my goals every single day. There’s nothing like never ever being able to reach your goals every single day to make you feel super frustrated all the time and compel you to make decisions that bring you instant relief, whether in business or with food. So as I look back on what I declared to be my January income goals, I see that I created my perfect, stars must be aligned and I must be all powerful to control the universe around me, unattainable plan. Which is: Pay myself first – $5,000 Increase my revenue from Courses & Done for You projects by $2500/month to cover potential end of contract. Build a cushion in my business savings of $10K ($833/month) $2500 Expenses $1500 Taxes Because when I look back at the past year of expenses, I’ve rarely capped them at $2500. Every single month is a little bit different. Increasing my revenue by $2500 a month ain’t gonna happen overnight. And that savings cushion I’d like to build, setting aside $833 a month? It’s already the end of March as I write this income report and it hasn’t happened for the past two months. So from this income report on, instead of creating one, big perfect goal and practicing being frustrated when I don’t hit the target every month, instead, every month I’m going to create a plan for revenue and expenses based on past history and reality. Yes, it’s important for me to pay myself first. And it’s really important for me to pay my quarterly taxes, and pay all of my expenses and never go into debt. But it’s also important for me to practice creating a REALISTIC plan and follow that plan instead of creating a PERFECT plan knowing it’s never gonna happen the moment I close my laptop. So I do have a general revenue goal in the short term of $10,000 a month, and in 12 months I’d like to have that bumped up to $15,000 a month. And I’ll share with you exactly how I plan to accomplish that in future income reports. WHAT I FOCUSED ON IN FEBRUARY I designated February as a List Building Month, and I also focused on completing the Infusionsoft to ConvertKit Migration, and I did LOTS of client work, lots of podcast interviews and lots of pitching. TOTAL REVENUE: $9197.15 Affiliate Income: $1401.70 Courses: $2269.00 Done For You & Consulting: $5,526.45 TOTAL EXPENSES: $3289.57 Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here. NET PROFIT: $5907.58 BIGGEST LESSONS LEARNED   So when I added up all the numbers for February and saw that I made around $9000, it actually surprised me because February just felt really, really tight cash flow wise. Because if you look at the numbers, revenue minus expenses, paying myself first my standard paycheck amount of $2500 twice a month and then setting aside money for taxes, I’m actually just robbing Peter to pay Paul, as my mom would always say when we were growing up and she would sit at the dining room table to do the bills. I totally recognize that I’m paying my paychecks to myself for the prior month when the cash comes in the current month. That, my friends, is not sustainable, and trust me, I see what the future holds if I continue on this path. While I’ve cut some big expenses that weren’t giving me returns, I also totally recognize that I’ve made some investments in my business that take cash out of my pocket in the short term that I expect to get a return on in the future, including two copywriting courses that have been total game-changers for my marketing copy for my paid programs and sales pages and have already given me a return, and the AccessAlly Advocate Program – which is a certification program for Nathalie Lussier’s AccessAlly Membership Site & Online Course plugin, which in my experience is like, hands down the best membership PLATFORM, not just plugin, out there if you’re serious about generating revenue through courses and membership sites. The certification is $1500, and once I complete the certification I’ll be listed in their expert directory as someone certified to build sites with AccessAlly for all her awesome clients that want it done for them – plus I’ve totally got other plans to leverage that certification. So I had to make a decision in February when I booked another 1:1 Done For You project that I was going to do the job myself and not outsource any of the work so that I could keep the fees and stabilize my cash flow. And for a couple of other small projects that I’d taken on, that I mentioned in last month’s income reports, I decided that I needed to just put in the extra hours to finish up the work myself so I could keep the fees and make ends meet. So I’m back up to around 60 hours a week at the moment… and if you recall back in episode 199 with millionaire business owner Bernadette Doyle who challenged me to start tracking my time and to figure out how to work 25 hours a week if I really wanted to work less… I’ll just say this – I’m doing what I need to do at the moment to get where I want to be, and I don’t expect this to be a long-term overwork burnout situation like I found myself in last year…. It’ll be interesting to review this income report in a few months to see how this pans out!! And I expect my cash flow to improve starting in April. Something that was also weighing on my mind in February was getting my taxes done! I had this really unsettling feeling all year that I wasn’t paying enough in quarterly taxes, being that it was my very first year of self-employment combined with all of the tax code changes that were coming into play. So I was really eager to get everything together and do my taxes. We’ve always done our own taxes which when I tell people that they find it alarming or crazy, but fun fact – back in my early 20’s, I sold Mary Kay cosmetics. I was terrible at it, but that’s beside the point. We had the opportunity to get extensive training on bookkeeping and taxes, recordkeeping, keeping business and personal finances separate and filling out our schedule C at tax time and what’s deductible and what’s not… I feel like that education on the administrative side of having your own business was super valuable, and even though network marketing and MLMs are not for me, I’m really grateful for having learned that stuff and its really benefitted me now. So anyway, we did our taxes and I was super relieved to discover that I pretty much hit my quarterly estimates on the nose and I didn’t owe anything more for 2018, and now I’ve got a full year on my own to look at as a benchmark for what I need to set aside in 2019. We’re also building a house. We bought 4 acres in the country last May, and having our taxes done was crucial to figuring out timing of when we can get a construction loan to start building. Another thing about being self-employed is that lenders look at the past two years of business income (not revenue, but what I paid myself after taxes and expenses). For my husband, it’s like, oh, just bring us your last two pay stubs. So I’m not sure that my business income from 2017, when my biz was still a side hustle and I had a TON of expenses paying subcontractors to do things I didn’t have time to do because I was working full time – combined with 2018 is enough to get a construction loan/mortgage. So stay tuned to find out if we’re breaking ground in 2019 or if we’re waiting til 2020. The really exciting thing about February was all the guests that I had the opportunity to interview on this podcast, and those interviews are being released every week on the podcast. I’m talking to so many inspiring entrepreneurs that energize me and keep me excited and engaged and moving forward and have such good advice not just for you guys, but for me too! So that’s been a blast. And finally, I took some time off to spend a long weekend in a cabin with two of my best friends that I’ve known since I was 8 years old – and if you’re keeping track, that means we’ve been friends for 31 years. And each of us brought some of our friends and the six of us just had an awesome time talking, cooking, laughing, and relaxing. Work hard play hard, right? So as I look back a year to how I felt this time in February 2018 vs. now, I think I feel just as determined as ever to continue to grow my business. But it’s different now, one year in. My determination isn’t clouded by fear anymore. It’s backed by confidence. I have a lot of experiences and data from the past year to look at to help me make decisions this year. But most importantly, I believe in myself just as much as I did back when I started my side hustle. I knew from the moment I started that I would make it my full time job. And I did. Maybe not as fast as I wanted to and maybe not the way I thought it would, but I made it happen. And I also know that I’m going to get my cash flow under control, get ahead and meet that next goal. And I’m okay with not knowing exactly how or when. Certainty is a wonderful feeling.
3/30/201936 minutes, 34 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 221 - Starting a Side Hustle from Scratch with Kristin Rappaport

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Kristin Rappaport started her side hustle after 15+ years working full time in the design and marketing industry. After starting a mom blog, Kristin saw the need to teach bloggers and online entrepreneurs how to create better graphics. On her website ApplecartLane.com, Kristen teaches fellow bloggers, online business owners, entrepreneurs, mompreneurs, solopreneurs, and digital creatives the basic of graphic design so they can finally feel confident about their graphics and visual content. Sign up for Kristin’s Free Graphic Design Mini Course* here. In today’s episode, Kristin and I talk about: How there is an element of design attached to pretty much everything online Why it’s important to be open to pivoting from your original business idea The importance of committing to show up, set goals and listen to your audience Making a your business a priority first when in the building How to stay focused and accomplished while pursuing big goals How work life balance IS possible How to raise visibility for your new business. What to do with your email list! Why no subscriber is a bad subscriber The #1 belief Kristin had to change about herself to get where she is today. Bio: After 15+ years working full time in the design and marketing industry, I started my own side hustle where I teach fellow bloggers, online business owners, entrepreneurs, mompreneurs, solopreneurs, and digital creatives the basic of Graphic Design so they can finally feel confident about their graphics and visual content. When I'm not teaching design and growing my online business, you'll find me hanging out with my family, getting sucked into Pinterest, creating magical birthday parties, crafting and living that #momlife. Leave a Review!  Learn to build a website step by step with the Free 5 Day Website Challenge at www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day  
3/27/201953 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 220 - Four Things Successful Bloggers & Business Owners Have In Common

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Find out more about the Website Marketing Lab at www.websitemarketinglab.com In this replay of a Facebook Live I did, you'll find out what I think about Facebook and Instagram going down for 24 hours, what I really think about Instagram influencers and the 4 things I've noticed that successful bloggers and online business owners have in common. You can catch me live every week and ask your questions - just go to Facebook.com/wpbffshannon to follow me and get notified when I'm live!
3/23/201948 minutes, 38 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 219 - How to Start Getting Clients with Rebecca Tracey

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Rebecca Tracey of the Uncaged Life helps people break out of their cages, and free themselves from jobs they hate, bosses who won’t let them take time off, and work that has them staring at the clock, just counting down the seconds til they can GTFO!! Becca has worked with hundreds people to help them dial in their businesses so that they can quit their jobs and do their own thing, follow their passions, and live an uncaged life. She’s one of the first people I discovered in my journey to GTFO of my day job, and following her advice has always moved me forward, so I can’t wait to share this interview with you all today!  In my interview with Becca, we dig deep into: Her best advice for what to focus on (and what to ignore) when just starting out Why clarity in your business and your offering is so important Why you should start working with clients before you feel ready What parts of your business you really need to have in place to get clients The importance of doing market research and making sure your message is clear The tactics Becca used to engage with her audience and build her community Becca’s tips for pitching podcasts The belief Becca had to change about herself to get where she is today. To find out more about Uncage Your Business, go to https://www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/uncaged*   Join the Uncaged Lifers Facebook Group here. And go get Becca’s 3-Month Business Building Checklist and get your business off the ground the right way at https://theuncagedlife.com/ Connect with Becca on Instagram @rebeccatracey Quotes: If you can’t clearly explain to someone what you do in a sentence, then you probably aren’t clear enough. You can run a business in a way that works for you, you just need to create the business that will let you do that. *This is an affiliate link. I may earn a commission if you choose to make a purchase. I only recommend products and services I’ve spent my own money on and love! Some of these links are affiliate links. You pay the same whether you use my affiliate link or not, and the commissions I earn from your purchases help me to keep the 5 Day Website Challenge free. So thanks in advance for your support!   Bio: Rebecca Tracey is the head/only honcho at The Uncaged Life where she works with online business owners to get clear on their brand message, create packages that sell, and helps them learn what it actually takes to get and keep clients in this crazy online world (all while working from home with no pants on). She started her business while living in a van, and loves rock climbing and riding her bike around Toronto with her dog Rhubarb on her back. Find her at TheUncagedLife.com Leave a Review!  Learn to build a website step by step with the Free 5 Day Website Challenge at www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day
3/20/201948 minutes, 38 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 218 - #1 Monetization Metric to Pay Attention To in Your Side Hustle

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! This episode is a recording of a Facebook Live I did all about the most important metric to pay attention to if you intend to monetize your blog or website. You can catch me live every week and ask your questions - just go to Facebook.com/wpbffshannon to follow me and get notified when I'm live!
3/16/201948 minutes, 38 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 217 - Overcoming Anxiety in Your Side Hustle with Wendy Breakstone

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Wendy Breakstone is a seasoned Business Systems Mentor with more than 18 years of experience helping entrepreneurs grow and scale their businesses. Today we’re talking about Wendy’s entrepreneurial journey that includes working for a best-selling spiritual author, owning and managing a 6-figure web development and marketing consultancy, to expanding her own business expertise working at companies like Fuze and GoToMeeting. How to deal with the risk and emotions of being a new entrepreneur Wendy’s advice for not getting burned out in your entrepreneurial journey How setting up systems can help declutter your brain Wendy’s advice for avoiding shiny object syndrome A simple way you can make more progress daily. How having an online calendar system can save you time. How online systems help you set boundaries and empower your clients. Wendy’s favorite Asana tip How purpose and passion play a role in being a successful entrepreneur How defining your focus can help grow your businessHow to embrace your anxiety in business. Today Wendy focuses on mentoring entrepreneurs that need to remove the bottlenecks in their business by guiding them through creating and implementing systems and strategies for long-term, scalable success. SHOW NOTE LINKS: 1. Forbes Article on Entrepreneurial Mental Health: https://wenb.me/forbes-article 2. PLAN FOR SUCCESS WORKBOOK (free download): https://wenb.me/workbook 3. Stress-Free Scheduling with Acuity  https://wenb.me/acuity-training 4. WEBSITE: https://wendybreakstone.com 5. INSTAGRAM: https://www.instagram.com/wendybreakstone Leave a Review!  Learn to build a website step by step with the Free 5 Day Website Challenge at www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day
3/13/201947 minutes, 38 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 216 - Need a Website? Listen To This First

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! This episode is a recording of a Facebook Live I did all about why I teach you to build a website the way I teach it in the 5 Day Website Challenge and the marketing strategy behind all the things I show you how to set up.
3/9/201948 minutes, 38 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 215 - Monetizing Your Story & Experience with Katie O'Grady

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Today I'm talking with Internationally-Acclaimed Author & Relocation Consultant Katie O'Grady is a 4th generation San Diegan who together with her retired firefighter hubby and their now 14-year-old twins immigrated to Mexico in 2012. We discuss: Why Katie and her family decided to leave the rat race and move internationally How Katie went from a blog with 12 subscribers to creating a relocation consulting business Her evolution of wanting to be a writer and sharing her story to now helping other relocate The importance of having a keyword rich title over a pretty or clever title How Katie deals with the negative comments once her blog was opened up to a larger audience Why Katie feels it’s important to write in her authentic voice How putting her blog into a book can serve her audience Why Katie focuses on the social media platform that works best with her style and her audience The importance of sharing with your followers what has worked and what hasn’t worked in your journey Katie’s advice to a new blogger just starting out The importance of showing up consistently and with authenticity How her relocation consultancy was born after one email asking for help How you don’t have to have all the answers, but a willingness to find the answers How Katie finds the confidence within herself to keep moving forward when she feels overwhelmed  Connect with Katie at www.losogradysinmexico.com Leave a Review! Learn to build a website step by step with the Free 5 Day Website Challenge at www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day
3/6/20191 hour, 25 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 213 - Corporate School Dropout with Lauren Allen

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Lauren Allen of the Corporate School Dropout Podcast and Right Hand Business Coaching considers herself a corporate full-time job survivor, who knows what it’s like to choose the life you want over an office and schedule you hate. I met Lauren inside Pat Flynn’s Power Up Podcasting Course (which is where I learned the ins and outs of podcasting), and couldn't wait to get her on the show! Lauren works with people who want to drop out of corporate, who have a dream business, and are tired of waiting and doubting whether it will work. She gives people a clear plan of action, and helps them clear away uncertainty and helps them get life out of their way. Today we’re talking about: How Lauren dropped out of the corporate world, moved to San Diego and started her own business How Lauren took her corporate project manager skills, pivoted to a different audience and created her business How to take action to overcome the fears of figuring out what you don’t know Lauren’s definition of a corporate school drop out How Lauren structures her schedule to better manage her time The importance of allowing enough time for the fear of putting yourself out there How clearing physical clutter can help with mental clutter The daily podcasts Lauren listens to The advice Lauren would give someone who is struggling to grow their side hustle The importance of narrowing down your focus and doing one or two things really well You can find out more about Lauren and Corporate School Dropout at www.corporateschooldropout.com Did you like today's show? Leave a Review! It helps me reach more people on iTunes :) Need a website? Head on over to www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day and sign up for the Free 5 Day Website Challenge and I'll show you step-by-step how to build a website for your side hustle.
2/27/201950 minutes, 12 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 212 - January Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to my January Income Report! Every month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! IMPORTANT THINGS THAT HAPPENED IN JANUARY I started Growth Tools’ Partnership Accelerator Program. I started the migration from Infusionsoft to ConvertKit. I created the Website Copy Guide I completed all the content for my Web Designer Academy I booked two new Done For You clients I continued tracking my time in Toggl   Notes I found to myself in my planner: You are fully booked this week. “I have another commitment” *What can I delegate?” *You can handle the busy schedule this week. Hold tight to your mornings and coach yourself through the overwhelm. Make time for self-coaching, Partnership Accelerator, ConvertKit Migration. You are booked out this week. Do not accept any more work. You are booked out this week, do not accept any more work.   REVIEW OF MY GOALS Now that I have a year of self-employment behind me, I’m revising my income goals. In 2018, my income goals were: $5000 – Income to cover my old paycheck. $2500 – Expenses $2500 – Taxes In 2019, my income goals are: Pay myself first – $5,000 Increase my revenue from Courses & Done for You projects by $2500/month to cover potential end of contract. Build a cushion in my business savings of $10K ($833/month) $2500 Expenses $1500 Taxes WHAT I FOCUSED ON IN JANUARY I designated January as my Prep and Build month. TOTAL REVENUE: $9811.56 Affiliate Income: $1804.00 Courses: $2760.75 Done For You & Consulting: $5264.81 TOTAL EXPENSES: $4043.80 Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here. NET PROFIT: $5767.76 BIGGEST LESSONS LEARNED The biggest lesson I learned in January is that you just gotta ask for what you want, focus on delivering value and results, and be totally okay with a no. This came up for me in two ways in January. I mentioned earlier that I joined Bryan Harris’s Partnership Accelerator, which is a 4-week intensive workshop all about finding potential partners and pitching them. I joined it because I’m focusing on growing my email list this year, and collaborations with people who serve a similar audience are one of the best ways to do that. And I’ve known this for quite awhile. But something has been holding me back from doing it – it’s like that resistance I mention back in episode 22, like how I know I need to stick my neck out and do something based on not wanting to do it. And putting my money where my mouth is always works for me. If I pay for something, I’m going to show up and do the work and get over my crap. So that’s what I did. And by the end of 4 weeks, I’d gone from feeling my heart race and my palms sweat before hitting the send button on my first pitch to a potential partner to feeling like I knew the perfect thing to say to get a response and start building a relationship. And from having 0 partnerships because I was scared to ask – to getting 5 yesses, 3-ask-me-laters and 2 non-responses (yet). What I’ve learned about myself is that I can get really wrapped up in being worried about what people think about me. So instead of making it all about me and my self worth, I’m looking at all of this as an experiment. I’m going to try a bunch of things – coming from a place of integrity and delivering value and results first – and analyze the results and see what works and what doesn’t instead of thinking that I’m either amazing or awful depending on the results. The second way being willing to ask for what I want came up for me in January is related to billing for my time for small web design projects. I’m looking at an uncomfortable reality now that I’m tracking my time with Toggl… And when I write uncomfortable, I mean, I’ve got a pit in my stomach and tightness in my chest as I write this. Because I have to admit this to myself, and I’m worried about what you’ll think of me. But here goes… Last month, I mentioned in my income report how small projects didn’t make the cut of services I’m offering. Yet here it is, mid-way through February as I’m writing this income report and my planner is dotted with small projects that I’ve said yes to. All fine and good, but here’s what I discovered after looking at my Toggl time-tracking reports: Example: I spend an hour talking to a potential new client about a project, give them client an estimate of 2 hours to complete the project, send over an invoice, it gets paid and I reserve a spot for the work on my schedule. I spend another hour gathering what I need from the client to work on it and planning the work, and then spend 2 hours working on it. Another hour meeting with the client to review the work, and then another hour of revisions, and another 30 minute meeting to wrap things up. I’ve charged the client for 2 hours for the actual development work, and I’ve spent over 4 times that much on the project. So I’m actually charging only ¼ of my hourly rate – which is less than what I was making at my day job. No wonder I’m so “busy”. And when I outsource any overflow work to subcontractors and pay them, I actually make close to nothing. In January alone – just look at the numbers – they don’t lie. $2369 in the door in Done For You projects, $2099 out the door to subcontractors. Why am I doing this? Why am I not charging for my time? Like, I’m not even trying to and being told no. Here are all the thoughts that go through my head: What if people can’t afford my rates? I feel bad charging that much. All of this is easy for me, it’s like second nature to me, I can’t really charge that much, can I? Shoot, I said it would take 2 hours but I totally didn’t anticipate X, now I have to eat that, don’t I? It’s not their fault I estimated wrong. I don’t have time to do this, but I said yes so I need to outsource it – I’m going to make $0 on this job. Who am I to charge X for this? And this isn’t a new problem for me. This is the exact mindset struggle I had when I first started freelancing, and it pops up for me ALL THE TIME. And for my full web design package? I FINALLY dialed that in and made it profitable. And it took A LOT of mindset work. But there’s still plenty of work for me to do there because I provide a lot of unpaid support after the project is over. And it’s not like my clients balk at paying me – I just don’t ask them to. Why am I afraid to charge for the time I’m actually spending on these projects, not just the development time? And why don’t I value my skillset? Like, if I needed to have surgery, wouldn’t I want the surgery to feel easy and like second-nature to my surgeon? Wouldn’t I want to pay for that level of experience? Yes, I realize I just compared WordPress to surgery, but you know what I mean… Here’s what I know about myself – I will deliver results. No matter what. One of my WordPress colleagues said recently, “I can never leave a mystery unsolved.” And I can’t even describe how much that statement resonated with me. And I also know that with WordPress, there’s almost always a way to solve any business or tech problem. But I’m terrible at estimating the amount of time it will take me. Wait, scratch that. That’s not true. I’m terrible at telling the truth about the amount of time it will take me, because I’m afraid to say those bigger numbers out loud. What if you tell me it’s too much? What if you yell at me? What if we have to NEGOTIATE!!? I tell my Web Designer Academy students: “Think about how long it will take you to do this, and then double it. And that’s what you charge. And then the first time you do it, track your time because you may be totally off, and that’s okay you’ll know for next time.” And then when it comes to my own projects, I don’t take my own advice!! And to be 100% transparent, it’s because I think my hourly rate is too high and if I have to double it then my clients won’t be able to afford me and then they’ll be left hanging. Yeah, like I’m that important. And like I’m the only one in the world that can help them. Ugh. I told you… you might not like me after reading this article. But those are the for-real thoughts that pop into my head! Sometimes I feel like I’m just bad at business. And it’s easier to sell courses and memberships and large packages than have to address this problem. Anyway. This has been a problem for me for over 3 years, and I’ve done nothing about it. Except complain about it in my head. I’ve blamed my old day job. I’ve blamed my clients (I know, ridiculous bc I never gave them the opportunity to pay me more money). I’ve blamed my dog (I mean, she needs walks but dang it I don’t have time I’ve packed my schedule too full). I’ve waffled on whether I want to accept more small projects. I say I’m done – and then I say yes to the next person that asks. Because I like helping people, and I want you to like me. And I want to make money. So how can I solve this problem, once and for all? ***6 Hours Later*** So six hours ago, I actually typed “How can I solve this problem once and for all?” and had to stop writing this income report. I was stuck. Because I didn’t know the answer. I mean, I was really asking myself how can I solve this problem? And I was having a conversation with myself in my head about how I keep doing the same thing over and over and over. Like, do I really want a solution? Or do I want to keep the drama around it and keep being the “victim” of my poor choices and humble-bragging about how I have so much work and too many clients? Gag me with a spoon. (Yes, I grew up in the 80s). And like my business coach always told me, asking myself “how can I” is magical. Because I have the answers – I just need to get past all the drama and listen to myself. The solution has been right in front of my face this whole entire time. And it’s not to “set boundaries” or “start saying no” or any of that other stuff that just doesn’t work for a YES person like me who wants to help everyone. Its my Web Designer Academy graduates. The people who I’ve trained (to do as I say, not as I do – as my mom used to say) to market themselves and provide awesome service to their clients. Who serve a wide variety of niches and a wide variety of price points. Like, there’s a web designer for everyone in there. So how can I solve this problem once and for all? Give my clients a choice. My rate is what it is, my package is what it is, and I bill by the hour, and when you work with me, I’m gonna knock your freaking socks off. But if my schedule is booked out (which as you saw from the notes in my planner, it often is) or you have a specific budget or you need an expert in a certain niche or tool? Then I refer you to my directory of WP+BFF Certified Experts – web designers who have already gone through my 12 week training course, who have invested in their WordPress education, who set their own rates based on their unique goals, and who love serving clients and leaning on each other to solve problems for their clients. It’s a win-win. I get to send clients to the awesome, amazing web designers that have gone through my training program, and I get to help everyone that comes to me, and I get say yes to everyone, and I already feel more confident about my hourly rate. Because I’m really, really good at what I do. Yeah, I said it. It’s uncomfortable to say it, but I’m saying it. So I’m in the early stages of putting that together, and I’m super pumped to debut it to my audience so you’ll have a group of vetted, super skilled web designers to hire for your projects!! So my biggest lesson learned in January is that I just have to ask, that I can still serve people if they say no, that I can always come from a place of integrity and that this really is all one big experiment. The results I get aren’t good or bad – they are just feedback that lets me know what I need to adjust going forward. So what I want you to take away from this pep talk is that all the things you try in your business, all the things you ask people for, I want you to look at those as experiments.  
2/19/201953 minutes, 23 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 211 - Attending Conferences

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Today’s Pep Talk is all about attending conferences to help you grow your side hustle. In it I share with you: Why I have a love/hate relationship with conferences. Why I think attending a conference is the most beneficial thing you can do as a side hustler. Why entrepreneur conferences are way better than corporate ones. Creative ways to fund your travel. What to do if you’re shy or introverted to have a great conference experience. Why you don’t need to have an “elevator pitch” prepared to have a great conference experience. I’m speaking at the Thrive Conference in Austin, Texas March 1-3 and I’d love to see you there! Tickets are almost sold out - so go get yours at https://www.thrivetogether.blog Join the Free 5 Day Challenge at https://www.wp-bff.com Join the 5 Day Freebie Challenge at https://www.wp-bff.com/freebiechallenge
2/13/201933 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 210 - Fearless Freelancing Carrie Dils

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Today I'm talking to fearless freelancer and WordPress expert Carrie Dils all about how she transitioned from 1:1 client work to monetizing her knowledge on a bigger scale. If you want to move beyond time-for-money in your side hustle, this is the episode for you! Carrie has been around in the WordPress and web design community for many years – I’d even seen her name around well before I decided to start freelancing – I’d be working on a website at my day job and run into a snag, start googling and her blog would come up quite often. Her name is Carrie Dils, and I came across her again when I booked a new web design client with a pretty challenging project. I was researching how to do something, came across Carrie’s website again and saw that she had a way to just book a paid consultation call by the minute – which we’ll talk about later in this episode. So I booked a call, got some advice and then invited Carrie on the podcast to talk about how she monetized her WordPress knowledge beyond one on one client work. In today’s episode, Carrie and I dig deep into: The tipping point where Carrie took the leap from day job to full time side hustle. Creating multiple streams of revenue outside of 1:1 client work as a web designer. How to do content marketing as a web designer. How to easily sell your expertise – in any subject – by the minute. How Carrie dealt with imposter syndrome when she was first starting out The #1 skill to have as a web designer. Why you shouldn’t try to do everything yourself in your web design business. Why Carrie shifted from writing Genesis and WordPress tutorials for freelancers to teaching them how to be a successful freelancer. Carrie’s #1 piece of advice for a new web designer. Carrie’s advice on pricing. The belief Carrie had to change about herself to get where she is today. Just a quick heads up – you’ll hear some background noise in this interview – Carrie had to duck into a coffee shop to do the interview, which is totally cool with me! So let’s dive in to my interview with WordPress Expert and Fearless Freelancer Carrie Dils. So if you’re a web designer or you’re thinking about freelancing, head on over to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/freelance and that’ll send you over to my blog post all about how I got my first web design client, and you can get your hands on a freebie – my 7 Step Website Consultation Checklist and script that will walk you through how to do a consultation call with a potential client. All the resources mentioned in this episode can be found over at peptalksforsidehustlers.com/210 – and if you’re not a web designer but you want to build your own website for your side hustle, head on over to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day and sign up to take my Free 5 Day Website Challenge which will walk you step by step how to build your entire website with WordPress in just 5 days. See you next week! Resources mentioned in this episode: Carrie Dils  How to Successfully Freelance (*this is an affiliate link) Smart Passive Income E-myth Book  Profit First – Mike Michalowicz  Entreleadership – Dave Ramsey Bio: Carrie Dils is an independent contractor and developer with 20 years of experience in web development and deep experience in full-scope WordPress projects. From small, locally-owned businesses to Fortune 500 companies (including Disney and Nvidia) Carrie has worked with clients to deliver creative and successful digital solutions. She’s passionate about education and empowering others to do the work they love. She hosts the OfficeHours.FM podcast for digital freelancers and small business owners, helping them grow their service-related businesses. She teaches WordPress and front-end development courses for Lynda.com and LinkedIn Learning. She also offers a series of business courses for freelancers at The Fearless FreelancerTM. When Carrie’s not working, she’s probably reading a book, playing with her dogs, drinking a craft beer, or taking an absurdly long walk.
2/6/201952 minutes, 21 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 209 - December Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to my December Income Report! Every month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! IMPORTANT THINGS THAT HAPPENED IN DECEMBER. I began tracking my time and limiting my work hours. I was accepted to Bryan Harris of Growth Tools’ Partnership Accelerator Program. I got my laptop repaired. I scheduled my last work day as December 16. We met with a builder to see if he’s a good fit to build on the property we bought back in June. I updating my branding. Notes I found to myself in my planner: REVIEW OF MY GOALS When in quit my day job in January of 2018, I set a goal to generate $10,000 in revenue so that I could pay myself $5,000 a month and set aside the other $5000 for taxes and expenses: $5000 – Income to cover my old paycheck. $2500 – Expenses $2500 – Taxes WHAT I FOCUSED ON IN DECEMBER I had a couple of big goals in December. I really wanted to take time off during the holidays, so I blocked my calendar from December 16 through the first week of January. I told myself I would let my clients know that I was unavailable and to plan accordingly. Part of the reason I wanted to take time off is to simply have some white space between all of holiday get-togethers and travel – but another reason is so that I would have time to do one of my favorite things to do – which is to work on my own business, unencumbered by meetings and appointments. My other big focus was to stay true to my health goals. Continue going to hot yoga three times a week. To avoid overindulging in sweets and comfort food and alcohol that is fun in the moment, but zaps me of my energy and makes me feel terrible, physically and mentally. With those goals in mind, here’s what I made in December of 2018: TOTAL REVENUE: $7627.52 Affiliate Income: $1334.80 Courses: $2661.00 Done For You & Consulting: $3631.72 TOTAL EXPENSES: $3246.84 Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here. NET PROFIT: $4380.68 BIGGEST LESSONS LEARNED I learned a lot of lessons in December. While I was very successful at not overindulging and still enjoying myself around the holidays, I was not very successful at holding my boundaries when it came to client work. December has always been a slower month revenue-wise, and this year was no exception. December and July are always slow for me. I didn’t promote anything for sale this December because I didn’t want to be available to support it! And it’s just not my style to jump in to all the holiday sales. It’s my goal to take the entire month of December off in the future… I mean, it seems like that last week before Christmas is when everyone is trying to finish everything they never got to throughout the year so that they can actually take time off from work and come back in January with a clean slate. It’s like, the height of the holiday frenzy. So next year, I need to do a much better job of letting my clients know my schedule. I didn’t really tell them this year… I just kinda blocked it on my calendar and put an out-of-office up. And then I still responded to the emergencies. I can’t help myself sometimes… I also still do some consulting for my old day job and they have a big year-end project every year that despite my best efforts always goes to the 11th hour… So if I’m still consulting for them at the end of 2019, there’s no use in fighting that. It happens the exact same way every year. I’m really glad that I not only scheduled the week between Christmas and New Years but also the first week of January off so that I could work on my own stuff. I didn’t hold my boundaries the week of the 16th, but I did for the 2 other weeks I had planned vacation! And it’s not like it was hard because the rest of the country was checked out of work anyway… But you guys, I LOVE working on my own stuff. I get so much joy out of getting to be creative without having a deadline. So I gave my brand a facelift in December, and that’s just saved me so much time in these first few weeks of January already. I had worked with a branding firm back in September of 2017 to help me transition my branding away from WP+BFF and to Shannon Mattern. And I absolutely loved the experience and the end result and I’d recommend my branding company, Braid Creative, all day every day. We did much, much more together than just create a logo, color scheme and fonts to solidify my brand. But what I discovered after awhile was that my branding was very difficult to implement consistently across platforms. Specifically it was a challenge to make it look good vertically for Pinterest and horizontally for my website, and hard to outsources the nuances of making it look good anyone who is not a graphic designer, and the colors were too muted to really stand out online. I had been gathering inspiration and had an idea of the changes I wanted to make, and then one morning, I was just sitting on my couch drinking my morning coffee with no plans, nowhere to be and no one needing anything from me, and the inspiration struck, and as they say, the floodgates opened, and I rebranded. Then I started working on my systems. I’ve overcomplicated my marketing funnels and I don’t need all the bells and whistles I have. They don’t work right half the time anyway. And as I mentioned in my last income report, I’ve decided to move away from Infusionsoft to ConvertKit. Not just to save a few hundred dollars a month, but also because I am committed to simplifying my business in 2019. I waffled on whether I had time to do it myself or if I wanted to oursource it, and at the end of the day I decided to just go for it. I like to make decisions in real time, as I’m solving the problem and setting things up. And then I know what’s available to my clients because I’ve explored all the possibilities. So one day I was inspired to just do it – and I just got lost in time rebuilding all of my email sequences and working on the migration. Which is still in process in the 3rd week of January. I hit a snag with the built-in Infusionsoft importer and I’m working with ConvertKit engineers on it, but getting help has been a slow process. I’m hopeful I’ll get a good result because I want to be able to recommend ConvertKit to you guys – but customer service is so, so important so I hope they step it up. Maybe I’m too nice and patient… Anyway. Another thing I did was make some decisions on whether I’d continue offering some services I’d offered in the past. And I’d been watching Marie Kondo’s show on Netflix and it actually helped me make some decisions. Tracking my time helped me make the decisions. And obviously looking at these income reports also helped me to make some decisions. Does offering this service bring me joy? How much time am I spending on this service? How much do I make on this service? And some services didn’t even come close to making the cut. The WordPress Protection Package didn’t make it. I lose a lot of money on it. Of course I’ll still serve my existing clients and my Done For You Clients, but I won’t be accepting new clients for that service and I removed it from my site. Accepting small projects of under 8 hours didn’t make the cut. Why? Because when tracking my time I discovered that a 2 hour time block actually took 4 hours when I included communication and prep. And a 4 hour time block actually took 6. And while I could build that into the price, those projects are difficult to schedule and take my time away from marketing more lucrative offers and working on partnerships. I know there’s a need out there to help people with smaller projects, so I need to analyze whether it’s worth it for me to build a team to take those on, or just say no. I’m still undecided. And honestly I feel guilt turning away work when I know there are so many web designers out there who are struggling to market themselves and get the work. It’s something I need to work on. As I look back on December and 2018 as a whole, I’m proud of what I accomplished. It’s important to me personally to not have debt other than a mortgage, and I maintained that boundary in my business. It was important to me to pay myself twice a month, and although I was late a few times on my paycheck I still paid myself everything I planned to pay myself. And I think I paid enough in quarterly taxes, but I really have no idea since it’s my first year without a W2. I’m eager to do my taxes so that I can settle up with the IRS if I need to and get a clear baseline for 2019 (and see what I’m able to do to get a construction loan to build a house as a self-employed person). And I’ve taken steps to grow a legit team – but I still have work to do. I keep accepting work and then doing it myself instead of taking the time to delegate and train a team. So I definitely need to work on that. In 2018 I for sure overworked myself, spent my time on non-income producing activities and barely grew my email list or my social media followers. And I still hit my revenue goals. So I’m really excited to see what happens in 2019 when I focus my time on my physical and mental health, list growth, partnerships, income producing activities, simplifying my business, building a team and practicing constraint. Watch out 2019, ready or not, here I come!
1/30/201939 minutes, 26 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 208 - How To Turn Your Blog into a Book

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Today I'm answering a listener question about the process of turning a blog (or any type of content) into a book. I'm sharing the process I've been through so far as I contemplate and prepare to write a book. In this episode I’ll break down: Why this is even a topic someone would ask me about. Why consider turning your blog (vlog, podcast) into a book. The process I’m using to turn my content into a book. How I’ll ultimately publish my book. Resources: The Book You Were Born to Write by Kelly Notaras Write Your Damn Book Course by Jen Sincero Hay House Writer’s Workshop Vicki Fitch, #12Books12Months  Self Publishing School And if you’ve been listening for awhile and haven’t left me a review yet, can you please do me a ginormous favor and subscribe to the podcast go to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/review – reviews are a signal to iTunes that there’s good info here and they are more likely to suggest my podcast. Thanks so much for listening, and if you want step-by-step video training on how to build your website and set up your email list and hook up your freebie, head on over to www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day and sign up for my free 5 Day Website Challenge!
1/23/201940 minutes, 8 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 207 - Ask Shannon: Have You Ever Been Scammed?

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! In today's episode I'm answering listener questions. Hear all about that one time I got scammed online, and I also give advice to a group of authors on the best type of paid advertising use to get more traffic. #1 – Have you ever been scammed online? I’d like to know if you’ve fallen foul of the million and one other types of make money online “opportunities” that have promised to help create an income but which only make an income for the person offering the information. I’ve been through so many different courses, twists and turns and feel that I’ve made it through the sea of charlatans to what it really means to make a viable, legal income online (thank you Shannon!) Has that been hard for you? Or are you one of the lucky ones who landed on the right track straight away? Xina – Listen to the episode to hear about the time I was scammed online, plus my experience with buying online courses. Additional Resources:   Many freelancers and side hustlers fall victim to the scam, and Tekla’s blog post offers tips how to detect and fight scammers. #2 – Where should I put my advertising dollars? A group of authors I belong to is considering advertising, since we all do most of the free marketing actions already. If we are going to spend money, where is it best spent? FB, Amazon, Google? And how do we determine the best target audience for our ads? The group is the Bluestocking Belles. You can find out more about their individual books and boxsets here  Rue Listen to the episode to find out my recommendation for how to spend their ad dollars, and what to make sure they have in place before they spend any money! And if you’ve been listening for awhile and haven’t left me a review yet, can you please do me a ginormous favor and subscribe to the podcast go to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/review – reviews are a signal to iTunes that there’s good info here and they are more likely to suggest my podcast. Thanks so much for listening, and if you want step-by-step video training on how to build your website and set up your email list and hook up your freebie, head on over to www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day and sign up for my free 5 Day Website Challenge! If you have a question, head over to www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/207 and leave me a comment and a link to your website - I’ll answer your question and shout you out on a future episode!
1/16/201922 minutes, 45 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 206 - Marketing an Online Business 101 - Back to Basics

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! In episode 206, I’m taking you back to basics for marketing your side hustle online. If you find yourself thinking that online business is too complicated, it doesn’t have to be. And if you’re new to it and want a clear path to getting started, this is the episode for you. There are 5 ingredients to any successful online business. Niche Build Know, Like & Trust Email Addresses An Offer Consistency Click here to get the full show notes Welcome to episode 206 of Pep Talks for Side Hustlers, where we’re going back to basics with Marketing an Online Business 101. I love that the beginning of the New Year is a time to reflect on the past year, what went well and what we want to change. And in Episode 205, I walked you through all the lessons I learned in 2018 from my very first year of self-employment, and almost all of them had to do with mindset and changing my beliefs. So today, I want to give you some really practical, actionable advice that you can walk away with and start to implement today to grow your online business. We’re going back to the basics. To the 101 level, of exactly how to start a business online and how to market it. This episode is perfect for beginners who are in the very early stages of starting an online business. But if you’ve been in business awhile and you’re anything like me, you can be guilty of overthinking and overcomplicating things. And when you’re side hustling, you’re working 40-50 hours a week and you have a family and a life, it is so important that you have the simplest yet most effective structure to your online business that you can have. When you’re a solo-entrepreneur, it can be really tempting to set up a bunch of “automation” to run your business, but what I’ve found is that there’s a point at which it becomes more of a time-suck than a time-saver. And there’s a point at which you can ask your prospects to choose so many different adventures that they get tired of having to make all these decisions! Do you want to upgrade or join my membership? Do you want the membership with bonuses or without? Do you want lifetime access or not? Like, the reason that I’m a long-time subscriber to HelloFresh is that I honestly do not want to decide what to make for dinner. I want the decision made for me! (And no, HelloFresh does not sponsor my podcast – but if you’re listening, HelloFresh, I’d make a great spokesperson!!) Anyway, I realized that I have been asking my subscribers to make waaaay too many decisions. I took some time the week between Christmas and New Year’s Day and the first week of January simplifying my business. Undoing complex funnels and automations that created more headaches for me and my customers. Paring down the number of freebies I offer on my website and sending people into my virtual company through just one front door. Removing services that cost me more to offer than I make, not only in direct dollars, but in time taken away from marketing my business. And deciding to get back to basics when it comes to the trainings that I offer. Because yes, I know a lot about a lot of things when it comes to online marketing, but I don’t have to be the one to teach all the things. I can be the person that refers you to the right people that specialize in the things I know. So if you find yourself thinking that online business is too complicated, it doesn’t have to be. And if you’re new to it and want a clear path to getting started, this is the episode for you. So let’s dive in. There are 5 ingredients to any successful online business. I’ll list them out for you, and then I’ll go into detail on each one. They are: Niche Build Know, Like & Trust Email Addresses An Offer Consistency Niche I think one of the most challenging things we have to do when we’re just starting out is to figure out how to translate what we love to do into a niche. The definition of “niche” is a specialized segment of the market for a particular kind of product or service. For example, I absolutely love building websites. And technically I have the skillset to build any kind of website for any kind of company. When I first started freelancing as a web designer, I worked for anyone who needed a web designer by word of mouth. And what I discovered is that I don’t love building websites for just any kind of company. In fact, there are some kind of companies that I absolutely dread building websites for, and every time I work with those companies I think to myself, “I am NEVER working for that kind of business ever again.” So when I discovered that I could teach WordPress and make a living online from it, I was really forced to think, “Well, what kind of website am I going to teach people how to make?” I talk about this in New York Times Bestselling Author Chris Guillebeau’s book Side Hustle, about how I figured out who I was going to serve with my web design skills. I’ll link up to it in the show notes and you can read that story in detail in Chapter 8. But I decided that I wanted to help people who were just like me. Solo entrepreneurs, determined to build their own business, while working full time, and they needed a website that helped them market themselves and build their email list, and they needed to be able to like, sit down on their lunch hour and knock out part of their website. And then sit back down the next day and get the next chunk done. And that’s why I created the 5 Day Website Challenge in the format that I created it, because the people I’m serving only have a limited amount of time every day to dedicate to it. And I actually niched it down even further in my mind to target women only because I felt like I could better relate to women, but what I’ve discovered is that my niche isn’t a specific age or gender. My niche is people with a specific situation and mindset and goal. They want to create an online business. Their time is limited and they want to transcend beyond one-to-one time for money, and they want financial freedom and control over their time. I’m passionate about helping those kind of people, because I’m passionate about having that in my own life. That’s what makes it not feel like a grind. And if I marketed myself as someone that could help anyone with a website, it’s hard for potential customers to figure it if I’m really the right person for them because I’d have to be so generic and vanilla so as not to exclude anyone. That’s why I teach students in my Web Designer Academy – to choose a niche. Who are you going to build websites for? What are you going to learn about their industry so that you’ll be more knowledgeable than they are about what they need in a website? I’ve been listening to the Life Coach School podcast with Brooke Castillo. She teaches people how to be life coaches. She used to teach people specifically how to be weight loss coaches. How do you, as someone who wants to be a weight loss coach, walk into a room with 50 other people who also want to be weight loss coaches and not feel totally scared that everyone else is doing what you’re doing and worry about how you’ll ever get a client? By choosing a niche. Weight loss for people that: Have over 100 pounds to lose. Want to lose baby weight Have been overweight their whole lives Have recently gained weight Have the last 10 pounds to lose Have a chronic illness The biggest challenge in choosing a niche is taking the focus off of yourself and what you do. I’m a web designer. I’m a weight loss coach. I’m a social media manager. It’s not about you. It’s about who you want to help and the results they want. Web design for solo entrepreneurs that are done with DIY. Weight loss for women who are recently divorced. Social media for non-profits who want to increase donations. Blank for blank who want to blank. Figure that out first, and you’ll be golden. Know, Like & Trust Once we know who we’re serving, we need three things to position ourselves as the right person to help them. Know, Like and Trust. I’ve gone in depth on this in previous episodes, but it boils down to this: Does your niche know you exist? Do they like you? Do they trust you. That’s the work you have to do, and your website is a huge, huge part of that. Social media too. When it comes to the Know part, does your niche know you exist, I hear the same thing over and over from people: “How do I get people to find me online?” They want to be Googled. They want to be stumbled upon on Pinterest or YouTube, or scrolled by in a social media feed. And there’s absolutely nothing wrong with that… UNLESS it’s your only plan. You cannot sit back and wait for niche to find you. Well, you can, but it’s just going to take you a lot longer. You have to go out and find your niche. Show up where they are hanging out with awesome, valuable content. Just saying that made me think back to 7th grade when I liked a boy who was on the wrestling team and the baseball team. So I signed up to be a stat for wrestling and baseball… It sounds a little stalker-y now that I think about it… But it worked. We got to know each other, like each other and we were “going together” for like a whole month. Do people still say “going together”? Anyway… I’m talking Facebook groups. Networking groups in real life. On other people’s blogs and podcasts that serve the same audience. There are so many ways to do this. That’s what gets people to Know, Like and Trust you. You show up, you’re your awesome self and not trying to be someone you aren’t – because people can see through that – and you give your knowledge away freely which positions you as a trustworthy. It’s a signal that if I pay you for more of this, you’re gonna deliver and I’m gonna get results. So this valuable content you’re sharing, it lives on your website. “Hey, I have a blog post about that, here’s the link. Hey, I have a free training on that, here’s how you can sign up. OMG I’m holding a webinar on that exact topic next week, here’s the registration page.” Social media is how you find them, website is how you build know like and trust. Which leads me to the third thing in our list, email addresses. Email Addresses Now, you might be thinking, “Shannon, it’s 2019. It’s the age of live-streaming and Instagram stories. Why are you still talking about email? Everyone talks about how much they hate email and how they are overwhelmed by their inboxes. I don’t want to annoy people. Can’t they just go right to my sales page and buy my program?” There are some kinds of email that I hate too. Especially when I had a day job – because all of that email was just someone else’s giant to-do list for me, full of drama and fires that needed to be put out. But I love email that’s going to help me, and serve me and teach me something new. Especially if I’ve taken the time to go to your website and put my email address in to get the resource that someone in a facebook group told me I HAD to get. Or something that speaks to a results I want in my life. Another thing about email is that it lets you continue the conversation. It doesn’t get lost down the feed. You can save it for later. It lets you lead your prospect on a journey through making a decision to work with you or not. So the way you get someone’s email address is to offer something of value for free for the privilege of showing up in their inbox and starting the relationship. And I like to make that free thing really, really good. Like something people would pay money for. I see a lot of crappy freebies out there, especially on Pinterest. It might be enticing enough that I’ll put in my crap email address – do you guys do this too? You have an email account just for junk mail and store coupons and stuff? Like, I’ll put my Yahoo account in if I’m like, yeah… I kinda wanna see if this is going to be any good, I’m gonna check this email to get the freebie but if it sucks I don’t care if I never open another email from this person again – they aren’t getting into my Good Inbox. Then I have a personal email address that I’ll use once I’m confident that I really do want to hear from that person. Maybe I’ve heard them on a podcast, read their blog, read their book. The way they market their freebie makes me think YES, I want that and I want everything else I can get my hands on. If your freebie is that good, I’ll use an email address I actually check. And I’ll look forward to those emails. And that’s what I want you to do – make a freebie that people are going to let you into their inbox that they actually check, and look forward to getting more from you. But you gotta know who you’re doing it for. That’s why niche is so important. But here’s where people get tripped up when I say this: They are so worried about making it so good that they never actually put anything out there. They worry about whether they made the right freebie or not, if they gave away too much or not enough… You gotta come up with an idea, put it out there in front of your niche, and do all that work, and then they will tell you if it’s good or not. You might not get it right the first time. In fact, I hope you don’t because the feedback you’ll get when you get out of your head and into your customer’s head is so valuable. An Offer Once you have someone on your email list and you’ve developed a relationship with them, and they understand how you can help them, the way that you turn prospects into customers is to offer opportunities to work with you on a deeper level. You can make offers strictly via email, you can invite people to attend a webinar and make the offer on a webinar. But you have to make offers and let people know how they can work with you. Don’t expect that they are doing to figure it out on their own – it’s your job to let people know and give them all the information they need to decide whether or not they want to. Describe all the results people can get from working with you. If they don’t pay attention, that’s okay. Maybe now’s not the right time. If they do pay attention and decide not to buy from you, that’s okay too. But follow up and find out why – super valuable information. Before I talk about the final ingredient, let’s recap: Be really specific about who you want to serve even if you could serve everyone. Build the know like and trust factor – and take the lead on becoming known. Don’t wait for people to find you. Then use your website to build the like and trust factor. Give people a reason and a way to give you their email address so you can deepen the relationship and lead them through all the information they need to decide whether or not they want to work with you. Make offers to let people know exactly how you can serve them. Consistency The final ingredient to making this formula work is consistency. You may not see immediate results. Keep planting seeds. You may discover you need to tweak your niche. You may discover that you need to spend more time building the know like and trust factor. You may need to test out a few different freebies. You might need to change your offer or change the way you talk about your offer. Where I see mistakes being made, and I’ve done this too, is that you think oh, this tool or platform doesn’t work. I need to be on Instagram or Pinterest or YouTube. I need to change that. I need to run ads, I need a new logo. I need a sales funnel. It’s all shiny objects that overcomplicate your business. You gotta give yourself the time to let things unfold. And give the tactic you’re testing time to unfold and get traction. And that’s the beauty of starting an online business as a side hustle. You have the luxury of having a paycheck coming in so that you’re not desperate to make it work. So that you have time to test and change and test and change. But don’t CHANGE until you’ve spent time actually going out and finding your audience. You can’t sit and wait for them to come to you and then say, “Well, that didn’t work. I guess I need to redesign my website.” Consistently create valuable content. Consistently share your free stuff where your niche is hanging out. Consistently reach out to people who serve your audience and offer to add value. Do the work without expectation of immediate results and without fear that it might not be the right thing. I want you to get through all the wrong things as fast as possible. So that’s it. Those are the basics of marketing your online business. One niche. One freebie. One email campaign. One offer. That’s all you need. I spent 2018 testing a whole bunch of different things. I honestly tested like 10 or 12 different services. And now I’m scaling back to the 4 core things that got me to this point: Teaching solo entrepreneurs how to build websites. Teaching them how to market their websites. Building websites and creating marketing strategies for people who are done with DIY. And teaching web designers how market themselves, get clients and manage projects. It all started for me with just one thing: teaching people how to build their websites. The rest came directly from my audience telling me what they wanted from me next. So keep it simple, keep it consistent and I can’t wait to see what you create in 2019! And if you’ve been listening for awhile and haven’t left me a review yet, can you please do me a ginormous favor and subscribe to the podcast and click here to leave me a review (reviews are a signal to iTunes that there’s good info here and they are more likely to suggest my podcast). Thanks so much for listening, and if you want step-by-step video training on how to build your website and set up your email list and hook up your freebie, head on over to www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/5day and sign up for my free 5 Day Website Challenge!  
1/9/201933 minutes, 43 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 205 - What My First Year of Self Employment Was Really Like

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! I quit my day job a year ago today. Today I’m sharing the the truth about what the first year on my own was really like. If you’re new here…long story short, after side hustling for three years, I had grown my business to the point where it could sustain itself and me. I left the security of my corporate job to strike out on my own so that I could be in control of my time and my earning potential. And today, is the one-year anniversary of me quitting my day job. As I was preparing to write this post, I went back and reviewed the monthly income reports I’ve written throughout 2018. I’m so glad I wrote those reports. It’s easy for me to gloss over the details and just focus on the highlights… I’m not going to go over each month in detail in this post but if you want to go back to January and follow the journey, you can read them all here. 2018 was an amazing year. I earned over $100,000, didn’t go into debt and never missed paying myself a paycheck. We’ll see if I paid enough in taxes though – you’ll have to wait for my April 2019 income report on that one… I do have money saved back just in case. I launched my podcast, Pep Talks for Side Hustlers, which I didn’t know I’d fall in love with podcasting, but I totally have. I re-launched the best version yet of my free 5 Day Website Challenge. I spoke at a conference. I got to meet Amy Porterfield and thank her for inspiring me. And I made some new biz besties who helped me change the trajectory of my business. I also learned a lot of lessons in 2018: Money should be spent to amplify something that’s already working, not to do things you don’t know how to do or don’t have time to do. Figure it out, make sure it works, create a process and then delegate it. This goes for team members, bookkeeping, and for services like Pinterest and Facebook Ads. I wasted a lot of money paying people to do things I didn’t have time to do or didn’t know how to do, and those things didn’t even end up benefiting my business. I learned that more isn’t better. Being on every social media platform isn’t better. A daily podcast isn’t better. Launching 3 courses a month isn’t better. It’s exhausting. I learned that when something isn’t working, the time to take action is right when you discover it’s not working. Contemplate why it’s not working, and then make a decision on how to move forward. Waiting months because you’re afraid to address it doesn’t do anyone any good. I learned that I can be easily lured by shiny objects that will sidetrack me and that I don’t think all the way through to the consequences of following those paths. I know how easily I can be knocked off course, so I need to create some constraints for myself. I learned that it really doesn’t matter how many people I have on my email list. It matters how many people I add each month and how many that stay are actively engaged and paying attention. I have less people on my list now than in my first year and I’m making more money than ever before. I learned that there’s no secret that I still need to discover when it comes to online business. Solve a problem for a niche, give value before you ask for anything in return, build an email list of potential customers, make offers. It’s as simple as that. That formula will make you a hundred dollars, a hundred thousand dollars and a million dollars. I learned that if I want my business to grow, I cannot continue trading my time for money. I need to delegate web design work to other people, even if I CAN do it. And that’s a GOOD thing. I learned that just because I want to change doesn’t mean I will. Wanting to change and taking specific action to change are two totally different things. I learned how to want to change, and how to turn it into action. And most importantly, I learned that I have to put my physical and mental health first, and not my ego first. Because “putting clients first” and “being busy” is really putting my ego first, and keeping myself in a victim mentality where I get to act like everything is happening to me and I have no choice. I have all the power. I always have. After reflecting on 2018, if I had to choose one word positive word to describe it, I’d choose TRANSFORMATION. If I had to choose one negative word, FRANTIC is the word I’d use to describe it. Because while it is absolutely amazing, and I’m really proud of myself for everything I accomplished, I did have some challenges. You can read about them in those income reports. Every single challenge I encountered can be traced back to one single source: my mindset. That means every single problem I encountered has a solution that’s within my control: my mindset. I paid attention to the challenges. I’m learning from the challenges. That’s how transformation happens. And as I sit here on December 31, 2018 writing this post, it almost seems like I’m reading about a different person as I read the first several income reports. I can see that person was struggling. She was stressed out and scared and trying to pretend like she wasn’t. What’s really interesting to me is that my first year as a full time entrepreneur with no day job for a safety net mirrors what my first year as a brand new side hustler was like. Trying everything, seeing what works. Launching with webinars. Launching evergreen. Facebook ads. Pinterest. Instagram. Livestreaming. A membership program. Alexa flash briefings. A podcast. Income reports. Affiliate promotions. YouTube videos. But as a new side hustler, I wasn’t scared. I still had a paycheck coming in. There wasn’t so much at stake. I created so much content in 2018 it makes my head spin. And it made my audience’s head spin too. Instead of inspiring and leading them, it confused and overwhelmed them. I created content and marketed my programs at such a frantic pace to ignore the uneasiness of being solely responsible for creating my own income. The transition from the employee mindset to the entrepreneur mindset was a challenge I hadn’t considered. I never questioned my self-worth as an employee. I knew I showed up and did my best work every day… But when a launch didn’t go as planned in my business? All the feelings of not being good enough rushed to the surface. And so what did I do to deal with those feelings? Overwork, overeat and overdrink of course! I mean, what else do you do when you don’t want to feel terrible in the moment? Thankfully, now I know what to do besides overwork, overeat and overdrink, so that’s a major win. My plan for 2019 is growth through constraint. Do just a few things, and do them really well. Build my audience through relationships. Build a strong, empowered team that does just a few things and does them really well. Delegate to them. Focus on my mental and physical health. Stop overworking, overeating and overdrinking. I’m confident I can do all of those things. I’m entering my fifth year of business, my second year of being on my own. And if nothing else, I know 2019 will be transformational too!
1/2/201947 minutes, 32 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 204 - Two Marketing Tactics to Focus on in 2019 to Grow Your Side Hustle

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Today I'm sharing two tactics that transcend social media platforms and algorithms that I'm focusing on in 2019 (and why I think they are more powerful than any other tactic available online now). Click here to leave a rating and review on iTunes! Do you ever feel totally overwhelmed when it comes to how to start or grow your side hustle and actually start making some money? Should I be on Instagram? Should I be livestreaming? Should I be on Pinterest? What email system is best? Should I work on SEO? Should I do Facebook ads? Today I’m going to share with you my best tips and advice for what to focus on in 2019 if you want to build a sustainable business and get traction. So, before we dive in, I know that there are a lot of you out there listening to this podcast and your business is not a side hustle, it’s your main hustle. So I just want you to know that this podcast is for you too! Everything I share on Pep Talks for Side Hustlers is to help you grow and market your online business from the perspective of someone who is just a few steps ahead of you. And I want to motivate you to keep going no matter what, because here’s the thing: The podcasts I’ve listened to to learn how to market and grow my business are made by wildly successful multiple six and seven figure entrepreneurs, like Amy Porterfield and Pat Flynn and Chalene Johnson and Being Boss. And while their content is amazing and they share tactics and strategies that entrepreneurs at any income level are able to replicate, they are so far beyond us in their journeys that sometimes it’s hard to look at their stories and see the possibility for ourselves. Like, what if you can’t possibly imagine making a hundred thousand dollars or a million dollars? But… Can you imaging working from home? Being your own boss, making enough money to fund your lifestyle and having financial freedom and control over your time? I can’t teach you to make a million dollars because I haven’t done it (yet). I CAN teach you how to make a hundred thousand dollars in a year because I have done that, but I didn’t start there. It took a few years to get there. I can teach you how to structure your online business so that it actually makes money, and I can teach you tried and true principles that work no matter what all the algorithms do. Leave me a review??? So before we dive in, I think podcasting is one of the most amazing ways to connect with an audience. I mean, if you’re anything like me, you’re listening to this and you’re in your car right now, or working out, or walking the dog, or cleaning your house. And I look at my stats, and there are hundreds of you that listen to this podcast every single day. That blows my mind! I want you to know how much I appreciate you – and I also have an ask – because there are hundreds of you that listen, but I only have 16 reviews on iTunes at the time of this recording! If you are one of those 16 people – you are awesome and amazing, thank you! But if you listen via iTunes like my stats tell me that the majority of you do, and you haven’t left me a review, can you please take a moment to do it? Not if you’re driving, of course. Do it when you get to work. So if you’re on your iPhone, you can open up a browser and go to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/review and you’ll get a little pop-up that says “Open this page in iTunes Store” and you’ll say yes, and then it’ll take you to my podcast in the iTunes store where you can click on the Write a Review button. Or if you have the podcast app open on your iPhone, and you see the episode icon and the play button at the bottom of the screen, just tap it to pull up the episode details and scroll up to see the show notes – I left you a link right there in the show notes that you can tap on to leave me a review. I’m not just asking because I want to look at those reviews and feel better about myself (although I do love reading them), but I’m asking because your reviews are a signal to iTunes that the podcast is valuable, and the more ratings and reviews I get the more likely I’m to get the podcast promoted on iTunes! So, I have a goal to get 500 reviews for the podcast in 2019 – and thank you for listening and for helping me get there! What to Focus on to Market Your Online Business in 2019 Okay, so let’s move on to what I think you should focus on in 2019 to market and grow your online business – because there are a LOT of shiny objects out there to get distracted by. I was listening to Kelly Roach’s Unstoppable Success Radio podcast episode 441 – “3 Actions to Take Before the Bubble Bursts for Shortcut Nation” which I’ll link to in the show notes. In that episode, Kelly shared her theory that the bubble is going to burst for online businesses that rely exclusively on advertising to generate huge amounts of traffic into automation funnels to sell them online courses. I mean, that’s the passive income dream, right? Create the course, set up the automation, run the ads, get people in the funnel and watch the money roll in from the beach in Costa Rica. Her reasons for thinking this are pretty interesting. Like a behemoth like Amazon coming in and just disrupting the entire thing, like AirBNB did to the hotel industry. Or tighter regulations on social media advertising as giants like Facebook come under even more fire when it comes to privacy and bots and fake news and influencing elections. Or just subpar content being sold that makes the rest of us look bad. I recently came across an article where a travel instagrammer pre-sold a course promising to teach people how to become a travel instagrammer, didn’t deliver the content as promised and what she did create was, according to her students, nowhere near worth the $500 price tag they paid – and one of the students wrote an article on Medium about how she was scammed, a petition was started and tons of customers demanded refunds. She promised to pay them back, but many of them went around her and demanded refunds from the Teachable platform, and they actually guarantee refunds. This Instagram Influencer Charged $500 For A “Master Class” In Social Media. Now, Angry Students Are Calling It A “Scam.” So if the automated passive income funnel from the beach is a pipe dream, and if the way many people do business online right now gets dramatically altered by tighter regulations, what can you do to make sure your business rises to the top? I personally think there are two things you can do to transcend shiny objects. Build relationships, and build your email list. When you build relationships with people that serve the same audience that you serve, you elevate your ability to connect with your ideal client above paid advertising and social media algorithms. When you have the email addresses of people that have raised their hand and said, “Yes, I want to hear from you about how you can help me solve this problem or improve my life,” you elevate your ability to market to your audience beyond the whims of algorithms. Instagram, podcasting, blogging, livestreaming, Pinterest, Facebook ads… Those are just tactics. Shiny objects that could fade at any moment. So how do you go about building relationships? By providing value without expectation of anything in return. And how do you go about building an email list? The same way, by providing value without expectation of anything in return. Practically speaking, to build relationships you reach out to people who serve the same audience as you and offer to provide value to them or their audience. And you do your research and offer something specific, and don’t ask them to help you come up with what to offer. And then you deliver. Plant the seed, see what grows. To build an email list, you create a free piece of content that solves a problem or changes a belief. Then you go find people that need it and offer it to them. Simple as that. This is where tactics like Instagram, podcasting, blogging, livestreaming, Pinterest, Facebook ads come in – but if your content really does provide value, it will transcend the platform and people will start telling other people about it. And on Day 3 of my 5 Day Website Challenge, I teach you exactly how to set up your email list – like step by step. Exactly how to give that freebie away in exchange for an email address. So if you’re paralyzed by where to start, start by building relationships. Then create that free thing and set it up so you can capture email addresses. And then it doesn’t matter which shiny object you choose. Some will work better for you than others. You can’t make a wrong choice. In 2019, commit to building a strong foundation for your business so that no matter what happens in the online landscape, your business will survive and thrive!
12/26/201829 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 203 - November Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to episode 203, my November 2018 Income Report! If you’re new to the podcast, each month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! IMPORTANT THINGS THAT HAPPENED IN NOVEMBER. I interviewed two million-dollar business owners on Pep Talks for Side Hustlers – Episodes 195 & 196 with Kelly Roach and 198 & 199 with Bernadette Doyle. Bernadette Doyle challenged me to start tracking my time and start working 25 hours a week NOW. I ran a final promotion for my membership program, Serious Side Hustlers. I closed my membership program, Serious Side Hustlers. I turned 39, and my husband turned 40. I joined Brooke Castillo’s Self Coaching Scholars. I decided to move to 1 episode of Pep Talks for Side Hustlers per week. I completed the second month of my Web Designer Academy. I made an executive decision to not schedule anything in the evenings. Notes I found to myself in my planner: REVIEW OF MY GOALS When in quit my day job in January of 2018, I set a goal to generate $10,000 in revenue so that I could pay myself $5,000 a month and set aside the other $5000 for taxes and expenses: $5000 – Income to cover my old paycheck. $2500 – Expenses $2500 – Taxes WHAT I FOCUSED ON IN NOVEMBER November is typically just one big celebration in my life. We have tons of friends and family with November birthdays (including me and my husband), and of course Thanksgiving is in November, which is my favorite holiday. Probably because every so often my birthday falls on Thanksgiving which makes it extra special. It starts getting cold here in Ohio in November – which I absolutely love. Just ask my good friend Tyler – he’ll tell you that outerwear is my favorite type of clothing. Give me all the sweaters and jackets and gloves and hats and scarves – and I’m a happy girl! And of course right after Thanksgiving it’s time to decorate for Christmas and start getting into the holiday spirit. So when I was planning out my 2018 around this time last year, I blocked off the week of Thanksgiving for vacation, and the following Thursday – Monday to take a trip to celebrate my husband’s 40th birthday, which has become a tradition with our group of friends that we all take a trip together for our 40th. That’s going to be me in 2019, so if you have any ideas of where I should go in mid-November, head on over to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/203 and leave an idea for me in the comments! So if you listened to my October income report back in episode 201, you’ll recall that my main focus in October was to SLOW DOWN so that I could start taking time out for myself. I started taking a yoga class, I delegated more to my VA and intern and moved from 7 podcasts a week down to three and went from working about 60 hours a week down to 40. Entering November, I started to feel like I was finally, FINALLY creating the freedom that I had so desperately craved when I put this whole crazy plan in motion to start a side hustle and grow it to the point where it could sustain itself and replace my day job income. And then I had a couple of conversations that were transformational. I had the pleasure of talking to two entrepreneurs who have both reached the million dollar mark in their business – Kelly Roach and Bernadette Doyle. And I don’t think it is any coincidence at all that both of them shared the same piece of advice for making more money in your business – which is: Get really clear on what is income-producing in your business and what isn’t. Spend the majority of your work time on income-producing activities. Make sure your team is spending the majority of their time on income-producing activities so that they are generating more revenue for the business than what you’re paying them. Stop doing the things that don’t produce income, especially those things Bernadette called “creative avoidance” like working on your website instead of pitching clients. So I set up the time-tracking app called Toggl that Bernadette recommended, and started tracking all of my time in November. Two more really exciting things that I did in November: One, I enrolled in Brooke Castillo’s Self-Coaching Scholars membership program. I did it on my birthday as a gift to myself – for a few reasons: I’ve been listening to her podcast for the past several weeks and it’s totally helped me change how I think and stop buffering with overeating, overworking and overdrinking. Amy Porterfield recently credited Brooke for the mindset shift she needed to lose 58lbs, and if Amy Porterfield says something’s good, well, you know it’s good. I really, really wanted access to her Stop Overeating masterclass which is a part of the program. There’s an Entrepreneur track in there, which I also really wanted access to. I also applied for and was accepted to Bryan Harris’s Partnership Accelerator beta test group, which is a mentorship to teach you how to land partnerships, podcast spots and guest posts. It starts in January and it supports my goal to explode my email list in 2019. And I added another yoga class to my schedule. This yoga class is at 9am! Like, every day I’m driving there I’m like, I can’t believe I just get to take a yoga class at 9am instead of sitting in rush hour traffic. So that’s what I really focused on in November. Slowing down. Gratitude. And really paying attention to what I’m learning about what it takes to get to the next level. TOTAL REVENUE: $9690.52 Affiliate Income: $2040.80 Courses: $3267.72 Done For You & Consulting: $4382.00 TOTAL EXPENSES: $3399.70 Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here. NET PROFIT: $6290.82 BIGGEST LESSONS LEARNED So here’s the thing – I’ve had a really hard time all year keeping my expenses down to $2500 a month like I planned. I’m going to make even more adjustments in December for 2019, but when I create my budget I’m just going to be more realistic about my expense budget. I want to get a cushion of at least five grand in the bank, because right now my business is pretty much paycheck to paycheck, like, I’m cleaning out my business bank account every month when it’s time to pay myself, pay off my credit card for last month’s expenses and put money aside for taxes.. I use the Profit First model from the book of the same name by Mike Michalowicz, so I pay myself first. Then taxes. Then expenses. And I also don’t do debt. I put all of my business expenses on my Chase Southwest Rewards credit card so I get all those airline miles, and then I pay it off on the last day off every month. I pay myself on the 15th and the 30th, and I move money to my tax account to pay my quarterlies. So there are about $500 in expenses I could cut every month but… It will require me to totally rebuilding my website and automation platforms, which is a significant time investment for me. I realize that I could save $6K a year by making the move – and there’s my cushion… But I also know that the work would take me at LEAST 4 solid weeks, and I think it would disrupt some of my funnels and result in a lot of customer service requests… Or I could pay my team to do it for me and coach them through it, and create content and tutorials around the experience, and train them on handling those customer service requests. Which would be what like, a real business owner/leader would do instead of doing it all herself… So I’m still him-hawing around about whether or not to make those structural changes… and I know these are the mindset shifts I need to make to grow my revenue. I learned a few really big lessons in November. First, I noticed that it only took 11 months of being on my own for me to freaking chill out and start enjoying myself… But seriously, what I’ve noticed is that it really does take awhile for my mind to get used to change. I can make a decision, but then it takes some time for the action to follow the decision. And then it takes some time to recognize the results and acknowledge them as a result of my action. I know how to pay attention to my thoughts now, and I do think that the changes I want to create will happen faster than in the past. And I’m spending much, much less time working. I’m down to about 25-30 hours. I’ll give you a breakdown on all of that in a future episode. Second, I’m spending 95% of my time on non-income producing activities. Which is why I shouldn’t be the one moving rebuilding my own platforms… I spend a lot of time “working”. And I suspect it’s just another way to avoid uncomfortable emotions, just like overeating and overdrinking. Looking at how I’m spending my time, it’s mind-boggling to me how I’ve managed to produce nearly $10,000 a month in revenue consistently this year. And it’s really exciting. What would be possible for me if I even shifted it to 20%, or even 50%? That’s my plan for 2019. Finally, I learned the most important lesson, I think anyway, in November was while I was decorating my Christmas tree. My husband had gotten our tree out of the basement and set it up in our loft, and we were all excited to listen to Christmas music and decorate it like we normally do together. It’s a prelit tree, and when we turned it on half the lights were burnt out. This happened last year and I had found this tool, this gun thing, online that you can use to test the strands and then you do something to the one that’s burnt out that fixes it. Clearly I have no idea how this thing works. So Floyd was like, on a mission to fix this tree and he spent two evenings obsessed with finding the burnt bulbs before he just got frustrated and gave up. So I’m like, I’m going to do something really nice for him and decorate the tree while he’s at work so he can come home and it’ll just be done, right? So because I was by myself, I decided to start listening to all the Entrepreneur modules inside of Brooke Castillo’s Self-Coaching Scholars, and I’m super excited because like at the end of all of them there’s one called How to Make a Million Dollars – which is a future goal that I have for my business. So as I’m listening, I’m hearing things like: Choose a niche. Give value ahead of time. Grow an email list. Make offers to it. If something doesn’t work the first time, try again. And I thought to myself, wow, I could totally sit here and think, “Thanks for nothing Brooke, tell me something I don’t know. This course was a waste of my time and money.”   Which is honestly, is something I may have thought in the past. But instead, I found myself feeling really excited, like “Wow, I have all of the pieces in place. I’m on the right track. I have everything I need. It’s as good as done.” And in the million dollar module, she talked about how you just separate the math from the drama, list out all the reasons why it’s impossible and that becomes your to-do list to make it happen. Which is totally exciting, because then I think things like, “I know there are so many web designers out there that just want to build websites for a living and DON’T want to be freelancers or run their own businesses – what if I could create an amazing company that would give them that opportunity? And I think of how much more I could contribute and how much more value I can give when I’m at a higher level. Again, which brings me back to why I should not be moving my own platforms and why I should empower other people to do it and lead them through the process… Like, start practicing for that leadership role now… So that really goes for you too whether you want to make $100 or a thousand dollars or a million dollars. It’s just math. All the reasons it feels impossible become your to-do list. So I was super excited because not only did I realize that I have everything I need to get to the next level right in front of me, I also finished decorating that dang tree!!! #multitasking So if there’s anything I want you to take away from this episode, it’s this: How are you spending your time? How do you want to be spending your time? And are you making as much money as you want to make? And if not, separate the math from the drama, list out all the reasons why it’s impossible for you to make the money you want to make, and then get to work changing those things. I know you can do it. Thanks so much for listening, and I’ll see you next week! Love you Byeeeeeee!!!
12/19/201838 minutes, 16 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 202 - 2019 Goals

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to episode 202!! We’re a less than a month away from 2019, and today I’m going to share with you the goals that I’ve set for myself for 2019. If you recall, back in episodes 155-161, I walked you through my strategic planning process for 2019 so that you could create your own strategic plan for your side hustle. And I also shared with you that the one thing that would make all the other things I want happen faster and easier – also known as a push goal – is to build a team (and actually use them). So that’s what I’ve been in the process of doing in the last few months of 2018 so that I have a solid foundation to stand on in 2019. And in those episodes, recorded back in September kind of at the height of my working frenzy, I shared with you my goal brainstorm. But what I didn’t do at that time is really pare any of that down and choose what to focus on. And I’m so glad I didn’t at that point, because since then I’ve had a few transformational experiences that are leading me to make some different choices than I would have made had I done this back in September. One is the mastermind retreat I went to at the end of September, and I know I’ve mentioned this on the podcast a hundred times by now and you can get all the details in episode 177, but that experience really helped me break out of the hustle and see things differently. The second is my podcast episode with millionaire business strategist Kelly Roach back in episodes 195 and 196 where I realized that I’m spending not nearly enough of my time on income producing activities. And the third is my conversation with Bernadette Doyle back in episodes 198 and 199, also a millionaire business owner who talked about how to stop overworking and focus on income producing activities. Which led me to reconsider the goals I had been thinking about and really choose a few to focus on, and prioritize how I would show up to contribute my time to them – and how I’ll be rearranging my schedule to make it happen. You gotta listen to the episode to find out what they are 🙂 I almost can’t wait for December of 2019 so I can report back and let you know that I’ve smashed those goals without killing myself physically to do it! Now I wanna hear from you – what are your goals for 2019? Head on over to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/202 and leave me a comment – and I’ll pick a few to share on the podcast along with a shoutout for your website! Have a great week, and I’ll see you right here next week!
12/12/201820 minutes, 21 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 201 - October Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to episode 201, which is my October Income Report! If you’re new to the podcast, each month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! IMPORTANT THINGS THAT HAPPENED IN OCTOBER I started going to a yoga class twice a week. I onboarded an intern who’s working 15 hours a week with me through December. I brought on a VA for 15 hours a week (my previous support contract was for 16 hours a month). I booked one new Done For You client. Notes I found to myself in my planner: REVIEW OF MY GOALS My goal each month has been to generate $10,000 in revenue because my rough breakdown to replace my old paycheck, cover business expenses and pay taxes is: $5000 – Income to cover my old paycheck. $2500 – Expenses $2500 – Taxes WHAT I FOCUSED ON IN OCTOBER In October, my main focus was to SLOW DOWN so that I could start taking time out for myself. As I mentioned in my September income report, the pace and amount that I had been working became unsustainable. I made a commitment to myself and my mastermind group that I would slow down. That I’d start taking a yoga class. That I’d get more help and start delegating more tasks to them instead of taking care of it myself because it’s faster (and I feel bad asking others to do things for me). I started transitioning things to my VA, and got my intern started on her learning journey by subscribing to my email list as a brand new customer, reviewing all of my content and noting all the things that needed fixed or didn’t make sense. I also started creating the new content for my Web Designer Academy that I had sold the prior month. I’ve done the course before, but I had so much more to add to it and change, that I decided to start from scratch. But instead of killing myself to get it all done at once, I’ve been recording and releasing one module a week. And right from the start, I recorded my process for producing and publishing the module and handed it over to my team so that I only had to do the thing only I can do – create the content. In October I also went from recording 7 podcast episodes down to 3 a week. I also started baking in October, and perfected my process for making an amazingly crusty, beautiful sourdough bread. I went from working about 60 hours a week down to about 40… which I realized I hadn’t actually done since before I started my side hustle back in late 2014… TOTAL REVENUE: $10102.11 Affiliate Income: $1872.39 Courses: $3716 Done For You & Consulting: $4493.72 TOTAL EXPENSES: $3614.62 Get the full breakdown of income, expenses and net profit month by month here. NET PROFIT: $6487.49 BIGGEST LESSONS LEARNED The biggest lesson I learned is that I can work significantly less and still make the same amount of revenue and profit. I also learned that I was covering up my fear with work by creating massive amounts of content and trying to do every single marketing tactic all at the same time instead of focusing on one thing at a time. The results of the survey I told you about in last month’s income report showed that loud and clear. I heard things like “I can’t keep up with all the content you’re putting out.” and I’m confused by all the things you offer because it’s so many things and they are changing all the time” and “I’m behind on the podcast I can’t listen to an episode every single day.” That was my fear. If I just keep producing, everything will be fine. Just keep producing. Keep answering every email. Say yes to everything. The nonstop loop of “I have to do this, I gotta do that…” that leads to stress, poor sleep, overeating, overdrinking and burnout. I found that mindset and pace to be unsustainable, and it took going to another city with 5 strangers and having them all challenge me to tell them how it was serving me for the fog of fear to clear and for me to be able to see what I was doing to myself and my brand. I also had to push past my discomfort at leaning on other people for help, and prioritize delegation above anything else in my business. The mistake I have made in the past with hiring has been bringing on people to do things that didn’t take anything off of my own plate. I gave those people all the things that would never even make it on to my plate. Like, things I wanted to do, but was too busy to do. So those tasks were getting done, but I wasn’t giving myself any relief. And also I set things up so that I was the gatekeeper – if I didn’t delegate piece by piece, there wasn’t anything for them to do, but I got so behind that by the time the work needed to be done, there wasn’t enough time to delegate. I’m not the kind of person that says hey, do this and I need it done by the end of the day. No. I follow the golden rule – do unto others as you would have others do unto you, and if someone was dropped their crap on me at the last minute because they are disorganized, I would not be happy about that. So now, I put delegation first. What process can I delegate? What can I teach and empower my team to do without me next? How can I benefit them. And I gotta tell you – going to this hot yoga class has been a game changer. I haven’t gone to a gym since I quit crossfit to start my business, and there’s nothing like having someone just lead you through a workout. No decisions to be made, no thinking, just show up and do it. And take two whole hours out of my day to drive there, take the class and drive home. And then work from the cute little coffee shop across the street for a couple hours before heading home. I started my side hustle for freedom, flexibility and financial independence. I’ve had access to it this whole entire time, but I feel like I’ve really just started to realize it and take advantage of it truly for the first time in October. I mean, I even started baking homemade bread this month. If you know me in real life, you’d be like what? You don’t bake, and you don’t eat bread. But I was compelled to try it, and I chose sourdough as my first foray into baking – which I find fascinating, because I picked the thing that takes the absolute longest to make. Like, if you’re an instant gratification kind of person, baking bread probably isn’t for you, and baking sourdough bread certainly isn’t. It’s like a 3 day process and you have to get the timing just right otherwise you’ll find yourself up in the middle of the night folding the fermenting dough… One thing I’ve learned from writing these income reports and documenting my journey on the podcast is that when I have a mindset shift or form a new belief, it’s like deciding to bake a loaf of sourdough bread. I can make the decision in an instant, but it takes some time for everything to come together, for those new beliefs and mindset shifts to really start to appear in my life. And knowing that, recognizing that pattern, I can totally be patient and not put so much pressure on myself to have everything be the way I want it to be RIGHT NOW. I can trust that everything’s coming together the way that it should and in due time it will happen. So I’d love to hear your thoughts and questions on my October income report – head on over to www.PepTalksforSideHustlers.com/201 and leave me a comment – and I’ll see you right here next week. Bye!!
12/5/201830 minutes, 44 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 200 - How I Market and Monetize My Podcast

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to episode 200 of Pep Talks for Side Hustlers. Yep, I said 200 – can’t even believe that I have created and produced 200 episodes of this podcast – and in this episode, I’m going to break down for you why I started it, how I market it, how I monetize it, and give you all the stats plus what’s going to happen in the future. If you’re brand new to the podcast – welcome!! There are 199 past episodes that share strategies and tactics to help you market yourself and grow your business online, and that share my story, all the mistakes I’ve made and successes I’ve had along the way so that you can learn from my journey. I’m a web designer by trade, and I teach solopreneurs and entrepreneurs how to build their own websites so that they are empowered to either do it themselves, or know what they are outsourcing so that they can make sure they have a website that helps their business grow instead of being a source of pain and frustration that holds them back. That business is called WP+BFF, and it stands for WordPress BFF, and it has it’s own blog and Facebook group where I answer people’s website questions. And I’m super passionate about that, don’t get me wrong, but I’m equally as passionate about marketing, growing a business, and just showing people that have the same dream that I had – to leave my soul-sucking corporate job and be my own boss – that it is absolutely possible. I needed a creative outlet for that story and mission – and that’s why 200 episodes ago, I started this podcast. And there’s some good, good stuff in those episodes, like: Episode 27 – A Tried and True Strategy to Help You Build Your Email List from Scratch 32 – What to do when you feel like quitting 151 – How to Quit Your Day Job by 2020 187 – Four Things I wish I would have known before quitting my day job And my monthly income reports where I share with you how much money I make, how I make it and my expenses. So if you’re new to this podcast, I’d love for you to check those out and then hit the subscribe button so that you don’t miss what I’ve got coming up for you next! But Pep Talks for Side Hustlers really wasn’t even intended to be a podcast. Back in episode 22 I share how this podcast was supposed to be just an Alexa Flash Briefing – you know, like when you say “Hey Alexa, What’s the news?” and any flash briefings you’ve added via the Alexa app will get played. Flash briefings are published daily, and ideally kept to under 10 minutes – you know, because people have limited time and they want to listen to all of their news and updates – and I think you can only listen to whatever has been published that day. Like you can’t go back in time and listen to old flash briefings. And if you want to learn step by step how to create a flash briefing, I actually have one on my YouTube channel – I’ll link up to it in the show notes at peptalksforsidehustlers.com/200 So I wanted to create these short audio snippets for the Alexa… and that’s what I started out doing… but then… I thought… why am I putting all of this effort into creating daily content that’s available for just one day and then goes away? Like, that’s why I really never could get into Snapchat… But anyway, I decide to also add each episode to iTunes and iHeartRadio, Spotify, Stitcher, Google and basically anywhere you can listen to podcasts. So in the beginning, I’m able to record, edit, produce and schedule all the episodes for the week in just one afternoon. I did it on Thursdays, no big deal. And then my episodes started getting longer. And longer. And longer. Apparently I have a lot to say about side hustling and what it’s really like to be self employed… So basically I turned what was supposed to be a daily short snippet, like ideally 2-3 minutes even, into a 30 minute episode. Oops. Sorry Alexa Flash Briefing Listeners… I have plans to add the podcast to the Alexa podcast app and shorten those flash briefings down to 2-3 minutes so that you have time to listen to more content from other people… And as the episodes got longer and I started to bring guests on, it started to take one whole day to produce the podcast – because I’m doing it all myself. Sometimes it would take a day and a half a week – totally a labor of love, but completely unsustainable without a team. So I published 7 days a week from April to September, then moved down to 3 a week in September, and this episode, number 200 is the first of weekly episodes going forward! I’m really excited about scheduling one day a month to produce and record podcasts so that I can focus more of my time promoting it rather than producing it. Which brings me to how I market the podcast. Just like anything else, just because you publish a podcast or a flash briefing it doesn’t mean you are guaranteed listeners. It doesn’t mean that people are going to just automatically find you. You have to go out and find your people online and put the content in front of them, and you also have to optimize your content to be found. So with this podcast, I marketed it a few ways: First, I emailed my existing WordPress BFFs email list to let them know about it and invite them to subscribe, and shared the podcast in my Facebook Group. I put a link to the podcast in the main navigation of my website, and a graphic with a link in the sidebar of my blog. I updated all my social media profiles to say that I’m the creator of the Pep Talks for Side Hustlers podcast, and I set up a little tool called LinkTree that lets you set up several links to things you want people to find when they click on the link in your social media profile – so for example, the link in my Facebook profile – when people click that it used to just take them straight to my WP+BFFs website to sign up for my free 5 day website challenge, but with LinkTree I can take them to a page that shows the 5 Day Challenge, the Podcast, and webinar’s I’ve got going on, my latest blog post, whatever I want to promote. So I added a link to the podcast on iTunes and the Alexa Flash Briefing to LinkTree, and then I started sharing all the episodes on my social media accounts, with a call to action to click on my link in the profile to subscriber. I also ran Facebook ads targeting people who like Amazon Alexa, and also people who like entrepreneurs that serve the same audience I do, so like Marie Forleo and Pat Flynn and Amy Porterfield. I was paying about 13 cents per conversion – which is the cheapest cost per conversion I have ever had, and totally worth it. So if you found this podcast from an ad – welcome and thank you for clicking on it! I marketed the podcast on Instagram – I’d post a daily graphic with the title and description – and I used a tool called planoly to schedule those out in advance. I wasn’t seeing much engagement with how I was doing that – so I stopped with instagram BUT I’m going to try out some new tactics in 2019 and I’ll report back. And finally I created a Pinterest graphic for every episode, pinned them to a Pinterest board just for the podcast, and then shared them into Tailwind tribes and Pinterest group boards. So with all of that, let me share with you some stats: At the time I’m recording Episode 200, Pep Talks for Side Hustlers has had 17,132 downloads. I honestly have no idea if that’s “good” or “bad” compared to other podcasters because most people aren’t sharing their stats publicly, but personally? When I think about my podcast episodes being downloaded and listened to 17,132 times, it blows my mind. Here’s how that breaks down: April – 652 May – 1479 June – 1773 July – 2485 August – 3448 September – 3418 October – 2453 – that’s when I went from 7 a week to 3 a week. November – 1419 at the time of this recording, about halfway through the month. A couple of things to note – it’s been a daily podcast, so I have more opportunity for downloads and when I reduced my output, the downloads went down and now I’m reducing my output to just one a week… BUT, my goal is to grow the downloads beyond my peak at 3448 in August by putting that time into getting into more earbuds through promoting the podcast even more strategically in 2019. And there will be over 200 episodes right there waiting for all the new listeners to work their way through – which if you’re anything like me, you absolutely love to start at the beginning of a new podcast and binge listen to current day. So that’s downloads, but what about the website I built for the podcast? In episode 125 I share how to build a website for your podcast and break down everything you need to optimize your website for a podcast. PepTalksforSideHustlers.com has had 2396 unique people visit the site and 5463 page views from April to November. I didn’t really set any goals or expectations for page views when I started the podcast, but again, if I could imagine 2396 people in a room hearing my message about following your dreams, it totally blows my mind! And I love having benchmarks so I can measure my next wave of efforts to grow the podcast audience against. One thing I haven’t been so great at or consistent with is asking YOU, my listeners to share this podcast, and to subscribe. So I’m going to take a moment to do that – if you could just hop on to your favorite social media and share the link “peptalksforsidehustlers.com/itunes or even peptalksforsidehustlers.com/50 or whatever the number is of your favorite episode, that helps me reach and empower even more people. And, when you subscribe, that tells iTunes that this is a great podcast and it helps me get featured and ranked so that I can reach even more people. Asking for that makes me uncomfortable, but… I gotta get over it. Just like I talk about in Episode 44, how to overcome the fear of putting yourself out there – I gotta overcome the fear of putting people out by asking for their help! So I shared how it started, how I market it, and all the stats, now let’s talk about how I monetize the podcast, meaning, how I make money from it. And the short answer is, I don’t. Not directly, anyway. I don’t have sponsors because I haven’t pitched any sponsors to say hey, I have this awesome podcast, these are the types of people that listen, here are all my stats, would you like to pay me X dollars for me to promote and recommend your product to them? I haven’t done that. Yet. I haven’t ruled it out by any means, it’s just that it wasn’t part of my master plan. For everything that I create, all roads lead to my email list. Either to my free 5 day website challenge or a webinar or some other freebie that I’m giving away. And then from my email list that’s where I invite people to purchase my products. All roads lead to my email list, and then I take it from there. But in 2019 as I shift my efforts from production to promotion, I’m open to any and all possibilities that come from Pep Talks for Side Hustlers. And thank you for listening while you’re driving, working out, walking the dog, cleaning, wherever it is that you listen – and I’d love to hear your side hustle stories – just head on over to www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/200 and leave me a comment – I’d love to hear all about your side hustle!! And we’re moving to one episode per week, on Wednesday, so I’ll see you right here next week!
11/28/201827 minutes, 36 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 199 - The #1 Key to Success in Any Business with Bernadette Doyle

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! In Part 2 of my conversation with online business expert Bernadette Doyle we dig into: Why it’s time to STOP working on your website. How to prioritize what you spend your time on. Why working on your online course is NOT income-producing. Why course correcting is the key to success in any business. Why failure is so rewarding. What a typical day looks like for Bernadette’s million-dollar business. The one thing Bernadette does every single day. Bernadette’s challenge to me on my goal to work less and why I shouldn’t wait to start working 25 hours a week. The top 3 mistakes that Bernadette sees online business owners making. The belief Bernadette changed about herself in order to grow a million dollar business. The most important piece of advice Bernadette has for you to help you grow your side hustle. And you can get a link to her Ultimate Guide to Online Profits at www.BernadetteDoyle.com – and I’ve linked that up in the show notes for you. As I mentioned in the last episode, this conversation with Bernadette shifted something key in my mind. Since I reached my initial goal of quitting my day job, I haven’t really set a new goal… I mean, I set short term monthly revenue goals, but I haven’t set a new long-term goal. But what this conversation with Bernadette opened up for me is that, like, I’ve made all of the mistakes I’m supposed to have made so far in this journey, and I just keep correcting course. And I keep correcting course. And I keep correcting course. But where am I headed? I haven’t said it out loud because I don’t think I’ve believed that it was possible for me. But after this conversation, I do think it’s possible, and I think that it’s possible because I keep making the mistakes I’m supposed to make and I keep correcting course. If I stop doing that, it won’t be possible… But I don’t see that happening any time soon… And I also haven’t said it out loud because I don’t want to be judged for it, or be seen as greedy? (That’s some mindset work I need to do right there). But long-term, I DO want to have a million-dollar business. There, I said it out loud. And I DO want to work 25 hours a week and have it be a super-focused, super efficient 25 hours. That I can do right now. In fact, I’ve got the Toggl timer open that Bernadette told me to get as I write the show notes for this episode. But what I really want to leave you with today is that I want you to go out there and make as many mistakes as you can possibly make. Have some spectacular failures. And just keep course correcting. That’s what’s SUPPOSED to happen. That’s what’s going to lead you to all of the things that you want. See you next time! Resources Mentioned in this Episode: Toggl Social Selling with Kelly Roach (Profit Exercise) www.BernadetteDoyle.com Bernadette’s Ultimate Guide to Online Profits Business Smarts with Hearts Facebook Group Bio: Bernadette Doyle is a transformational expert and the founder of the Online Profits University, an online school that teaches entrepreneurs how to create new income streams. Her entrepreneurial journey began at the age of 26 where she was successfully trading her time for money and found herself overwhelmed and constantly hustling despite how successful she was. After the birth of her first son, Bernadette found that her own success had become an anchor. As the demands on her time grew, suddenly she needed a team and to house and manage that team. Her previous business model was simply unsustainable. Soon after, Bernadette fully switched to an online model and soon found herself freed of her constraints. By packaging her expertise into products and online programs and connecting with customers by teleconference and webinar, she doubled her income in her first year as a new mother, all with time to spend with her family. By 2008, Bernadette had generated a million dollars in online sales and even masterminded personally with Richard Branson, all with the free time to be a single mother to her two children.
11/26/201827 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 198 - Taking Action Before You Feel Ready with Bernadette Doyle

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to episode 198 of Pep Talks for Side Hustlers! Today’s episode is a really special one… I’m bringing you Bernadette Doyle, an online business expert who mentors her clients to build million-dollar businesses. In Part 1 of our conversation, Bernadette and I get into: What Bernadette focused on first when she started her business that led her to building a million-dollar business. Why you don’t have to know what you’re going to sell to get started growing your online presence. Why taking action before you feel clarity is the most important thing you can do. How to generate an income when you’re not actually working. The biggest mistake (that I’m currently making) when it comes to passive income. The mindset shift Bernadette had to make to release herself from spending as many hours working. The best personal development Bernadette has ever done. The one thing to do before you take any action in your business. Okay, so are you not going to want to miss part 2 of my interview with Bernadette because she is going to share the #1 key to success in any business with you – so go ahead and hit the subscribe button so that you don’t miss an episode! And you can get a link to her Ultimate Guide to Online Profits at www.BernadetteDoyle.com.  And before I wrap this one up… I’m gonna get a little woo-woo here and say that I totally feel like it’s no accident that I’m having this conversation with Bernadette at this point in my business. It was actually a transformational conversation for me. And as I listened to Bernadette describe the mistakes most entrepreneurs make, I thought okay, I’ve done all of those things. I’m through that part. I’ve learned those lessons. Now I can move on to the next level. And I always believed that I’d be able to grow my side hustle to the point where it would replace my day job income… and I accomplished that goal and I quit my day job on January 2, 2018… But I never really set a new goal. I mean, I did set a monthly revenue goal that I talk about in my income reports, and I’ve been white-knuckling it to hit that every month… But I never set a new “goal”, like, what’s next for me? But it came to me clear as day after talking to Bernadette, and I’ll share it with you in Part 2. See you next time! Bio: Bernadette Doyle is a transformational expert and the founder of the Online Profits University, an online school that teaches entrepreneurs how to create new income streams. Her entrepreneurial journey began at the age of 26 where she was successfully trading her time for money and found herself overwhelmed and constantly hustling despite how successful she was. After the birth of her first son, Bernadette found that her own success had become an anchor. As the demands on her time grew, suddenly she needed a team and to house and manage that team. Her previous business model was simply unsustainable. Soon after, Bernadette fully switched to an online model and soon found herself freed of her constraints. By packaging her expertise into products and online programs and connecting with customers by teleconference and webinar, she doubled her income in her first year as a new mother, all with time to spend with her family. By 2008, Bernadette had generated a million dollars in online sales and even masterminded personally with Richard Branson, all with the free time to be a single mother to her two children.  
11/23/201822 minutes, 23 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 197 - How to Market Yourself

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! In this episode I’m going to teach you how to market yourself –  but before we dive in, if you’re listening to this the day it was released, tomorrow is Thanksgiving AND my 39th birthday – and I just wanted to take a moment to say how grateful I am for YOU for listening to this podcast, for being part of my journey, for telling your friends about it and sharing it with other people that you know would get value from it, and for subscribing and leaving me a review. And if you haven’t subscribed and left a review yet, I’m grateful to you in advance for when you DO – and if you’re in the US and you celebrate Thanksgiving, I hope it’s an awesome one for you. Okay, so let’s dive in to this week’s episode. You may not know this about me, but I majored in marketing and communications in college. And then, I went on to work in marketing departments throughout my career. My background is in marketing, but my passion is technology. There’s a word for that now – MarTech – but I don’t think it existed back in the day when I was in college. Like I said, I’m turning 39 tomorrow. I didn’t have internet until I was 17 years old… Can you imagine a kid these days not having internet? Anyway… So I teach people how to build a website in my Free 5 Day Website Challenge – which I’ll link up in the show notes, but I teach it from the perspective of creating the KIND of website that’s going to help you market yourself. I’ve taught over 7000 people to build their own website, and then the question that always follows is – Okay, I have a website, but… How do I market myself? Like, how do I get found, how do I sell my products and services, all that kind of stuff. And then people who are introverted or have a little bit of imposter syndrome going on avoid marketing, because it feels like you gotta constantly be promoting yourself and putting yourself out there and doing all these really uncomfortable things. So to answer the question of how to market yourself, we need to talk about what marketing IS, and what marketing ISN’T. Because it can mean a lot of different things. Marketing is NOT promoting yourself and selling things. It’s: Letting your ideal customer know that you exist. Helping them understand how you can help them solve their problem or enhance their life. And giving them all the info they need to make the best decision for themselves about whether or not to buy from you. So the good news… (especially if you’re introverted or afraid to put yourself out there) ….is that marketing really has nothing to do with YOU. Which probably sounds odd coming from the girl who tells you to put your FACE on your homepage and share your story on your About page, right? But that’s not about you either. It’s about helping your ideal customer build trust and get to know you as they make the best decision for THEM. So if marketing has nothing to do with you, it’s a relief, right? Your job is not to sell yourself or be found or prove your worth or put yourself out there. Your job is to know your ideal client/customer/reader better than they know themselves. Understanding your ideal customer is not just a FOUNDATIONAL step to marketing your website… It’s everything. So there’s another mindset shift I want you to consider: Marketing is not about getting people to find YOU. It’s about you finding THEM. It’s about going out and finding your ideal customer… Getting their attention… And inviting them to visit your website. There are essentially 5 ways to find your ideal client online and invite them to your website: Search results Social media Relationships Guest Posting Paid Advertising Which I talk about in Episode 190. And some ways will work better for you than others. It simply depends on how your ideal client researches the problem you solve and how they generally spend their time online. So if they’re researching: Do they go to straight to Google? YouTube? Pinterest? Do they post on Facebook to ask their friends, or maybe to a group? Do they reach out to their network on LinkedIn? Do they go straight to a favorite blog or website? Something totally different? What about how they spend their time online when they are NOT researching their problem? Take me, for example: While I’m having my morning coffee, I open up Facebook on my iPhone, respond to messages and then scroll my feed. I belong to tons of entrepreneur FB groups so I see a lot of that in my feed. Sometimes I’ll open up Instagram and follow back my new followers and check my DMs and scroll my feed, maybe watch a few Stories. Sometimes I won’t. I’m just not on Instagram that much… Then I’ll open up the Flipboard app on my iPhone and read articles and blog posts curated by the app for me that match my interests – lots of entrepreneurship and personal development articles. When it’s time to walk Scarlett, I’ll listen to podcasts about business and marketing and personal development. Many times, in the evenings my husband and I will watch YouTube on our smart TV. We’re planning to build a house in 2020, so we watch all kinds of videos related to home construction (I feel like an expert on septic systems… ew.) On the weekends, I’ll open up Pinterest. I like reading articles about entrepreneurship, list building, and I also like to search for and pin recipes. If I’m ever researching anything, I go straight to Google. It doesn’t occur to me to go to Pinterest or YouTube. But one of my blogger friends says Pinterest is always the first place she goes to do research, which I find fascinating! The good news is… There are TONS of ways you could catch my attention. Here are just a few: Posting in a Facebook group that I’m in. Guest posting on one of the sites that I see in my Flipboard app all the time, like Forbes. Interviewing someone that I follow and admire on your blog so that I go check it out when I see them share it on social media. Writing an epic blog post that’s optimized to show up in search results. Paying for ads that target me on the social media platforms I’m on. The bad news is… There are tons of ways you could catch my attention. And that’s why you feel overwhelmed… …like you don’t have time to do marketing… ….and have no idea what to do or where to start. But you gotta pick something and just do it. And it’s not about picking the right thing. It’s about picking SOMETHING and taking action on it. It’s about intentionally trying different things and figuring out what works best for you. So if you’ve taken my Free 5 Day Website Challenge… …you may recall that I have a pretty strong opinion on the point of building a website in the first place. The point of a website is NOT to: brand yourself. establish yourself as an expert. market or sell your products and services. (Even though a website helps with all of those). The sole purpose of building a website is to build your email list. All roads lead to your email list. Why? If you don’t get an email address from your website visitors, you have no way to… Invite them back to your site. Let them know about new content you’ve created to help them. Let them know how they can work with you on a deeper level. You’re leaving it all up to chance. And chances are, they’ve moved on to the next shiny object. So if all roads lead to your email list…We gotta compel people to sign up! And saying… “Join my newsletter list” or “Subscribe for updates” or “Get my 10 best marketing tips” is NOT compelling. If you have any variation of those as your “call-to-action” to join your email list… …that is a big reason why your email list is not growing (even if you are getting traffic). In the Free 5 Day Website Challenge, I talk about the concept of a freebie, or giving away valuable information in exchange for an email address. The freebie is an important piece of the puzzle… …but how you describe the freebie on your website is even more important. Your freebie must be results-oriented. Let’s take my 5 Day Website Challenge, for example. My ideal client wants to wave a magic wand and have all the steps laid out for them to DIY their website so that they save time and feel confident and capable. If they didn’t have the problem of not having a website and feeling confused about what to do and overwhelmed with all the choices, they’d be able to get on with getting clients and making money. So the RESULT I can deliver is to help my ideal client: “Build a website in just 5 days even if you’re not techie so that you can stop feeling overwhelmed and start booking clients.” So you know how I’m searching to solve my problem, you know where I hang out online, and you’re going to put the results I want right in front of my face and I click through to your website and opt in because you’ve piqued my interest. That’s how you market yourself. It starts with understand your ideal client’s problem and where & how they’re searching for a solution… (and what they’re doing online when they’re not searching for a solution) Then using that knowledge to: Make a DECISION on the first marketing tactic to try… Write an irresistible call to action for your freebie… Get people on to your email list. And then any time you create new content, no matter what platform, you are going to send it to your email subscribers. So that you stay top of mind. And from time to time you’ll let them know how they can work with you. So that when that one ideal client who’s been on your list for years finally believes she has the time and money to solve her problem, you’re not just coming out of nowhere trying to sell her something. So just to recap – Marketing is NOT about selling yourself or getting found. It’s about: Letting your ideal customer know that you exist. Helping them understand how you can help them solve their problem or enhance their life. And giving them all the info they need to make the best decision for themselves about whether or not to buy from you. So that’s it – that’s how to market yourself online – And you’re not going to want to miss episodes 198 and 199 with my guest Bernadette Doyle because she’s going to share with you how you can take action on marketing yourself before you feel ready and share the #1 key to success in any business – so go ahead and hit subscribe so you don’t miss that – and I’d love it if you could go to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/review and leave me a rating and review – it helps me reach even more side hustlers! See you next time!
11/21/201818 minutes, 14 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 196 - Social Selling with Kelly Roach

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Kelly Roach is a business growth strategist who built her business from scratch as a side hustle to the point where her husband was able to retire, she was able to quit her day job, pay off her dream home in 3 years and become millionaires living debt free – all while working no more than 40 hours a week. Um, #dreamlife!!! If you missed part 1, definitely go back and check that out at www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/195 In Part 1, we talked about: The three places Kelly thinks you should be spending your time EXCLUSIVELY when you are first starting out. Kelly’s #1 Rule for New Entrepreneurs Why your website doesn’t work if you don’t!! How to fully maximize your team to their full income-generating potential. The two things you HAVE to invest in if you want to seriously grow your side hustle. I highly recommend Kelly’s book, Bigger Than You so that you can claim ultimate freedom, wealth, fulfillment in your business. “When you can see the greatness in another person and they see that you see that in them, it creates a great partnership.” – Kelly Roach And today, we talk about: How Kelly transitioned from side hustle to full time. How to SLOW DOWN so that you can move forward. Why YOU should be the one focusing on connecting engaging and converting Why podcasts are for serious business owners who are in it for the long haul. The 5 core functions of business (and where entrepreneurs fall short) and how to get people and systems around those 5 functions. What a Social Selling team member can do for you. The belief Kelly had to change about herself to get where she is today. Two pieces of advice she has for you if you’re serious about growing your side hustle. Check out Kelly at https://kellyroachcoaching.com/ Listen to her podcast “Unstoppable Success Radio” Join her Tribe of Unstoppables Facebook Group Unstoppable: 9 Principles for Unlimited Success
11/19/201821 minutes, 17 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 195 - From Superstar Employee to CEO with Kelly Roach

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! One of the coolest things about having a podcast is having the chance to connect and have conversations with other entrepreneurs that are where I want to be – which is why I’m so excited to bring you this interview with business growth strategist, Kelly Roach. Kelly’s team reached out to me to introduce us and see if she’d be a good fit for the show, and so like I do with every guest, I spent some time researching Kelly and making sure our values align and all that good stuff – because you guys, I’m not gonna just let anyone into your earbuds okay? So I start researching Kelly and I’m going to be totally honest with you right now… I got a little bit intimidated!!! I mean, this girl built her business from scratch as a side hustle to the point where her husband was able to retire, she was able to quit her day job, pay off her dream home in 3 years and become millionaires living debt free – all while working no more than 40 hours a week. Kelly’s current life is my #dreamlife So I flipped the script on my imposter syndrome, kicked the feeling of “Why would Kelly Roach want to be on my podcast?” to the curb and told myself, “um, Shannon, it’s because you get thousands of downloads a month and who WOULDN’T want the chance to talk to you guys because you’re ah-mazing” And decided to use the opportunity to get some insight into exactly how she did it. Oh, and you’re not going to be disappointed. Kelly breaks down exactly how she did it. And the good news for all of us is that it’s totally possible for us to do it too. In Part 1, we talk about: The three places Kelly thinks you should be spending your time EXCLUSIVELY when you are first starting out. Kelly’s #1 Rule for New Entrepreneurs Why your website doesn’t work if you don’t!! How to fully maximize your team to their full income-generating potential. The two things you HAVE to invest in if you want to seriously grow your side hustle. I highly recommend Kelly’s book, Bigger Than You so that you can claim ultimate freedom, wealth, fulfillment in your business. “When you can see the greatness in another person and they see that you see that in them, it creates a great partnership.” – Kelly Roach Don’t miss Part 2 in Ep. 196 where we talk about: How Kelly transitioned from side hustle to full time. How to SLOW DOWN so that you can move forward. Why YOU should be the one focusing on connecting engaging and converting Why podcasts are for serious business owners who are in it for the long haul. The 5 core functions of business (and where entrepreneurs fall short) and how to get people and systems around those 5 functions. How to have a Sales Team as a solopreneur selling information products. What a Social Selling team member can do for you. The belief Kelly had to change about herself to get where she is today. Two pieces of advice she has for you if you’re serious about growing your side hustle. Check out Kelly at https://kellyroachcoaching.com/ Listen to her podcast “Unstoppable Success Radio” Join her Tribe of Unstoppables Facebook Group Unstoppable: 9 Principles for Unlimited Success
11/16/201822 minutes, 13 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 194 - A Pep Talk for Myself

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Do you ever have one of those days – or weeks – where you do everything BUT the thing you’re supposed to be doing? I’m actually having one of those weeks right now… On Sunday, I planned out my entire week like I usually do – and here’s what it looked like: On Monday morning, I planned to write 4 of the 5 emails in a new Challenge that I’m testing out. And then after that, I planned to write and record the 7th module in my Web Designer Academy – my advanced training that teaches web designers how to market their business and get clients and run projects. I started writing those emails… and I never finished. Didn’t get to the 7th module. Tuesday I planned to go to yoga in the morning, and then work on client projects the rest of the day, and then meet my old boss for happy hour. Which I did all those things, no problem. Wednesday I planned to write my podcast episodes so that I could record them Thursday morning. And then I have a ton of meetings back to back Thursday afternoon and an on-site client meeting on Friday. And still need to fit that Web Designer Academy module in. I mean, I know what I’m going to put in it, it’s all outlined… So here I find myself, on Wednesday, working on updating the InDesign File for my 2019 Plans & Things planner (which I love so much I asked the designer to sell me the source file so I could have it for personal use forever) while watching the Great British Baking Show. Um, that wasn’t on my to-do list for this week. At all!! And then after I finished that, I starting looking at a file of writing prompts for my podcast, and none of them resonated. Until I realized that this week, I’ve been doing everything but the things I’m supposed to be doing. That gave me a great idea for a podcast! So what gives? I know myself well enough now that when I’m not feeling clear or confident about something, I will avoid doing it. That new Challenge I’m testing out? I’ve got all kinds of thoughts swirling around in my mind… Am I giving too much away? Maybe I’m not giving enough away? Maybe people don’t want to learn marketing from me. Maybe they’ll only ever see me as a web designer solves their tech problems. Why do I keep banging my head against the wall with trying to teach this marketing stuff? Do people even care? These are the thoughts that I KNOW are churning just below the surface. And those thoughts are leading me to inaction. Or, distraction, rather. Because if I distract myself, then I won’t really ever let them bubble up, so I don’t have to REALLY examine them. So I’ll do everything BUT finish writing that email series. Have you ever been there? Stuffing down all those feelings of inadequacy? Distracting yourself with busywork to avoid feeling them? Today’s pep talk is really for me. It’s one I need to give myself right now. Because I can sit here and worry about whether or not this new Challenge will get the results I’m wanting to get and work on updating my planner to avoid feeling crappy about thinking that way, then not take action on it, and get exactly what I have right now. Which is no results. And then I’ll get behind on my deadlines, So that I can feel busy, So that I can distract myself from thinking about feeling inadequate by feeling busy instead… Or, I can just let my mind go there for a minute and feel it. So what if I give too much away? So what if I don’t give enough away? So what people don’t want to learn marketing from me? So what if people will only ever see me as a web designer solves their tech problems? So what if I keep banging my head against the wall with trying to teach this marketing stuff? So what if people don’t care? What is the worst that can happen? The worst is that I feel inadequate – which feels like a tightness in my chest and a lump in my throat. So I can have no results and feel inadequate OR, I can do my best, finish writing those emails, put them out there and use what happens as information to make my next decision. Which is results. So here’s the thing – in the past, it might have taken me weeks, even months, of avoidance behavior to figure out what was really going on, and even then, I’d probably need someone to point it out to me. That fact that I even recognized this on my own today is HUGE. That’s progress. So. I needed to take the time to give myself this pep talk. And if you’re feeling inadequate and avoiding doing the things that will force you to put yourself out there and possibly reveal to the world that you ARE inadequate… It’s okay. It’s fine to feel that way. It’s just a feeling. Do the thing anyway. Give yourself a chance to have a different outcome. If you do nothing, you’re depriving yourself of the chance. So what about you? I mean, I can’t be the only one who’s ever felt this way! Head on over to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/194 and leave me a comment. What do you do when you’re avoiding negative feelings?
11/14/20188 minutes, 40 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 193 - Search Engine Optimization for Side Hustlers

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! In today’s pep talk you’ll learn 10 SEO steps you can take on your website so that you can get more traffic to help you grow your side hustle. And be sure to check out the Thrive blog for more awesome content to help you grow your influence online (and more blogging tech articles by yours truly).
11/12/201828 minutes, 5 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 192 - Can We Talk About Self Care For a Sec?

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Okay, so this episode is all about self-care… and can I just be honest for a second? I’ve always thought the term “self-care” is kinda cheesy and a little indulgent. Like, I don’t have TIME to stop working to go get my nails done and go shopping and take a bubble bath. That’s honestly what I would think when people would say “Take time for self care.” But now, I think of self care as “Taking time to do something that’s not working and doesn’t require a screen and that’s also not an obligation or commitment you’ve made to someone else.” And I’m all about it. So how did I get here? Back in episode 139, I shared with you how I had just finished reading Brendan Burchard’s new book, High Performance Habits which is all about how there are 6 areas of your life that have the most impact on your performance: Clarity Energy Necessity Productivity Influence Courage And how to develop habits to help you improve in each area of your life. At the time of reading the book, I took the assessment that came along with it – which you can find at highperformanceindicator.com, and interestingly enough my highest score was in Productivity (3.83 out of 5) and my lowest score was in Energy (2.83 out of 5). I just took the assessment again, about 60 days after I took it the first time and after making some important changes in the Energy area of my life. I’ll share with you the results here in a moment, but first I want to share with you the changes that I’ve made and how I feel like they have impacted my energy – so that if you’re struggling in the energy category, maybe you can try some of these things to help you. Hot Yoga Twice a Week – 8:30AM – 10:30AM Waking up at 6AM without an alarm instead of 5:30AM with an alarm (and having dreams that I remember every single day) No working after 6PM Reduced working on weekends. Decreased number of Pep Talks from 7 to 3 Brought on a Project Manager/VA Walking Scarlett 40 minutes a day. Baking Community Monthly massage with my sister So here’s the thing – two months ago, I felt terrible, physically and mentally. My eyes have never felt so tired in my life!! My overall high performance score was 3.64 out of 5. And I didn’t sit down and make a list and say “These are 10 things I’m going to start doing now to practice self care and get my energy up.” In fact, many of them came out of the Mastermind retreat that I did back in September, and they were ideas recommended to me by the girls in my group, and I committed to the group that I would follow through on them. If not for that, I probably wouldn’t be recording this pep talk because I’d still feel like crap. Today, I actually woke up at 4:30AM, like, wide awake and ready to start my day… But I went to bed at 8:30PM last night – I mean, my grandma stays up later than me, plus it’s November and getting dark super early here in Ohio… but anyway… I have felt fantastic the past few weeks. And because I’m doing things to take care of myself and manage my energy, I wanted to take the High Performance Indicator again and see if my energy score increased – and it totally did! My energy score is a 4 out of 5! That’s a significant improvement. My productivity score also increased from 3.83 to 4.5 – EVEN THOUGH I’M WORKING LESS. My scores increased in every single area, and my overall score is a 4.25, and the top 15% of high performers have a score of 4.76… I mean, I know logically that it’s hard to perform when you don’t feel good, but to see how just working on my energy improved all these other areas, I mean, it’s making me want to schedule even more time for yoga! So what this tells me is that improving my health and maintaining and improving my energy are going to get me to the next level. Not another marketing tactic or working harder. But dialing in what I’m already doing and getting my physical and mental health in order. I know how challenging it can be when you’re working full time and growing a business to make time for self care – at least, it was for me. Self care was a thing I was going to do AFTER I built the business. And I didn’t really do it until I was forced to because I was so exhausted… So what about you? How do you feel about your energy level? Are you taking care of your energy so you can side hustle for the long-term? Or are you powering through now so with the intention of making time later? I’d love to hear from you. Head on over to www.peptalksforsidehustlers.com/192 and leave me a comment on the show notes!
11/9/201820 minutes, 47 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 191 - Massive Action vs. Passive Action

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Today I want to share with you something that I learned recently about taking massive action vs. taking passive action. Lately I’ve been listening to a podcast called The Life Coach School with Brooke Castillo. I discovered Brooke earlier this year on the Being Boss podcast. I don’t know if they still do this, but at one point you could call in and share your “I am Being Boss” moment, and on my very first day of self employment I left a voicemail saying “I’m Shannon Mattern and I’m being boss” and that message was tacked on to the end of Brooke Castillo’s episode – which I’ll link up in the show notes. So I subscribed to The Life Coach School podcast, like, 8 months ago, but I didn’t really listen to it… Like, in my mind it wasn’t going to help me make money or grow my business and if it’s not all about marketing and entrepreneurship, I don’t have time for that. Well, that was my mindset for most of this first year, anyway… but now that I’ve come out of that cloud of fear and stress, I’m understanding how important it is to take time to take care of myself physically and get my mind right. And then I hear Amy Porterfield, my mentor who doesn’t know she’s my mentor, mention Brooke as someone who helped her change her mindset about weight loss, and then I heard her on Amy’s podcast, and I start to think maybe… just maybe this is something I need to pay attention to. Maybe this is a moment of synchronicity like I talk about in episode 99… Like, my Being Boss moment was tacked on to Brooke’s episode not by coincidence, but to get me to pay attention. So I start listening at the beginning – and I’m kinda blown away. Not like in a “I’ve had a huge epiphany” kind of way, but more like wow, I am actually at a point where I’m ready to receive this information and take action on it” kind of way. Which brings me to what I want to share with you today – the difference between taking Massive Action and Passive Action, which Brooke describes in Episode 16 of her podcast, which you can check out at thelifecoachschool.com/16. Brooke defines passive action as the act of consuming. Doing research. Making decisions. Pondering. And to that I would also add “Tinkering” which I’ll get to in a moment. All actions that take time and energy, but that all happen within you, and never move beyond YOU. She defines massive action not as like, one big, bold action – like a big product launch or something – or not like a huge declaration – like “I’m going to lose 100lbs!” but as lots of little actions repeated and sustained over time that have massive results. But not just any kinds of actions – actions that create something. Actions that affect things outside of your own mind. Take my decision to start a side hustle, for instance. I spent some time in passive action, researching and figuring out how to generate an income from an online business without having to work with clients one on one. Then I spent some time building the 5 Day Website Challenge. And tinkering with it, designing and redesigning it, editing every UM, AH, and LIKE out of my videos and generally doing a whole bunch of stuff that really didn’t matter at the end of the day. But then, I switched from passive action to massive action. Sharing the 5 Day Website Challenge in Facebook groups. Reaching out to interview people with audiences I could serve so I could get in front of their tribes. Pitching guest posting opportunities. Building relationships. Like I say inside the 5 Day Website Challenge – take small consistent actions daily. Also known as massive action. And I just continued with massive action in my business, and that’s why I was able to grow my side hustle to the point where I quit my day job. On the other hand, I have places in my life where I’m still in passive action. When it comes to health and fitness, I’m consuming information. Listening to podcasts. Learning. Planning. Wishing. Justifying with every new thing I learn why the last thing I tried didn’t work. It SEEMS like I’m taking action on the problem. But the reality is that I’ve never put massive, sustained action into it. Brooke makes an analogy in her podcast episode about driving to the grocery store being a massive action, or a series of actions strung together that lead you to an actual result – and then she’s like “What do you do when you get stuck in traffic on your way to the grocery store? Do you just quit? Give up? Stop turn around and go home? But that’s what so many people do when they encounter a challenge or something unexpected.” In some areas of my life, I’d never consider turning around when there’s an obstacle. But in others, I’m like, yep, I’m going home! Sometimes I feel like I’m two different people you guys – but now I think I understand why. Before starting this business, I’d never started one before and failed. And then started again and failed. And started and failed. And what I mean by failed is like, lost everything and been living on my mom’s couch. But when it comes to weight loss, I’ve started and failed a thousand times. And by failed, I mean not losing any weight at all despite massive determination and a few short weeks of lifestyle changes. It’s all in my perspective and my definition of failure. Because if I defined failure in my business differently – like, if I considered failure a course launch that didn’t go as planned, or an income goal not met, or making embarrassing mistakes – I’d think I was failing left and right! But I don’t even think of those things as failures, I’m just like, “Well, that didn’t work like I planned, what else can I try?” So what if I can redefine failure in my journey to my normal weight? What if I can reframe all my past failures as attempts that I can learn from? What if I can retrain my brain around this topic and turn my passive action into massive action? What would be possible then? I see people taking my 5 Day Website Challenge get trapped in passive action. Tinkering with their websites in a fruitless attempt for perfection. Writing and rewriting copy. Paralyzed in an ocean of overwhelm, afraid of making a wrong move. I get it. Because taking massive action requires courage. The courage to fail, to look stupid, to be humiliated, or find out that what you thought you wanted doesn’t make you any happier. But what if that’s the point? So what about you? Where in your life do you easily take massive action? Where in your life are you stuck in passive action? I’d love to hear from you – head on over to peptalksforsidehustlers.com/191 and leave me a comment – or join our Facebook group at PepTalksforSideHustlers.com/Facebook, find the post episode 191 and let me know! And go check out The Life Coach School podcast – it’s one I’ll be binging on for sure! Resources: Being Boss with Brooke Castillo 
11/7/201814 minutes, 11 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 190 - How to Get Traffic to Your Website

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! In this pep talk I cover 5 strategies you can use to drive traffic to your website. There are 7 mindset shifts you may need to make as you start driving traffic to your website: Driving traffic to your website requires ACTION. It requires putting yourself out there. It requires giving before asking. It requires patience and letting go of instant gratification and windfalls. It requires an attitude of testing and changing. It requires commitment. It requires time.  5 Strategies for Driving Traffic to Your Website Search Not just Google!! YouTube – How To Pinterest – Save for Later! Social Media Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Instagram Don’t just post and ghost – connect with others, engage, comment, share and THEN post your stuff! Relationships – Give before you ask to develop relationships with people who serve the same audience you want to serve. Guest Posting & PR When pitching yourself to brands, or to be a guest on a podcast or for a guest post, always focus on the value you can provide for them – not what’s in it for you! Paid Advertising Use it to AMPLIFY where you’re already getting traction. Pick one of these strategies to focus on for 30 days, measure your results, then test and change!
11/5/201817 minutes, 56 seconds
Episode Artwork

Ep. 189 - What Happened When I Deleted 4000 People from My Email List

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! When I discovered back in 2014 that I could make a living by giving everything I know about WordPress away for free, everything in my life changed. I stopped spending my free time watching the Real Housewives and starting listening to every podcast and reading every book and blog post and newsletter I could find about building a successful online business. And every successful online entrepreneur I found had the same piece of advice: Build an email list. Specifically, give away something of value in exchange for an email address. And those that didn’t start right out of the gate building an email list? Oh, how they regretted it! Like my mentor-from-afar, Pat Flynn. Okay Pat. You have what I want, I’ll do whatever you say. So as I was putting the finishing touches on the Free 5 Day Website Challenge at the end of 2014, I decided I’d give it away in exchange for an email address instead of making it publicly available. Then, I pasted a link to it in Nathalie Lussier’s 30 Day List Building Challenge Facebook Group freebie Friday thread. And my email list grew from 0 to 1 subscriber. was. hooked. Whatever happens to your brain when you get addicted to something, I think that’s what happened to mine when I got that email from MailChimp. I became simultaneously addicted to checking my email and growing my list. From that moment, my singular focus was to grow my email list to 10,000. Why 10,000? Probably because that’s how many subscribers Pat Flynn had when I read his article lamenting about how he wished he’d started sooner. I was on a mission, and I shared my 5 Day Website Challenge in Facebook Groups more consistently than anything else I’ve ever done. In 2015, I had grown my list from 0 to 1800 subscribers. In 2016, I ended the year at 4200. But in 2017, things slowed WAY down. I closed out 2017 with 4500… Because I removed about 1500 unsubscribes from my list. I hadn’t realized unsubscribers were showing up in my counts… I could have really bummed myself out about that many people unsubscribing… but something I really internalized in my research about building my business is that not everyone is going to resonate with my personality (and never-ending typos where I interchange “ed” and “ing”) and that’s okay. But still, 10,000 was the magic number, and I was determined to make it happen in 2018. Only 5500 to go!! I can totally do that now that I don’t have a day job anymore! In February 2018, I peaked at 5002 subscribers. And then along comes GDPR… Which if you’re not familiar, GDPR is a European law that basically says you can’t send marketing emails to people that live in Europe if you didn’t disclose you were gonna do that and get their consent when they signed up – so if you’re gonna keep doing that, you need to get fresh consent. And since I just said “Hey, I’ll show you how to build a website in just 5 days even if you’re not techie” and I didn’t say “by the way I’m gonna send you a newsletter, and info about my paid programs” – and I also had no idea who on my list lived in Europe vs. anywhere else, I made the decision to get fresh consent from my entire email list of almost 5,000 subscribers. So if you paid attention to the subject line of this email, you’ll know that after that fresh consent campaign, I had 1000 people say YES, I want to stay on your email list!! Are you kidding me right now?? Can you imagine 1000 people in a room? I can’t. It’s a lot of people! (If you’re one of those people, YOU ROCK, by the way). And then I deleted 4000 people from my email list. Ouch. I felt like I had worked really hard to get to that number… and now I can’t say I’ve helped over 5000 people build a website… And now it’s going to take FOREVER to get to 10,000…. So I started June of 2018 with less email subscribers than I had when I ended my first year of business. And guess what happened? Nothing. Nothing changed. Everything kept chugged along as it had been the first 6 months. Wait, so I don’t need 10,000 email subscribers to have a successful online business? Nope. So I tell you this big, long story about my email list obsession because I want you to know that you do not have to have a ginormous email list to find success in your business. Now, I know you might be thinking: Easy for you to say, Shannon… you deleted 4,000 and have 1,000 left. Boo hoo. I have 12 people on my email list and 6 of them are family. I’ve done everything you’ve said to do, and I feel stuck. To which I say: You gotta start somewhere. And something you did got 6 people to raise their hand and say yes, I want your freebie. What did you do to make that happen? Do more of that. And then keep doing it. Your email list is your tribe, your community. They are real people, not numbers. And when you only have 6, or 20, or 50, it’s easier reach out to them individually and thank them for signing up and ask them if they’d be willing to answer a few questions to help you find more people just like them. How did you find me? What was your biggest takeaway from my freebie? If you could wave a magic wand and solve your problem, what would that look like? How would that make you feel? Work with what you’ve got. If 6 people said yes, you are onto something. Your job is not to focus on the number of subscribers you have on your email list. It’s to focus on the actions you took to find those people and compel them to subscribe and do more of that. You WILL get traction if you keep taking action. (I really didn’t mean for that to rhyme…) It’s very possible that the way you are describing your freebie on your website doesn’t do it justice. “Give away something of value in exchange for an email address.” It’s that “of value” piece that trips people up. Let me ask you a question… If I go to your website, will I be able to tell exactly what results I’m going to get if I give you my email address and take action on the information you give me in your freebie? If I say “Join the 5 Day Website Challenge” or “I’ll show you how to build a website in just 5 days even if you’re not techie”… Which one clearly tells you what result you’re going to get? Which one is going to get you to fork over your email address? Describe your freebie on your website by the results people will get from it, not just by its name. So I’d love to hear from you – hit reply and tell me the name of your freebie and what result I’ll get from taking action on it. And if you’re feeling stuck when it comes to building your email list, I’d love to hear what you’ve tried so far and what’s going on in your head when you think about building your list. Until next week…
11/2/201818 minutes, 1 second
Episode Artwork

Ep. 188 - September Income Report

Build a website in just 5 days (even if you're not techie) at www.free5daywebsitechallenge.com Already have a website? Take the Free "Jumpstart Your Website Traffic" marketing mini-course at www.jumpstartyourwebsitetraffic.com Leave a Review! Welcome to my September Income Report! Each month I publish an income report to take you behind the scenes of my online business and reveal exactly how much money I make, how much I spend and lessons learned along the way! If yo